UA5000 Hardware Description Manual.pdf

Chapter 1 Overview 1-1.........................................................................................

1.1 ONU Introduction 1-1....................................................................................1.2 ONU Board Lists 1-2....................................................................................

1.2.1 Board List of the ONU-60A 1-2............................................................1.2.2 Board List of the ONU-F01&02A 1-3....................................................1.2.3 Board List of the ONU-F01&02AF 1-6.................................................1.2.4 Board List of the ONU-1000A 1-8........................................................1.2.5 Board List of the ONU-160B-T 1-11.......................................................1.2.6 Board List of the ONU-F01D100 1-13....................................................1.2.7 Board List of the ONU-F01D200 1-15....................................................1.2.8 Board List of the ONU-F01D500 1-17....................................................1.2.9 Board List of the ONU-F01D600 1-19....................................................1.2.10 Board List of the ONU-F01D1000 1-20................................................

1.3 ONU Cables 1-22...........................................................................................

Chapter 2 Introduction to Frames 2-1..................................................................

2.1 UAFM Frame 2-1..........................................................................................2.1.1 Overview 2-1........................................................................................2.1.2 Frame Configuration 2-1......................................................................2.1.3 External Interface 2-2...........................................................................

2.2 UAFS Frame 2-5..........................................................................................2.2.1 Overview 2-5........................................................................................2.2.2 Frame Configuration 2-5......................................................................2.2.3 External Interface 2-6...........................................................................

2.3 UAM Frame 2-8............................................................................................2.3.1 Overview 2-8........................................................................................2.3.2 Frame Configuration 2-8......................................................................2.3.3 External Interface 2-9...........................................................................

2.4 UAS Frame 2-11.............................................................................................2.4.1 Overview 2-11........................................................................................2.4.2 Frame Configuration 2-11......................................................................2.4.3 External Interface 2-12...........................................................................

2.5 UABM Frame 2-14..........................................................................................2.5.1 Overview 2-14........................................................................................2.5.2 Frame Configuration 2-14......................................................................2.5.3 External Interface 2-14...........................................................................

2.6 UAFX Frame 2-16..........................................................................................2.6.1 Overview 2-16........................................................................................2.6.2 Frame Configuration 2-16......................................................................2.6.3 External Interface 2-17...........................................................................

2.7 PV8-10 Control Frame 2-19...........................................................................2.7.1 Overview 2-19........................................................................................2.7.2 Frame Configuration 2-19......................................................................2.7.3 External Interface 2-19...........................................................................

2.8 RSP-10 Subscriber Frame 2-22.....................................................................2.8.1 Overview 2-22........................................................................................2.8.2 Frame Configuration 2-22......................................................................2.8.3 External Interface 2-23...........................................................................

2.9 RSP-14 Subscriber Frame 2-25.....................................................................2.9.1 Overview 2-25........................................................................................2.9.2 Frame Configuration 2-26......................................................................2.9.3 External Interface 2-26...........................................................................

2.10 RSP-19 Subscriber Frame 2-29...................................................................2.10.1 Overview 2-29......................................................................................2.10.2 Frame Configuration 2-29....................................................................2.10.3 External Interface 2-29.........................................................................

Chapter 3 Introduction to Boards 3-1..................................................................

3.1 ATM Service Processing Board (H601APMA) 3-1.......................................3.1.1 Overview 3-1........................................................................................3.1.2 Front Panel 3-1....................................................................................3.1.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-3............................3.1.4 Subboard 3-4.......................................................................................

3.2 IP Service Process Board (H601IPMA) 3-8..................................................3.2.1 Overview 3-8........................................................................................3.2.2 Front Panel 3-9....................................................................................3.2.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-11............................................................3.2.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-11............................

3.3 V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board (H303PV8/H303PV4) 3-12.........3.3.1 Overview 3-12........................................................................................3.3.2 Front Panel 3-13....................................................................................3.3.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-16............................................................3.3.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-20............................

3.4 V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board (H302PV8/H302PV4) 3-22.........3.4.1 Overview 3-22........................................................................................3.4.2 Front Panel 3-23....................................................................................3.4.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-26............................................................3.4.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-29............................

3.5 V5 Interface Processing Board (H601PVU) 3-31...........................................3.5.1 Overview 3-31........................................................................................3.5.2 Front Panel 3-32....................................................................................

3.5.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-35............................................................3.5.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-37............................

3.6 Remote Subscriber Processing Board (H303RSP) 3-38................................3.6.1 Overview 3-38........................................................................................3.6.2 Front Panel 3-38....................................................................................3.6.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-40............................................................3.6.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-43............................

3.7 Remote Subscriber Processing Board (H302RSP) 3-45................................3.7.1 Overview 3-45........................................................................................3.7.2 Front Panel 3-45....................................................................................3.7.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-47............................................................3.7.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-49............................

3.8 Packet Voice Processing Board (H601PVM) 3-51.........................................3.8.1 Overview 3-51........................................................................................3.8.2 Front Panel 3-52....................................................................................3.8.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-53............................................................3.8.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-53............................

3.9 ATM Interface Board (H601AIUA) 3-55..........................................................3.9.1 Overview 3-55........................................................................................3.9.2 Front Panel 3-55....................................................................................3.9.3 Subboard 3-57.......................................................................................3.9.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-58............................

3.10 16-port Circuit Emulation E1 Interface Board (H601DEHA) 3-59.................3.10.1 Overview 3-59......................................................................................3.10.2 Front Panel 3-60..................................................................................3.10.3 DIP Switches 3-60................................................................................3.10.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-63..........................

3.11 32-port Analog Subscriber Board(CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL) 3-64...............................................................

3.11.1 Overview 3-64......................................................................................3.11.2 Front Panel 3-65..................................................................................3.11.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-65..........................

3.12 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CC09ASL) 3-66.....................................3.12.1 Overview 3-66......................................................................................3.12.2 Front Panel 3-66..................................................................................3.12.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-67..........................

3.13 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CC0KASL/CC0MASL) 3-67...................3.13.1 Overview 3-67......................................................................................3.13.2 Front Panel 3-68..................................................................................3.13.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-68..........................

3.14 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CB36ASL/CB37ASL) 3-68.....................

3.14.1 Overview 3-68......................................................................................3.14.2 Front Panel 3-69..................................................................................3.14.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-69..........................

3.15 16-port ADSL Board (POTS Splitter Inside) (H601ADLA) 3-69....................3.15.1 Overview 3-69......................................................................................3.15.2 Front Panel 3-70..................................................................................3.15.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-70..........................................................3.15.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-70..........................

3.16 16-port ADSL2+ Subscriber Board (H602ADMB) 3-71................................3.16.1 Overview 3-71......................................................................................3.16.2 Front Panel 3-72..................................................................................3.16.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-72..........................................................3.16.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-72..........................

3.17 16-port ADSL2+ Subscriber Board (H602ADMC) 3-73................................3.17.1 Overview 3-73......................................................................................3.17.2 Front Panel 3-73..................................................................................3.17.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-74..........................................................3.17.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-74..........................

3.18 Subscriber Board Combining POTS and ADSL (H601CSLA) 3-75..............3.18.1 Overview 3-75......................................................................................3.18.2 Front Panel 3-75..................................................................................3.18.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-76..........................................................3.18.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-77..........................

3.19 16-port VDSL board (H601VDLA) 3-77........................................................3.19.1 Overview 3-77......................................................................................3.19.2 Front panel 3-77...................................................................................3.19.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-78..........................................................3.19.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-78..........................

3.20 2/4-Wire E&M Interface Board (H601ATIA/H301ATI) 3-79..........................3.20.1 Overview 3-79......................................................................................3.20.2 Front Panel 3-80..................................................................................3.20.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-82..........................................................3.20.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-83..........................

3.21 Direct Dial-in Subscriber Interface Board (H301CDI/H601CDIA) 3-85.........3.21.1 Overview 3-85......................................................................................3.21.2 Front Panel 3-86..................................................................................3.21.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-87..........................

3.22 Digital Subscriber Board (CB02DSL/CB03DSL) 3-88..................................3.22.1 Overview 3-88......................................................................................3.22.2 Front Panel 3-89..................................................................................3.22.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-90..........................

3.23 High Speed Subscriber Board (H302HSL) 3-91...........................................3.23.1 Overview 3-91......................................................................................3.23.2 Front Panel 3-91..................................................................................3.23.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-93..........................................................3.23.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-94..........................

3.24 High Speed Subscriber Board (H303HSL) 3-95...........................................3.24.1 Overview 3-95......................................................................................3.24.2 Front Panel 3-95..................................................................................3.24.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-97..........................................................3.24.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-98..........................3.24.5 Notes 3-100............................................................................................

3.25 SHDSL Interface Board (H521SDL) 3-100.....................................................3.25.1 Overview 3-100......................................................................................3.25.2 Front Panel 3-100..................................................................................3.25.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-102..........................................................3.25.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-104..........................

3.26 16-Port SHDSL Board (H601SDLA) 3-106.....................................................3.26.1 Overview 3-106......................................................................................3.26.2 Front Panel 3-106..................................................................................3.26.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-106..........................

3.27 Voice Frequency Interface Board (CB02VFB) 3-107.....................................3.27.1 Overview 3-107......................................................................................3.27.2 Front Panel 3-107..................................................................................3.27.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-108..........................................................3.27.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-109..........................

3.28 Railway Collinear Voice Frequency Interface Board (CB03VFB) 3-111.........3.28.1 Overview 3-111......................................................................................3.28.2 Front Panel 3-111..................................................................................3.28.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-111..........................................................3.28.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-113..........................

3.29 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H301HWC) 3-113.........................3.29.1 Overview 3-113......................................................................................3.29.2 Front Panel 3-113..................................................................................3.29.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-113..........................

3.30 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H601HWCA) 3-115.......................3.30.1 Overview 3-115......................................................................................3.30.2 Front Panel 3-115..................................................................................

3.31 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H301HWT) 3-115..........................3.31.1 Overview 3-115......................................................................................3.31.2 External Interfaces 3-116.......................................................................

3.32 Environment & Power Supply Monitoring Board (H302ESC) 3-116...............

3.32.1 Overview 3-116......................................................................................3.32.2 Front Panel 3-117..................................................................................3.32.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-117..........................................................

3.33 Environment & Power Monitoring Board (H303ESC) 3-118...........................3.33.1 Overview 3-118......................................................................................3.33.2 Front Panel 3-119..................................................................................3.33.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-120..........................................................

3.34 Subscriber Test Board (CC08TSS) 3-121......................................................3.34.1 Overview 3-121......................................................................................3.34.2 Front Panel 3-122..................................................................................3.34.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-123..........................................................3.34.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-123..........................

3.35 Subscriber Test Board (H601TSS) 3-125.......................................................3.35.1 Overview 3-125......................................................................................3.35.2 Front Panel 3-126..................................................................................3.35.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-127..........................................................3.35.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-127..........................

3.36 Secondary Power Supply Board (CC03PWX) 3-130......................................3.36.1 Overview 3-130......................................................................................3.36.2 Front Panel 3-130..................................................................................3.36.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-131..........................................................

3.37 Secondary Power Supply Board (CC04PWX) 3-132......................................3.37.1 Overview 3-132......................................................................................3.37.2 Front Panel 3-133..................................................................................3.37.3 DIP Switches 3-134................................................................................

3.38 Secondary Power Supply Board (H601PWX/H301PWX) 3-136....................3.38.1 Overview 3-136......................................................................................3.38.2 Front Panel 3-136..................................................................................3.38.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-138..........................................................

3.39 155 Mbit/s SDH Optical Transmission Board (H302ASU) 3-139....................3.39.1 Overview 3-139......................................................................................3.39.2 Front Panel 3-140..................................................................................3.39.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-142..........................................................3.39.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-146..........................

3.40 8 E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board (H601ATUB) 3-147...........................3.40.1 Overview 3-147......................................................................................3.40.2 Front Panel 3-148..................................................................................3.40.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-151..........................................................3.40.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-153..........................

3.41 16 E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board (H601ATUA) 3-155.........................3.41.1 Overview 3-155......................................................................................

3.41.2 Front Panel 3-155..................................................................................3.41.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-158..........................................................3.41.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane 3-161..........................

3.42 Fan Control Board (H601FCB) 3-162.............................................................3.42.1 Overview 3-162......................................................................................3.42.2 Description of Front Panel 3-163...........................................................3.42.3 Description of DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-163...................................

Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cables 4-1...........................................

4.1 Digital Trunk Cables 4-1...............................................................................4.1.1 Trunk Cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H 4-1.................................4.1.2 Trunk Cable From APMA/AIUA to DDF 4-5.........................................4.1.3 IPMA Subtending Cable 4-6.................................................................4.1.4 FE Upstream Cable of IPMA Board 4-9...............................................4.1.5 Trunk Cable From ATUA/DEHA to DDF 4-9........................................4.1.6 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H 4-12............................4.1.7 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB 4-19...................................4.1.8 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to DDF 4-22..............................................4.1.9 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to APMA 4-24...........................................4.1.10 Trunk Cable From H601ATUB to DDF 4-28........................................4.1.11 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H521SDLto DDF 4-31..........................4.1.12 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H303HSL to DDF 4-34.........................4.1.13 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H303HSL to OptiX 155/622HSS42SP1 4-36................................................................................................4.1.14 V.35 DCE/FE1 Trunk Cable From H302HSL to DDF 4-39..................

4.2 Subscriber Lines 4-42.....................................................................................4.2.1 Shielded Subscriber Line for 32-port Subscriber Board 4-42.................4.2.2 Shielded Subscriber Line for 16-port Subscriber Board 4-44.................4.2.3 Shielded Subscriber Line for 8-port Subscriber Board 4-45...................4.2.4 ATIA Communication Cable 4-45...........................................................4.2.5 ADLA Subscriber Line 4-46....................................................................4.2.6 ADMB/ADMC Subscriber Line 4-46.......................................................4.2.7 CSLA Subscriber Line 4-47....................................................................4.2.8 SDLA Subscriber Line 4-47....................................................................4.2.9 VDLA Subscriber Line 4-47....................................................................

4.3 Maintenance Cables and Network Cables 4-47.............................................4.3.1 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable 4-47.............................................4.3.2 Network Cable 4-48...............................................................................

4.4 Signal Cables 4-50.........................................................................................4.4.1 HW Cable 4-50.......................................................................................4.4.2 Test Alarm Cable 4-52...........................................................................

Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear Access Cables 5-1............................................

5.1 Digital Trunk Cable 5-1.................................................................................5.1.1 IMA E1 Cable From APMA to OptiX155/622H 5-1...............................5.1.2 IMA E1 Cable From APMA to OptiX155C (H601ATU) 5-6..................5.1.3 Cable From APMA to OptiX 155/622B 5-8...........................................5.1.4 Cable From APMA to DDF 5-10.............................................................5.1.5 Cable From APMA to MD5500 E8IT 5-12..............................................5.1.6 CES E1 Cable From PV8 to APMA 5-13...............................................5.1.7 CES E1 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to APMA 5-15.....................................5.1.8 IPMA Subtending Cable 5-18.................................................................5.1.9 FE Upstream Cable of IPMA 5-19..........................................................5.1.10 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622H 5-19............................................5.1.11 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622B 5-23............................................5.1.12 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622 5-24..............................................5.1.13 Cables From PV8 to OptiX 155C 5-26.................................................5.1.14 Cable From PV8 to B75 5-28...............................................................5.1.15 Cable From PV8 to DDF 5-29..............................................................5.1.16 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H 5-30.................................5.1.17 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622B 5-32..................................5.1.18 Cable Connecting PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622 5-33..........................5.1.19 Cables From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155C 5-34.......................................5.1.20 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to B75 5-35.....................................................5.1.21 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622H 5-36.........................................5.1.22 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622B 5-40.........................................5.1.23 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622 5-41...........................................5.1.24 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155C 5-43................................................5.1.25 Cable From RSPA to B75 5-46............................................................5.1.26 16-E1-Interface Cable From ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF 5-47.............5.1.27 4-E1-interface 75ohm Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF 5-53.........5.1.28 Cable From H303HSL to OptiX155/622H 5-54....................................5.1.29 Trunk Cable From H303HSL to DDF 5-57...........................................

5.2 Subscriber Line 5-59......................................................................................5.2.1 16-port Subscriber Line 5-59..................................................................5.2.2 32-port Subscriber Line 5-61..................................................................5.2.3 ATI Cable 5-63.......................................................................................5.2.4 SRX Cable 5-64.....................................................................................5.2.5 H302HSL Cable 5-66.............................................................................5.2.6 H303HSL Cable 5-70.............................................................................5.2.7 DDU Cable 5-72.....................................................................................5.2.8 SDL Subscriber Line 5-73......................................................................

5.2.9 ADLA Subscriber Line 5-74....................................................................5.2.10 ADMB/ADMC Subscriber Line 5-74.....................................................5.2.11 CSLA Subscriber Line 5-75..................................................................5.2.12 SDLA Subscriber Line 5-75..................................................................5.2.13 VDLA Subscriber Line 5-75..................................................................

5.3 Maintenance Cable and Network Cable 5-75.................................................5.3.1 Serial Port Cable 5-75............................................................................5.3.2 Network Cable 5-76...............................................................................

5.4 HW Cable 5-78...............................................................................................

Appendix A Abbreviations A-1..............................................................................

HUAWEI

HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Hardware Description Manual

V100R003/V100R005/V100R007

HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit

Hardware Description Manual

Manual Version T2-052596-20040910-C-1.70

Product Version V100R003/V100R005/V100R007

BOM 31250196

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,

Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Postal Code: 518129

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © 2004 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.

Notice

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

About This Manual

Release Notes

This manual applies to three versions of the HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit, including V100R003/V100R005/ V100R007.

Related Manuals

The related documents consist of the following:

BOM Manual

31010206 HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-60A User Manual

31013681 HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01D100 User Manual


31013393 HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01D500 user manual



31013491 HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01&02AF User Manual

31013500 HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01&02A User Manual

31250196 HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Hardware Description Manual

Organization

HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Hardware Description Manual introduces boards and cables of the ONU series.

There are five chapters and one appendix in this manual.

Chapter 1 Overview introduces the ONU series, and lists the boards in brief due to the detailed ONU equipment.

Chapter 2 Introduction to Frames describers the frames used in the ONU equipment.

Chapter 3 Introduction to Boards gives a detail introduction to all kinds of board which used in ONU.

Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cables covers the cable used in front maintenance equipment in detail.

Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear Access Cables covers the cable used in rear maintenance equipment in detail.

Appendix Abbreviations lists all the abbreviations in this manual.

Intended Audience

The manual is intended for the following readers:

Technical engineers of HONET Integrated Services Access Network Telecom administrators Installation and maintenance engineers of HONET Integrated Services Access

Network

Conventions

The manual uses the following conventions:

I. General conventions

Convention Description

Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Arial Narrow Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.

Boldface Headings are in Boldface.

II. Symbols

Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:

Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.

Note: Means a complementary description.

Environmental Protection

This product has been designed to comply with the requirements on environmental protection. For the proper storage, use and disposal of this product, national laws and regulations must be observed.

Hardware Description Manual HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Table of Contens

i

Table of Contents

Table of Contents .............................................................................................................................. i

Chapter 1 Overview....................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 ONU Introduction ............................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 ONU Board Lists ................................................................................................................ 1-2

1.2.1 Board List of the ONU-60A ..................................................................................... 1-2 1.2.2 Board List of the ONU-F01&02A............................................................................. 1-3 1.2.3 Board List of the ONU-F01&02AF........................................................................... 1-6 1.2.4 Board List of the ONU-1000A ................................................................................. 1-8 1.2.5 Board List of the ONU-160B-T.............................................................................. 1-11 1.2.6 Board List of the ONU-F01D100........................................................................... 1-13 1.2.7 Board List of the ONU-F01D200........................................................................... 1-15 1.2.8 Board List of the ONU-F01D500........................................................................... 1-17 1.2.9 Board List of the ONU-F01D600........................................................................... 1-19 1.2.10 Board List of the ONU-F01D1000....................................................................... 1-20

1.3 ONU Cables..................................................................................................................... 1-22

Chapter 2 Introduction to Frames................................................................................................ 2-1 2.1 UAFM Frame ..................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.2 Frame Configuration ............................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.3 External Interface .................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2 UAFS Frame...................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 2-5 2.2.2 Frame Configuration ............................................................................................... 2-5 2.2.3 External Interface .................................................................................................... 2-6

2.3 UAM Frame........................................................................................................................ 2-8 2.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 2-8 2.3.2 Frame Configuration ............................................................................................... 2-8 2.3.3 External Interface .................................................................................................... 2-9

2.4 UAS Frame ...................................................................................................................... 2-11 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-11 2.4.2 Frame Configuration ............................................................................................. 2-11 2.4.3 External Interface .................................................................................................. 2-12

2.5 UABM Frame ................................................................................................................... 2-14 2.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-14 2.5.2 Frame Configuration ............................................................................................. 2-14 2.5.3 External Interface .................................................................................................. 2-14

2.6 UAFX Frame.................................................................................................................... 2-16


ii

2.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-16 2.6.2 Frame Configuration ............................................................................................. 2-16 2.6.3 External Interface .................................................................................................. 2-17

2.7 PV8-10 Control Frame..................................................................................................... 2-19 2.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-19 2.7.2 Frame Configuration ............................................................................................. 2-19 2.7.3 External Interface .................................................................................................. 2-19

2.8 RSP-10 Subscriber Frame............................................................................................... 2-22 2.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-22 2.8.2 Frame Configuration ............................................................................................. 2-22 2.8.3 External Interface .................................................................................................. 2-23

2.9 RSP-14 Subscriber Frame............................................................................................... 2-25 2.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-25 2.9.2 Frame Configuration ............................................................................................. 2-26 2.9.3 External Interface .................................................................................................. 2-26

2.10 RSP-19 Subscriber Frame............................................................................................. 2-29 2.10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 2-29 2.10.2 Frame Configuration ........................................................................................... 2-29 2.10.3 External Interface ................................................................................................ 2-29

Chapter 3 Introduction to Boards ................................................................................................ 3-1 3.1 ATM Service Processing Board (H601APMA) .................................................................. 3-1

3.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1.2 Front Panel.............................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane..................................................... 3-3 3.1.4 Subboard................................................................................................................. 3-4

3.2 IP Service Process Board (H601IPMA)............................................................................. 3-8 3.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 3-8 3.2.2 Front Panel.............................................................................................................. 3-9 3.2.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-11 3.2.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................... 3-11

3.3 V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board (H303PV8/H303PV4).................................. 3-12 3.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-12 3.3.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-13 3.3.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-16 3.3.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................... 3-20

3.4 V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board (H302PV8/H302PV4).................................. 3-22 3.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-22 3.4.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-23 3.4.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-26 3.4.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................... 3-29

3.5 V5 Interface Processing Board (H601PVU) .................................................................... 3-31 3.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-31


iii

3.5.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-32 3.5.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-35 3.5.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................... 3-37

3.6 Remote Subscriber Processing Board (H303RSP) ......................................................... 3-38 3.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-38 3.6.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-38 3.6.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-40 3.6.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................... 3-43

3.7 Remote Subscriber Processing Board (H302RSP) ......................................................... 3-45 3.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-45 3.7.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-45 3.7.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-47 3.7.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................... 3-49

3.8 Packet Voice Processing Board (H601PVM) .................................................................. 3-51 3.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-51 3.8.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-52 3.8.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-53 3.8.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................... 3-53

3.9 ATM Interface Board (H601AIUA) ................................................................................... 3-55 3.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-55 3.9.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-55 3.9.3 Subboard............................................................................................................... 3-57 3.9.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................... 3-58

3.10 16-port Circuit Emulation E1 Interface Board (H601DEHA).......................................... 3-59 3.10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-59 3.10.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-60 3.10.3 DIP Switches....................................................................................................... 3-60 3.10.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-63

3.11 32-port Analog Subscriber Board (CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL)........................... 3-64 3.11.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-64 3.11.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-65 3.11.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-65

3.12 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CC09ASL) .............................................................. 3-66 3.12.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-66 3.12.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-66 3.12.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-67

3.13 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CC0KASL/CC0MASL)............................................ 3-67 3.13.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-67 3.13.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-68 3.13.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-68

3.14 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CB36ASL/CB37ASL).............................................. 3-68 3.14.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-68


iv

3.14.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-69 3.14.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-69

3.15 16-port ADSL Board (POTS Splitter Inside) (H601ADLA)............................................. 3-69 3.15.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-69 3.15.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-70 3.15.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-70 3.15.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-70

3.16 16-port ADSL2+ Subscriber Board (H602ADMB) ......................................................... 3-71 3.16.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-71 3.16.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-72 3.16.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-72 3.16.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-72

3.17 16-port ADSL2+ Subscriber Board (H602ADMC) ......................................................... 3-73 3.17.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-73 3.17.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-73 3.17.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-74 3.17.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-74

3.18 Subscriber Board Combining POTS and ADSL (H601CSLA)....................................... 3-75 3.18.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-75 3.18.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-75 3.18.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-76 3.18.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-77

3.19 16-port VDSL board (H601VDLA) ................................................................................. 3-77 3.19.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-77 3.19.2 Front panel .......................................................................................................... 3-77 3.19.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-78 3.19.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-78

3.20 2/4-Wire E&M Interface Board (H601ATIA/H301ATI) ................................................... 3-79 3.20.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-79 3.20.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-80 3.20.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-82 3.20.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-83

3.21 Direct Dial-in Subscriber Interface Board (H301CDI/H601CDIA).................................. 3-85 3.21.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-85 3.21.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-86 3.21.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-87

3.22 Digital Subscriber Board (CB02DSL/CB03DSL) ........................................................... 3-88 3.22.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-88 3.22.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-89 3.22.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-90

3.23 High Speed Subscriber Board (H302HSL) .................................................................... 3-91 3.23.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-91


v

3.23.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-91 3.23.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-93 3.23.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-94

3.24 High Speed Subscriber Board (H303HSL) .................................................................... 3-95 3.24.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-95 3.24.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-95 3.24.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-97 3.24.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane................................................. 3-98 3.24.5 Notes ................................................................................................................. 3-100

3.25 SHDSL Interface Board (H521SDL) ............................................................................ 3-100 3.25.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-100 3.25.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-100 3.25.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-102 3.25.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane............................................... 3-104

3.26 16-Port SHDSL Board (H601SDLA)............................................................................ 3-106 3.26.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-106 3.26.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-106 3.26.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane............................................... 3-106

3.27 Voice Frequency Interface Board (CB02VFB)............................................................. 3-107 3.27.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-107 3.27.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-107 3.27.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-108 3.27.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane............................................... 3-109

3.28 Railway Collinear Voice Frequency Interface Board (CB03VFB)................................ 3-111 3.28.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-111 3.28.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-111 3.28.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-111 3.28.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane............................................... 3-113

3.29 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H301HWC) ................................................ 3-113 3.29.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-113 3.29.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-113 3.29.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane............................................... 3-113

3.30 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H601HWCA).............................................. 3-115 3.30.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-115 3.30.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-115

3.31 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H301HWT)................................................. 3-115 3.31.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-115 3.31.2 External Interfaces ............................................................................................ 3-116

3.32 Environment & Power Supply Monitoring Board (H302ESC)...................................... 3-116 3.32.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-116 3.32.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-117 3.32.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-117


vi

3.33 Environment & Power Monitoring Board (H303ESC).................................................. 3-118 3.33.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-118 3.33.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-119 3.33.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-120

3.34 Subscriber Test Board (CC08TSS) ............................................................................. 3-121 3.34.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-121 3.34.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-122 3.34.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-123 3.34.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane............................................... 3-123

3.35 Subscriber Test Board (H601TSS).............................................................................. 3-125 3.35.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-125 3.35.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-126 3.35.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-127 3.35.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane............................................... 3-127

3.36 Secondary Power Supply Board (CC03PWX)............................................................. 3-130 3.36.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-130 3.36.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-130 3.36.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-131

3.37 Secondary Power Supply Board (CC04PWX)............................................................. 3-132 3.37.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-132 3.37.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-133 3.37.3 DIP Switches..................................................................................................... 3-134

3.38 Secondary Power Supply Board (H601PWX/H301PWX) ........................................... 3-136 3.38.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-136 3.38.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-136 3.38.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-138

3.39 155 Mbit/s SDH Optical Transmission Board (H302ASU)........................................... 3-139 3.39.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-139 3.39.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-140 3.39.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-142 3.39.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane............................................... 3-146

3.40 8 E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board (H601ATUB).................................................. 3-147 3.40.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-147 3.40.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-148 3.40.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-151 3.40.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane............................................... 3-153

3.41 16 E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board (H601ATUA)................................................ 3-155 3.41.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-155 3.41.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-155 3.41.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-158 3.41.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane............................................... 3-161

3.42 Fan Control Board (H601FCB) .................................................................................... 3-162


vii

3.42.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-162 3.42.2 Description of Front Panel................................................................................. 3-163 3.42.3 Description of DIP Switches and Jumpers........................................................ 3-163

Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cables......................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Digital Trunk Cables .......................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1 Trunk Cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H .......................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 Trunk Cable From APMA/AIUA to DDF .................................................................. 4-5 4.1.3 IPMA Subtending Cable.......................................................................................... 4-6 4.1.4 FE Upstream Cable of IPMA Board ........................................................................ 4-9 4.1.5 Trunk Cable From ATUA/DEHA to DDF ................................................................. 4-9 4.1.6 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H................................................... 4-12 4.1.7 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB .......................................................... 4-19 4.1.8 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to DDF ..................................................................... 4-22 4.1.9 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to APMA .................................................................. 4-24 4.1.10 Trunk Cable From H601ATUB to DDF ............................................................... 4-28 4.1.11 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H521SDLto DDF................................................. 4-31 4.1.12 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H303HSL to DDF................................................ 4-34 4.1.13 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1............. 4-36 4.1.14 V.35 DCE/FE1 Trunk Cable From H302HSL to DDF ......................................... 4-39

4.2 Subscriber Lines .............................................................................................................. 4-42 4.2.1 Shielded Subscriber Line for 32-port Subscriber Board ....................................... 4-42 4.2.2 Shielded Subscriber Line for 16-port Subscriber Board ....................................... 4-44 4.2.3 Shielded Subscriber Line for 8-port Subscriber Board.......................................... 4-45 4.2.4 ATIA Communication Cable.................................................................................. 4-45 4.2.5 ADLA Subscriber Line........................................................................................... 4-46 4.2.6 ADMB/ADMC Subscriber Line .............................................................................. 4-46 4.2.7 CSLA Subscriber Line........................................................................................... 4-47 4.2.8 SDLA Subscriber Line........................................................................................... 4-47 4.2.9 VDLA Subscriber Line........................................................................................... 4-47

4.3 Maintenance Cables and Network Cables ...................................................................... 4-47 4.3.1 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable.................................................................... 4-47 4.3.2 Network Cable....................................................................................................... 4-48

4.4 Signal Cables................................................................................................................... 4-50 4.4.1 HW Cable .............................................................................................................. 4-50 4.4.2 Test Alarm Cable .................................................................................................. 4-52

Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear Access Cables.......................................................................... 5-1 5.1 Digital Trunk Cable ............................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1.1 IMA E1 Cable From APMA to OptiX155/622H........................................................ 5-1 5.1.2 IMA E1 Cable From APMA to OptiX155C (H601ATU) ........................................... 5-6 5.1.3 Cable From APMA to OptiX 155/622B.................................................................... 5-8 5.1.4 Cable From APMA to DDF.................................................................................... 5-10 5.1.5 Cable From APMA to MD5500 E8IT..................................................................... 5-12


viii

5.1.6 CES E1 Cable From PV8 to APMA....................................................................... 5-13 5.1.7 CES E1 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to APMA ............................................................ 5-15 5.1.8 IPMA Subtending Cable........................................................................................ 5-18 5.1.9 FE Upstream Cable of IPMA................................................................................. 5-19 5.1.10 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622H................................................................... 5-19 5.1.11 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622B ................................................................... 5-23 5.1.12 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622 ..................................................................... 5-24 5.1.13 Cables From PV8 to OptiX 155C ........................................................................ 5-26 5.1.14 Cable From PV8 to B75 ...................................................................................... 5-28 5.1.15 Cable From PV8 to DDF ..................................................................................... 5-29 5.1.16 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H ........................................................ 5-30 5.1.17 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622B......................................................... 5-32 5.1.18 Cable Connecting PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622 ................................................. 5-33 5.1.19 Cables From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155C.............................................................. 5-34 5.1.20 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to B75............................................................................ 5-35 5.1.21 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622H................................................................ 5-36 5.1.22 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622B ................................................................ 5-40 5.1.23 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622 .................................................................. 5-41 5.1.24 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155C....................................................................... 5-43 5.1.25 Cable From RSPA to B75 ................................................................................... 5-46 5.1.26 16-E1-Interface Cable From ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF.................................... 5-47 5.1.27 4-E1-interface 75Ω Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF.................................... 5-53 5.1.28 Cable From H303HSL to OptiX155/622H ........................................................... 5-54 5.1.29 Trunk Cable From H303HSL to DDF .................................................................. 5-57

5.2 Subscriber Line................................................................................................................ 5-59 5.2.1 16-port Subscriber Line......................................................................................... 5-59 5.2.2 32-port Subscriber Line......................................................................................... 5-61 5.2.3 ATI Cable .............................................................................................................. 5-63 5.2.4 SRX Cable............................................................................................................. 5-64 5.2.5 H302HSL Cable .................................................................................................... 5-66 5.2.6 H303HSL Cable .................................................................................................... 5-70 5.2.7 DDU Cable ............................................................................................................ 5-72 5.2.8 SDL Subscriber Line ............................................................................................. 5-73 5.2.9 ADLA Subscriber Line........................................................................................... 5-74 5.2.10 ADMB/ADMC Subscriber Line ............................................................................ 5-74 5.2.11 CSLA Subscriber Line......................................................................................... 5-75 5.2.12 SDLA Subscriber Line......................................................................................... 5-75 5.2.13 VDLA Subscriber Line......................................................................................... 5-75

5.3 Maintenance Cable and Network Cable .......................................................................... 5-75 5.3.1 Serial Port Cable ................................................................................................... 5-75 5.3.2 Network Cable....................................................................................................... 5-76

5.4 HW Cable......................................................................................................................... 5-78


ix

Appendix A Abbreviations ...........................................................................................................A-1

Hardware Description Manual HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 1 Overview

1-1

Chapter 1 Overview

As the functional unit of the Optical Network Unit (ONU), the UA5000 integrated access unit (referred to UA5000 hereinafter) provides various narrowband and broadband subscriber interfaces to access services. This chapter covers ONU series, board lists of all ONUs and their cables.

1.1 ONU Introduction

There are multiple types of ONUs, according to the application environment or maintenance mode:

According to the environment: Indoor series and Outdoor series. According to the maintenance mode: Rear access and Front access.

As shown in Figure 1-1, these ONUs can meet the requirements of different capacity, different application environment and different maintenance modes.

512A

1000AF01A

F02A

F01AF F02AF

60A

F01D100

F01D500

F01D600F01D200

室内型室外型

F01D1000

512A

1000AF01A

F02A

F01AF F02AF

60A

F01D100

F01D500

F01D600F01D200

Front access

Indoor series Outdoor series

Rear access

F01D1000

512A

1000AF01A

F02A

F01AF F02AF

60A

F01D100

F01D500

F01D600F01D200

室内型室外型

F01D1000

512A

1000AF01A

F02A

F01AF F02AF

60A

F01D100

F01D500

F01D600F01D200

Indoor series Outdoor seriesF01D1000

Front access: the cabinet can be placed against the wall, board plugging/unplugging, cabling, and maintenance and operation can be done at the front. Rear Access: the cabinet cannot be placed against the wall. Cables are routed at the rear, while board plugging/unplugging is conducted at the front.

Figure 1-1 ONU series


1-2

1.2 ONU Board Lists

1.2.1 Board List of the ONU-60A

Table 1-1 Board list of the ONU-60A

Board Category Board Function

H303PV4: V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board

Narrowband control board. Controlling the narrowband boards in the same frame. Providing four upstream E1 interfaces for narrowband services.

Control board

H303RSP: Remote Subscriber Processing Board

Narrowband control board. Controlling the narrowband boards in the same frame. Providing one or four upstream E1 interfaces for narrowband services.

CC0HASL: 32-port Analog Subscriber Board

Providing the BORSCHT function for 32-pair analog subscriber lines. Besides, 16th and 17th ports provide reversal polarity.

CC0NASL/CC0RASL: 32-port Analogue Subscriber Board

Providing the BORSCHT function and reversal polarity for 32-pair analog subscriber lines.

CC0KASL: 16-port Analog Subscriber Board

Providing the BORSCHT function for 16 pairs of analog subscriber lines, among which, the 8th and 9th ports provide the reversal polarity.

CC0MASL/CC09ASL: 16-port Analogue Subscriber Board


CB36ASL: 16-port Analogue Subscriber Board

Providing the BORSCHT function and reversal polarity for 16-pair analog subscriber lines. Besides, it can also provide 12/16KC charging signals.

CB37ASL: 16-port Analog Subscriber Board

Providing the BORSCHT function and reversal polarity for 16 pairs of subscriber lines.

H301CDI: Direct Dial-in Subscriber Interface Board

Implementing the transparent transmission at the analog subscriber port. Not to be installed in the UA5000 frame.

CB03DSL: Digital Subscriber Board Providing eight 2B+D interfaces.

H303HSL: High Speed Subscriber Board Providing two E1 interfaces and two SHDSL interfaces.

H521B08: 8-port ADSL Board Providing eight ADSL interfaces.

Subscriber board

H521LSL: LAN Access Board Providing four downstream 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interfaces and four upstream E1 interfaces.


1-3

Note:

The meanings of BORSCHT are listed below. B: Battery O: Overvoltage and Overcurrent protection R: Ringing S: Supervision C: Codec H: Hybrid T: Test

1.2.2 Board List of the ONU-F01&02A

Table 1-2 Board list of the ONU-F01&02A


H601APMA: ATM Service Processing Board

ATM broadband control board. Controlling the UA5000 broadband boards.

H601IPMA: IP Service Processing Board

IP broadband control board. Controlling the UA5000 broadband boards.


Narrowband control board. Providing eight upstream E1 interfaces to control the narrowband subscriber boards in the same frame.


Narrowband control board. Providing four upstream E1 interfaces to control the narrowband subscriber boards in the same frame.


Narrowband control board of UA5000 slave frame or the control board of RSP frame.

Control board

H601PVM: Packet Voice Management Board

Narrowband control board. Providing two FE interfaces. Controlling the narrowband boards in the same frame.

ATM interface board

H601AIUA: ATM Interface Board Implementing the remote cascading of the UA5000.



CC0NASL/CC0RASL: 32-port Analog Subscriber Board




Subscriber board


Providing the BORSCHT function for 16 pairs of analog subscriber lines, among which, the 8th and 9th pairs provide the reversal polarity.


1-4






H602ADMC: 16-port ADSL2+ Board

Providing 16 ADSL2+ interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces, with the built-in relay. Providing the testing function to internal and external subscriber lines. Installed in the UA5000 frame.

H602ADMB: 16-port ADSL2+ Board

Providing 16 ADSL2+ interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces, without the built-in relay. Installed in the UA5000 frame.

H601CSLA: Combined Subscriber Board with POTS and ADSL

Providing 16 ADSL interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces. Installed in the UAM/UAF frame.

H301ATI: 2/4-wire E&M Interface Board

Providing six 2/4-wire E&M interfaces. Installed in the RSP frame instead of the UA5000 frame.

H601ATIA: 2/4-wire E&M Interface Board

Providing six 2/4-wire E&M interfaces. Installed in the UAM/UAS frame.


Implementing the transparent transmission of analog subscriber port. Not to be installed in the UA5000 frame.

CB02DSL/CB03DSL: Digital Subscriber Board Providing eight 2B+D interfaces.

H302HSL: High Speed Subscriber Board

Providing two V.35 interfaces and two E1 interfaces with the rate of N × 64 kbit/s (1≤N≤31).


CB02VFB: Voice Frequency Interface Board Providing 16 2-wire or eight 4-wire voice frequency interfaces.

CB03VFB: Railway Collinear Audio Frequency Interface Board

Providing interfaces for terminals of railway collinear dispatch system and common 2/4-wire audio frequency interfaces.Installed only in the RSP/PV8 frames.

H521B08: 8-port ADSL Board Providing eight ADSL subscriber interfaces and four upstream E1 interfaces.

H521BSL: 16/8-port ADSL Board Providing 16 ADSL interfaces and four upstream E1 interfaces.


Subscriber board

H521SDL: 4-port SHDSL BoardProviding four SHDSL interfaces in the TDM mode and four E1 interfaces. Installed in the UAM/UAS frame.


1-5


H601SDLA: 16-port SHDSL Board Providing 16 SHDSL interfaces in the ATM mode.


Providing 16 ADSL2+ interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces, with the built-in POTS splitter.Installed in the UA5000 frame.

H601VDLA: 16-port VDSL Board Providing 16 VDSL interfaces.


Providing 16 ADSL interfaces or 16 POTS interfaces.

Subscriber board

H601DEHA: 16-port Circuit Emulation E1 Interface Board

Providing independent 16 E1 interfaces. Supporting the unstructured (UDT) CES.

H601ATUB: 8-E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board

Standard transmission equipment. Compatible with the OptiX155/622 on optical path, 2M tributary, clock, controlling and orderwire. Installed in the UA5000 frame. Transmission

board H302ASU: 155 Mbit/s SDH Optical Transmission Board

Providing dual STM-1 optical interfaces, up to 16 E1 electrical interfaces, RS-232 transparent transmission serial port and Ethernet interface. Installed in the RSP frame.

H303ESC: Environment & Power Monitoring Board

Controlling fans. Monitoring the equipment room and cabinet, including temperature, humidity, access control, infrared and smoke sensor (Infrared and smoke sensor needs corresponding external sensors).

Monitoring & Test board

CC08TSS: Subscriber Test Board

Providing two testing channels to test the analog subscriber interface (Z interface) and digital subscriber interface (U interface).

H601PWX/H301PWX: Secondary Power Supply Board

Providing three outputs: +5V DC/30A, –5 V DC/10 A and 75 V AC/1 A.

CC03PWX: Secondary Power Supply Board

Providing three outputs: +5 V/20 A, –5 V/5 A and 75 V AC/0.4 A. Power board

CC04PWX: Secondary Power Supply Board

Providing three outputs: +5 V DC/30 A, –5 V DC/10 A and 75 V AC/400 mA.

Other board H301HWC: Differential HW Level Conversion Board

Implementing the level conversion between HW signal and clock signal, providing 32 differential HWs. Installed in the UAM and PV8-10 frames.


1-6

1.2.3 Board List of the ONU-F01&02AF

Table 1-3 Board list of the ONU-F01&02AF



Broadband control board. Controlling the UA5000 broadband subscriber boards.




Narrowband control board. Controlling the narrowband subscriber boards. Providing eight upstream E1 interfaces.


Narrowband control board. Controlling the narrowband subscriber boards. Providing four upstream E1 interfaces.

H303RSP: Remote Subscriber Processing Board Narrowband control board of the UA5000 slave frame.

Control board



ATM interface board H601AIUA: ATM Interface Board Implementing the remote cascading function of the UA5000.





CC09ASL/CC0MASL: 16-port Analog Subscriber Board

Providing the BORSCHT function and reversal polarity for 16 pairs of analog subscriber lines.


Providing the BORSCHT functions for 16 pairs of analog subscriber lines, among which, the 8th and 9th pairs provide the reversal polarity.





H601ADLA: 16-port ADSL Board Providing 16 G.DMT/G.Lite ADSL interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces, with the built-in POTS splitter.

Subscriber board




1-7






H301ATI: 2/4-wire E&M Interface Board Providing six 2/4-wire E&M interfaces.


Implementing the transparent transmission at the analog subscriber port. Not to be installed in theUA5000 frame.

CB02DSL/CB03DSL: Digital Subscriber Board Providing eight ISDN BRA (2B+D) ports.




CB02VFB: Voice Frequency Interface Board

Providing 16 2-wire or eight 4-wire voice frequency interfaces.

H521B08: 8-port ADSL Board Providing eight ADSL interfaces and four upstream E1 interfaces.

H521BSL: 16/8-port ADSL Board Providing 16 ADSL interfaces and four upstream E1 interfaces.


H521SDL: 4-port SHDSL Board Providing four SHDSL interfaces in the TDM mode and four E1 interfaces. Installed in the UAM/UAS frame.



Providing 16 ADSL2+ interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces, with the built-in POTS splitter. Providing the testing function to internal and external subscriber lines. Installed in the UA5000 frame.


Providing 16 ADSL2+ interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces, without the built-in POTS splitter. Installed in the UA5000 frame.


Subscriber board




1-8




Transmission board


Standard STM-1 transmission equipment.Compatible with the OptiX155/622 in optical path, 2M tributary, clock, control and orderwire.


Controlling fans.Monitoring the equipment room and cabinet, including temperature, humidity, access control, infrared and smoke sensor (Infrared and smoke sensor needs corresponding external sensors).




Power board H601PWX/H301PWX: Secondary Power Supply Board

Providing three outputs: +5 V DC/30 A, –5 V DC/10 A and 75 V AC/1 A.

H601HWCA: Differential HW Level Conversion Board

Implementing the level conversion of HW signals and clock signals. Providing 32 differential HWs.

Other boards

H601FCB: Fan Control Board Adjusting the fan speed and detecting the fan state, and reporting the fan status to the ESC board.Or communicating with the control board through the RS-485 interface to report fan alarm and to adjust the fan speed.

1.2.4 Board List of the ONU-1000A

Table 1-4 Board list of the ONU-1000A



Control board of the UA5000 master frame. Controlling the UA5000 broadband boards.




Narrowband control board. Controlling the narrowband boards in the same frame and provides eight upstream E1 interfaces for narrowband services.





Control board




1-9




Subscriber board CC0NASL/CC0RASL:

32-port Analog Subscriber Board


CC09ASL/CC0MASL : 16-port Analog Subscriber Board








H601ADLA: 16-port ADSL Board

Providing 16 G.DMT/G.Lite ADSL interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces, with the built-in POTS splitter.





CB02DSL/CB03DSL: Digital Subscriber Board Providing eight ISDN BRA (2B+D) interfaces.


Providing two V.35 interfaces and two E1 interfaces with the rate of N × 64kbit/s (1≤N≤31).




Providing interfaces for the terminals of railway collinear dispatch system and common 2/4-wire audio frequency interfaces. Installed in the RSP/PV8 frames only.


H521SDL: 4-port SHDSL Board

Providing four SHDSL interfaces in the TDM mode and four E1 interfaces. Installed in the UAM/UAS frame.

Subscriber board



1-10





Subscriber board




Standard transmission equipment. Compatible with the OptiX155/622 in optical path, 2M tributary, clock, control and orderwire. Installed in the UA5000 frame. Transmission

board H302ASU: 155 Mbit/s SDH Optical Transmission Board

Providing the dual STM-1 optical interfaces, up to 16 E1 electrical interfaces, RS-232 transparent transmission serial port and Ethernet interface. Installed in the RSP frame.

H302ESC: Environment & Power Supply Monitoring Board

Monitoring the environment and power supply inside the cabinet, including temperature, humidity, primary power supply, access control and main distribution frame. Controlling the under-voltage switch-off of the battery and the fan status. Managing the equalizing and floating charging to the storage battery by the primary power supply.




Controlling or monitoring the temperature, humidity, access control and fan. Connecting with the intelligent power equipment and environment monitoring equipment through serial ports. Communicating with the host through serial ports.




CC03PWX: Secondary Power Supply Board Providing three outputs: +5 V/20 A, –5 V/5 A, and 75 V AC/0.4 A.

Power board H301PWX: Secondary Power Supply Board

Providing three outputs: +5 V DC/30 A, –5 V DC/10 A, 75 V AC/1 A.

Other board H301HWT: Differential HW Level Conversion Board

Controlling the PV8-12 control frame and PV8-19 main control frames. Providing 32 differential HWs. Implementing the level conversion of the HW signal and clock signals.


1-11

1.2.5 Board List of the ONU-160B-T

Table 1-5 Board list of the ONU-160B-T

Category Board Function


ATM broadband control board. Controlling the UA5000 broadband boards.



H303PV4: V5 Protocol Processing and Control board




Control board



ATM interface board

H601AIUA: ATM Interface Board Implementing the remote cascading of the UA5000.


Providing the BORSCHT function for 32 pairs of analog subscriber lines. The 16th and 17th pairs provide the reversal polarity.


Providing the BORSCHT function for 32 pairs of analog subscriber lines. All the pairs provide the reversal polarity.


Providing the BORSCHT function for 16 pairs of analog subscriber lines. All the pairs provide the reversal polarity.



CC0MASL: 16-port Analog Subscriber Board

Providing the BORSCHT function for 16 pairs of analog subscriber lines. All the ports provide the reversal polarity.


Providing the BORSCHT function for 16 pairs of analog subscriber lines as well as the 12/16KC charging signal. All the ports provide the reversal polarity.


Providing the BORSCHT function for 16 pairs of analog subscriber lines as well as the 12KC charging signal. All the ports provide the reversal polarity.




Subscriber board




1-12

Category Board Function



H521LSL: LAN Access Board Providing four downstream 10Mbit/s Ethernet interfaces and four upstream E1 interfaces.

H521SDL: 4-port SHDSL BoardProviding four SHDSL interfaces in the TDM mode and four E1 interfaces. Installed in the UAM/UAS frame.








H601VDLA: 16-port VDSL Board Providing 16 VDSL subscriber interfaces.

Subscriber board



Transmission board


Standard transmission equipment. Compatible with the OptiX155/622 in optical path, 2M tributary, clock, control and order wire. Installed in the UA5000 frame.







1-13

1.2.6 Board List of the ONU-F01D100

Table 1-6 Board list of the ONU-F01D100










Control board



ATM interface board

H601AIUA: ATM interface board Enables the UA5000’s remote subtending function.















Providing two V.35 interfaces and two E1 interfaces with the rate of N × 64kbit/s (1≤N≤31).

Subscriber board



1-14



H521SDL: 4-port SHDSL Interface Board










Subscriber board

H601DEHA: 16-port Circuit Emulation E1 Interface board


Transmission board


Standard transmission equipment. Compatible with the OptiX155/622 in optical path, 2M tributary, clock, control and orderwire. Installed in the UA5000 frame.







1-15









Narrowband control board. Controlling the narrowband boards in the same frame. Providing eight upstream E1 interfaces for narrowband services.





Control board







CC09ASL/CC0MASL : 16-port Analog Subscriber Board





Providing the BORSCHT function and reversal polarity for 16-pair analog subscriber lines. Providing 12/16KC charging signals.







Subscriber board

CB02DSL/CB03DSL: Digital Subscriber board Providing eight ISDN BRA (2B+D) interfaces.


1-16















H601VDLA: 16-port VDSL Board

Providing 16 VDSL subscriber interfaces. Installed in any service board slot of the UA5000 frame.

Subscriber board

H601DEHA: 16-port Circuit Emulation E1 Interface board


Transmission board








Other board H601HWCA: Differential HW Level Conversion Board

Implementing the level conversion of HW signal and clock signal.Installed in the UAFM frame.


1-17














Control board







CC0MASL/CC09ASL: 16-port Analog Subscriber Board








CB02DSL/CB03DSL: Digital Subscriber board Providing eight 2B+D interfaces.




Subscriber board



1-18














Subscriber board



Transmission board











1-19








Control board










Providing the BORSCHT function and reversal polarity for 16 pairs of analog.


Providing the BORSCHT function for 16 pairs of analog subscriber lines as well as the 12/16KC charging signal.


Providing the BORSCHT function for 16 pairs of analog subscriber lines as well as the 12KC charging signal.

H301ATI : 2/4-wire E&M Interface Board

Providing six 2/4-wire E&M interfaces, installed in the RSP frame instead of the UA5000 frame.



CB02DSL/CB03DSL: Digital Subscriber board Providing eight 2B+D interfaces.




Subscriber board

CB02VFB: Voice Frequency Interface Board

Providing 16 2-wire or eight 4-wire voice frequency interfaces.


1-20



Providing interfaces for the terminals of railway collinear dispatch system and common 2/4-wire audio frequency interfaces. Installed in the RSP/PV8 frames only. Subscriber board

H521BSL/B08: 16/8-port ADSL Board

Providing 16/8 ADSL subscriber interfaces and four upstream E1 interfaces.






Other board H301HWC: Differential HW Level Conversion Board

Implementing the level conversion between HW signal and clock signal. Providing 32 differential HWs. Installed in the UAM frame and PV8-10 frame.














Control board



Subscriber board




1-21





Providing the BORSCHT function and reversal polarity for 16 pairs of analog.























Subscriber board




1-22





Transmission board










1.3 ONU Cables

The ONU cable falls into two types: front access cable and rear access cable. The front access cable is used in the front access ONU, while the rear access cable in the rear access ONU.

The front access ONU includes: ONU-60A, ONU-F01A&02AF, ONU-F01D100, ONU-F01D200, ONU-F01D500, and ONU-F01D1000.

The rear access ONU includes: ONU-F01&02A, ONU-512A, and ONU-1000A.

Note:

The ONU-F01D600 uses the rear access cable.

Hardware Description Manual HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 2 Introduction

2-1

Chapter 2 Introduction to Frames

2.1 UAFM Frame

2.1.1 Overview

The UAFM frame is used in the ONU-F01AF, ONU-F02AF, ONU-F01D1000, ONU-F01D200 and ONU-F01D500.

The UAFM provides 18 slots. Both the narrowband control boards and broadband control boards support the dual-system hot backup. When being configured with one secondary power supply board (PWX), the UAFM can house up to 10 subscriber boards. It supports the intermixing of broadband and narrowband subscriber boards. The ATM interface board can only reside in slot 7.

2.1.2 Frame Configuration

The height of the UAFM frame is either 1 U (1 U=44.45 mm) or 12 U, corresponding to the backplane used: 601HUBE or H602HUBE. The UAFM frame contains the following boards.

APMA) or IPMA PV8/PV4, PVM Broadband subscriber boards, such as ADLA, VDLA, SDLA Narrowband subscriber boards, such as ASL, A32, HSL, DSL HWCA PWR IO PWX TSS

Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show the configuration of the UAFM frame.


2-2

PWX

P W

X

PV8

Subs

crib

er B

oard

APM

AAP

MA

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

TSS

PV8

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1500 16 17

HWC

PWRIO

HWC Cabling Area

Fan Frame

ATM

/Sub

scrib

er b

oard

Figure 2-1 Configuration of the UAFM frame (11 U)

PW

X

PW

X

PV8

Subs

crib

er B

oard

APM

AAP

MA

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

TSS

PV8

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1500 16 17

HWC

PWRIO

HWC Cabling Area

Inte

rface

/Sub

scrib

er B

oard

Fan Frame

Cooling and Cabling Area

PW

X

Subs

crib

er B

oard

PW

XP

WX

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Figure 2-2 Configuration of the UAFM frame (12 U)

2.1.3 External Interface

Figure 2-3 shows the external interfaces on the backplane of the UAFM frame.


2-3

Figure 2-3 External interfaces on the backplane of the UAFM frame

Table 2-1 describes the interfaces on the backplane of the UAFM frame.

Table 2-1 Interfaces on the backplane of the UAFM frame

Interface Interface function category Signal description

xSL 7–xSL 16 External subscriber line Each socket provides 32 subscriber lines.

Note: 7–16 refer to board slots.

XPM E1: E1 interface for the broadband control board.

PV4 E1: The first four E1 interfaces for the two PV8/PV4 boards.

PV8 E1: The last four E1 interfaces for the two PV8 boards.

Upstream E1/E3 trunk interface

The XPM E1 socket provides 16 channels of E1 signal, while both PV4 E1 and PV8 E1 provide eight E1 channels of E1 signals. All of them can use different cables and matching impedance to adapt to the 75-ohm or 120-ohm matching modes.

FEA0/FEA1: FE upstream interface on the left IPM board.

FEB0/FEB1: FE upstream interface on the right IPM board.

Upstream FE network interface These interfaces correspond to the FE upstream interfaces of the two broadband control boards.

LINKA0/LINKA1/LINKA2/LINKA3: The broadband subtending interface on the left APM/IPM board.

LINKB0/LINKB1/LINKB2/LINKB3: The broadband subtending interface on the right APM/IPM board.

Broadband FE/LVDS subtending Each socket provides one LVDS interface or two FE interfaces.

Ringing current mutual assistance Ringing current 1 A.

±5 V power mutual assistance +5 V current is 16 A, while –5 V current is 2 A.

P&R-IN: Inter-frame power mutual-aid input interface.

P&R-OUT: Inter-frame power mutual-aid output interface. Power module equalized current signal Both signals are weak signals, in

the level of mA.


2-4

Interface Interface function category Signal description

Circuit/loop-line test bus TEST&ERROR: Inter-frame test bus and power alarm signal subtending interface. Power alarm

Circuit/loop-line test bus and power alarm signal inter-frame subtending.

ESC0/ESC1 Environment and power monitoring

The power and environment monitoring serial ports of a narrowband control board and a broadband control board share a connector.

FAN Fan frame alarm A digital signal.

N-B The narrowband is managed through broadband channel.

Eight PINs. The NMS interface for broadband and narrowband control boards are connected by cables when the broadband and narrowband are managed uniformly through the broadband channel.

SCC NMS The NMS serial ports of the two narrowband control board share one connector.

ISDN ISDN test This interface is used to maintain and test the ISDN interface of the equipment.

Subscriber line test system Subscriber line test It provides external meter or subscriber line test interface.

VoIP Voice over IP (VoIP) extension of the right IPM board It provides two FE interfaces.

Note:

The jumpers JS2 and JS3 on the UAFM backplane are used to set the narrowband control board as PV8 or RSP:

When JS2 and JS3 are connected by short circuit cables, the narrowband control board corresponds to PV8.

When JS2 and JS3 are disconnected, the narrowband control board corresponds to RSP. The jumpers have been set on delivery.


2-5

2.2 UAFS Frame

2.2.1 Overview

The UAFS frame is used in the ONU-F01AF, ONU-F02AF, ONU-F01D1000, ONU-F01D200 and ONU-F01D500.

The UAFS frame provides various narrowband service interfaces by cooperating with the upper control board.

The UAFS frame has 18 slots. Slot 17 only supports the narrowband subscriber board. The UAFS frame can house two narrowband standby control boards and one broadband standby control board. Two narrowband standby control boards support the load sharing and mutual power assistance. The UAFS frame can house up to 13 narrowband subscriber boards or 12 broadband subscriber boards. The same as the subscriber board in the UAFM frame, subscriber boards of the UAFS frame can be intermixed.


The height of the UAFS frame is either 11 U or 12 U, corresponding to the backplane H601HUBF or H602HUBF.

The UAFM frame contains the following boards:

APMA and RSP Broadband subscriber board, such as ADLA, VDSL, SDLA Narrowband subscriber board, such as ASL, A32, HSL, DSL PWR IO PWX

Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-5 show the configuration of the UAFS frame.


2-6

P W

X

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1500 16 17

PWRIO Cabling Area

Fan Frame

APM

A/IP

MA

RSP

RSP

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Nar

row

band

Sub

scr.

Boar

d

Figure 2-4 Configuration of the UAFS frame (11 U)

P W

X

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1500 16 17

PWRIO Cabling Area

Cooling and Cabling Area

APM

A/IP

MA

RSP

RSP

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Nar

row

band

Sub

scr.

Boar

d

Fan Frame

Figure 2-5 Configuration of the UAFS frame (12 U)


Figure 2-6 shows the interfaces on the backplane of the UAFS frame.


2-7

Figure 2-6 Interfaces on the backplane of the UAFS frame

Table 2-2 describes the interfaces on the backplane of the UAFS frame.

Table 2-2 Interfaces on the backplane of the UAFS frame

Interface Interface function category Signal Description

xSL5–xSL17 Subscriber line Each socket provides 32 subscriber lines.


XPM E1: E1 interface for the broadband control board

RSP E1: E1 interface of two RSP boards

Upstream E1/E3 trunk interface16 E1 signals are provided in the socket of XPM E1, which eight E1 signals are provided in the RSP E1 socket.

HW: UAFS narrowband cascading interface HW subtending Each interface provides eight HWs.

FEA0/FEA1 Upstream FE network interfaceThese interfaces correspond to the FE upstream interfaces of the two broadband control boards.

LINKA0/LINKA1/LINKA2/LINKA3 Broadband FE/LVDS cascading Each socket provides one LVDS interface or two FE interfaces.

Ringing current mutual assistance The ringing current is 1 A.

–5 V power mutual assistance +5 V current is 16 A, which –5 V current is 2 A.

P&R-IN: Inter-frame power mutual-aid input interface

P&R-OUT: Inter-frame power mutual-aid output interface Power module equalized

current signal Two signals are weak signals, with the level as mA.

Circuit/loop-line test bus TEST&ERROR: Inter-frame test bus and power alarm signal cascading interface Power alarm

Circuit/loop-line test bus and inter-frame subtending of the power alarm signal.

Altogether there are two TEST&ERROR interfaces.


2-8

Interface Interface function category Signal Description

ESC Environment and power monitoring

The interface is only provided for the power and environment monitoring serial ports of the narrowband interface control board.

FAN Fan frame alarm A digital signal.

NMS Broadband NMS Broadband NMS RS232 interface.

2.3 UAM Frame

2.3.1 Overview

The UAM frame is used in the ONU-F01&02A. Adopting the high speed backplane of multiple buses, it is the control core in the UA5000. When slave frames are configured, the UA5000 can converge traffic from multiple subscriber frames.

Two PWX boards in the UAM frame supports load sharing and mutual power assistance. Both two narrowband control boards and two broadband control boards support the dual-system hot backup. When one PWX is configured, there are up to nine slots for subscriber board. Subscriber boards can be intermixed in the UAM frame.


The backplane of the UAM frame is the HUNM. The frame contains the following boards.

APMA or IPMA PV8/PV4 or PVM Broadband subscriber board, such as ADLA, VDSL, SDLA Narrowband subscriber board, such as ASL, A32, HSL, DSL HWC PWX TSS

Figure 2-7 shows the configuration of the UAM frame.


2-9

P W

X

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Inte

rface

/Sub

scr.

Boar

d

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1500 16 17

TSS

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

P W

X

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

HW

CPV

8PV

8AP

MA/

IPM

AAP

MA/

IPM

A

Figure 2-7 Configuration of the UAM frame


Figure 2-8 shows the external interfaces on the backplane of the UAM frame.

Figure 2-8 External interfaces on the backplane of the UAM frame

Table 2-3 describes the external interfaces of the UAM frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER).


2-10

Table 2-3 Interfaces of the UAM frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER)

Interface ID Connection description Function

F1, F4 Connected to the 5 A fuse. Providing the B48V feed safety.

F2 Connected to the 5 A fuse. Providing the S48V safety.

JA1 Power alarm socket, connected to power alarm cables from other frames in the subtending of multiple frames.

Providing the subtending of power alarms.

JA2 Power alarm socket, connected to the last but six pin of the lower HEADER on the TSS. Providing the power alarms.

JA3 B48V monitoring socket, connected to the ESC. Providing the B48V monitoring.

JA4, JA5 Equalized current socket. In the subtending of equalized current of multiple frames, JA4 is for output and JA5 for input.

Providing the subtending of equalized current.

JA6, JA7 Subscriber line testing socket. In the subtending of subscriber line test, JA6 is for input and JA7 for output. For the subscriber line test.

JC1 Broadband environment monitoring interface (RJ45), connected to the ESC through cables. Providing serial ports to the ESC.

JC2, JC3 ESC serial ports socket (RJ45). JC2 (corresponding to the left PV8/PV4 board) and JC3 (corresponding to the right PV8/PV4 board) are connected to the ESC through cables.

Providing serial ports to the ESC.

JC6 Management series port socket (RJ45). Providing NM serial port for the left PV8/PV4.

JD1 B48V power socket, connected to the B48V. Providing feed and ringing current power.

JD2 48V power socket, connected to the B48V. Providing the working power supply.

JE1, JE2 Power mutual assistance socket. JE1 is for input and JE2 for output.

Providing the mutual aid of inter-frame power and ringing current.

JF1 GND socket , connected to the GND. Providing the GND connection.

JL1 PGND socket, connected to the PGND. Providing the PGND connection.

JT1, JT2 Testing the bus socket, connected to the TSS test bus from other frames. JT1 is for input and JT2 for output.

Providing the subtending interface of test bus.

Table 2-4 Interfaces on the HEADER of the UAM frame

Board type HEADER interface description

16-port subscriber board ASL

Pins 1–8 (eight channels) of the upper HEADER and pins 25–32 (eight channels) of the lower HEADER on the ASL board are connected with subscriber lines. They correspond to 1–16 subscribers respectively.

As for the DSL board, the eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected with subscriber lines.


2-11


32-port subscriber board A32

Pins 1–8, pins 9–16 of the upper HEADER and pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER are connected with subscriber lines. They correspond to 32 subscribers.

PV8/PV4 board Pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 1–8 of the PV8/PV4.

APMA board Pins 1–4 and pins 6–9 of the lower J4 or J8 connector correspond to E1 interfaces 1–8 of the APMA.

TSS board

The last but six pin of the lower HEADER is connected with the power alarm cable.

For the ISDN diagnosis test

Connect the upper HEADER of the TSS as follows: the last but seven pin is connected with the cable from the DSL, working as the ISDN auxiliary interface. The last but six pin is connected with the ISDN telephone set.

For the telephone set test

Connect the upper HEADER of the TSS as follows: the seventh pin is connected to the cable from the ASL, working as the auxiliary test port.

HWC board Pins 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–48, 49–56 and 57–64 of the HEADER on the HWC provide eight differential HW cables, connected to the differential interfaces of RSP-14 subscriber frame.

2.4 UAS Frame

2.4.1 Overview

The UAS frame is used in the ONU-F01&02A. Adopting the high speed backplane of multiple buses, the UAS frame can house both broadband and narrowband subscriber boards.

Under the control of the UAM frame, the UAS frame can provide more subscriber interfaces. When an ONU needs to access broadband and narrowband services, and the port capacity is small, you can only configure the UAS frame and connect it to the Optical Line Terminal (OLT).

The UAS frame has two narrowband control boards and one broadband control board. Two narrowband control boards have the functions of load sharing and mutual assistance. The UAS frame has up to 13 subscriber slots and supports the intermixing of broadband and narrowband subscriber boards.


The backplane of UAS frame is the HUBS. The frame contains the following boards.

RSP


2-12

Broadband subscriber board, such as ADLA, VDLA, SDLA Broadband subscriber board, such as ASL, A32, HSL, DSL PWX

Figure 2-9 shows the configuration of the UAS frame. P

W X

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Inte

rface

/Sub

scr.

Boar

d

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1500 16 17

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

RSP

RSP

APSA

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Figure 2-9 Configuration of the UAS frame


Figure 2-10 shows the external interfaces of the UAS frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER).

Figure 2-10 External interfaces of the UAS frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER)


2-13

Table 2-5 describes the interfaces of the UAS frame.

Table 2-5 External interfaces of the UAS frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER)


F1 Connected to the 5 A safety fuse. Providing the B48V feed safety.

F2 Connected to the 5 A safety fuse. Providing the S48V feed safety.

F3 Connected to the 10 A safety fuse. Providing the –24 V feed safety.

JA1, JA2 Power alarm socket, connected to power alarm cables from other frames in the subtending of multiple frames. JA1is for input, while JA2 for output.


JA3 B48V monitoring socket, connected to the ESC board. Providing the B48V monitoring.

JA4, JA5 Equalized current socket. In the subtending of equalized current of multiple frames, JA4 is for output and JA5 for input.


JC1 Broadband environment monitoring interface (RJ45), connected to the ESC board through cables.

Providing serial ports for the ESC board.

JD1 B48V power socket, connected to B48V power. Providing the feed and ringing current.

JD2 S48V power socket, connected to S48V. Providing the working power supply.

JE1, JE2 Power mutual assistance socket, JE1 is for input and JE2 for output.


JF1 GND socket, connected to the GND. Providing the GND connection.


JT1, JT2 Bus socket, connected to the TSS test bus from other frames. JT1 is for input and JT2 for output.

Providing the subtending interfaces of test bus.

Table 2-6 Description of interfaces on the HEADER


16-channel subscriber board ASL

Pins 1–8 (eight channels) of the upper HEADER and pins 25–32 (eight channels) of the lower HEADER on the ASL are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 16 subscribers.

As for the DSL, eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected with subscriber lines.

32-channel subscriber board A32

Pins 1–8 and pins 9–16 of the upper HEADER, and pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER on the A32 are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 32 subscribers.

PV8/PV4 board Pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 1–8 of the PV8/PV4.

APMA board Pins 1–4 and pins 6–9 of the lower J4 or J8 connector correspond to E1 interfaces 1–8 of the APMA.


2-14

2.5 UABM Frame

2.5.1 Overview

The UABM frame is used in the ONU-1000A. It adopts multiple-bus high speed backplane. It is the control core of the UA5000.

The UABM frame uses the board with the height of 6 U. It supports the load sharing and mutual aiding of PWX. Both narrowband control boards and broadband control boards provide the dual-system hot backup function. The UABM frame supports the intermixing of broadband and narrowband subscriber boards.


The backplane of UABM frame is the HUBB board. The frame contains the following boards.

APMA or IPMA PV8/PV4 or PVM Broadband subscriber board, such as ADLA, VDSL, SDLA Narrowband subscriber board, such as ASL, A32, HSL, DSL TSS PWX

P W

X

Inte

rface

/Sub

scr.

Boar

d

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1500 16 17

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Inte

rface

/Sub

scr.

Boar

d

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Subs

crib

er B

oard

TSS

PW

X

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

HW

CPV

8PV

8AP

MA/

IPM

AAP

MA/

IPM

A

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Subs

crib

er B

oard

Figure 2-11 Configuration of the UABM frame


Figure 2-12 shows the external interfaces on the backplane of the UABM frame.


2-15

Figure 2-12 External interfaces on the backplane of the UABM frame

Table 2-7 describes the external interfaces of the UABM frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER).

Table 2-7 External interfaces of the UABM frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER)

Interface ID Description

RING_OUT,RING_IN Input and output interfaces of inter-frame ringing current and –5 V power mutual aid.

JK1 JKX1–JK4 JKX4 Backup circuit of the ringing current.

ESC_0,ESC_1 Environment and power monitoring interfaces, corresponding to the active and standby narrowband control boards.

ESC_A/B Environment and power monitoring interfaces, corresponding to the active and standby broadband control boards.

NMS_A/B NMS interface, corresponding to the active and standby broadband control board.

PC_IN, PC_OUT Inter-frame input and output interfaces of equalized current.

ERR_IN, ERR_OUT Inter-frame input and output interfaces of alarm signal.

TEST_IN,TEST_OUT Inter-frame input and output interfaces of test signal.

112_IN,112_OUT Subscriber line test interface, providing interfaces for external meters or subscriber line test devices.

B48V –48 V power input interface, which supplies power for the PWX.

S48V –48 V power input interface, which supplies power for the ringing current of the frame.

PGND Protection ground.

Table 2-8 describes the interfaces on the HEADER.


2-16

Table 2-8 External interfaces on the HEADER of the UABM frame



Pins 1–8 (eight channels) of the upper HEADER and pins 25–32 (eight channels) of the lower HEADER on the ASL are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 16 subscribers. As for the DSL board, the eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected with subscriber lines.

32-channel subscriber board A32

Pins 1–8 and pins 9–16 of the upper HEADER, and pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER on the A32 are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 32 subscribers.

PV8/PV4 Pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 1–8 of the PV8/PV4.

APMA Pins 1–4 and pins 6–9 of the lower J4 or J8 connector correspond to E1 interfaces 1–8 of the APMA.

2.6 UAFX Frame

2.6.1 Overview

The UAFX frame is used in the ONU-F01D100. It has up to six slots for subscriber boards. Both narrowband control boards and broadband control boards provide the dual-system hot backup function. The UAFX frame integrates the AC/DC 4810 module and DC/DC 4805 module.


The backplane of the UAFX frame is the HUBL. The frame contains the following boards.

APMA or IPMA PV8/PV4 or PVM Broadband subscriber board, such as ADLA, VDSL, SDLA Narrowband subscriber board, such as ASL, A32, HSL, DSL TSS

Figure 2-13 shows the configuration of the UAFX frame.


2-17

AIU/XSL

XPM

PVX

PVX

XSL

XSL

XSL

XSL

XSL

TSS

4805

4810

PWRIO

ESC

Cabling Area

FAN

00

4805

XPM

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

Figure 2-13 Configuration of the UAFX frame


Figure 2-14 shows the external interfaces on the backplane of the UAFX frame.

Figure 2-14 External interfaces on the backplane of the UAFX frame

Table 2-9 describes the external interfaces of the UAFX frame.


2-18

Table 2-9 External interfaces of the UAFX frame

Interface ID Interface description

JD4 Serial port.

TMP-HU Providing the temperature and humidity monitoring interface.

JTD1 Providing the state monitoring interface of the lightening arrester.

JTD2 Providing the state monitoring interface of the heat exchanger.

JTD3 Providing the state monitoring interface of the heater.

JTD4 Standby.

JTD5 Standby.

JTD6 Standby.

JTD7 Standby.

JTD8 Standby.

DOOR Providing the monitoring interface of the access control.

PXJ Providing the monitoring interface of the distribution frame.

CTRL Compatible with the jumper and DIP switch.

SDH Providing the power supply interface of transmission unit.

HEX Providing the monitoring interface of heat exchanger.

DC-LIGHT DC light socket.

JF3 Fan and power interface of the storage battery compartment.

BAT Battery interface.

NMS RS-232 interface of the broadband NMS.

TEST Subtending interface of the test bus.

PV8-SCC Maintenance of the PV8 and the communications serial port of the MNS.

APM-E1 Upstream E1/E3 trunk interface, providing 16 E1 interfaces.

PV4-E1 Upstream E1/E3 trunk interface, providing eight E1 interfaces.

XSL0–XSL5 External subscriber line. Each socket can be connected with provides 32 subscriber lines.



2-19

2.7 PV8-10 Control Frame

2.7.1 Overview

The PV8-10 control frame resides in the ONU-F01&02A with the 19-inch cabinet. It provides multiple types of service interfaces. When two PWX boards are configured, the PV8-10 frame supports 10 subscriber boards. When one PWX board is configured, the PV8-10 frame supports 11 subscriber boards. The PV8-10 control frame can be subtended with eight RSP-14 subscriber frames.


The backplane of the RV8-10 control frame is the HGB. The frame contains the following boards.

PV8, PV4 TSS HWC Subscriber boards, such as ASL, A32 PWX

Figure 2-15 shows the configuration of the PV8-10 control board.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415 16 17

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

PV8

PWX

PV8

TSS

PWX

HWC

Figure 2-15 Configuration of the PV8-10 control frame


Figure 2-16 shows the rear view of the PV8-10 control frame.


2-20

Figure 2-16 Rear view of the PV8-10 control frame

Table 2-10 describes the external interfaces of the PV8-10 control frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER).

Table 2-10 External interfaces of the PV8-10 control frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER)


F1, F4 Connected to the 5 A fuse. Providing the B48V feed safety.

F2 Connected to the 5 A fuse. Providing the S48V safety.

F3 Connected to the 10 A fuse. Providing the –24 V power safety.

JA1 Power alarm socket, connected to the last but six pin of the lower HEADER on the TSS board. Providing the power alarms.

JA2 Power alarm socket, connected to the power alarm cable from other frames while multiple cascading.



JA4, JA5 Equalized current socket. In the equalized current subtending of multiple frames, JA4 is for output and JA5 for input.


JA6, JA7 Subscriber line testing socket. JA6 is for input and JA7 for output while subtending test. For the subscriber line test.

JC1 Management series port socket (RJ45). Providing NMS serial ports for the left PV8/PV4.


2-21


JC2, JC3 ESC serial ports socket (RJ45). JC2 (corresponding to the left PV8/PV4) and JC3 (corresponding to the right PV8/PV4) are connected to the ESC through cables (RJ45).

Providing serial ports for the ESC.

JC4, JC5 Ethernet interface socket (RJ45). JC4 corresponds to the left PV8/PV4 and JC5 corresponds to the right PV8/PV4. Providing Ethernet interfaces.

JD1 B48V power socket, connected to the B48V power. Providing the feed and ringing current.

JD2 S48V power socket, connected to the S48V. Providing the working power.

JD3 –24V power socket, connected to the –24V. Providing the –24 V power.

JE1, JE2 Power mutual aid socket. JE1 is for input and JE2 for output. Providing the mutual aid of inter-frame power and ringing current.



JT1, JT2 Test bus socket, connected to TSS test bus from other frames. JT1 is for input and JT2 for output.


JT3 Test bus socket. Providing the second test bus.

Caution:

Do not connect power cables incorrectly if there are B48V, S48V and –24 V are present at the same time.

Table 2-11 Interfaces on the HEADER of thePV8-10 control frame

Board type HEADER description


Pins 1–8 (eight channels) of the upper HEADER and pins 25–32 (eight channels) of the lower HEADER on the ASL are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 16 subscribers. As for the DSL board, the eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected with subscriber lines.


Pins 1–8 and 9–16 of the upper HEADER, and pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER on the A32 are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 32 subscribers.

PV8/PV4 board Pins 17–24 and 25–32 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 1–8 of the PV8/PV4.

Between left PV8/PV4 board and right PV8/PV4 board

Pins 5–12 of the upper HEADER are connected by short circuit cables, so are pins 1–8, 17–24 and 25–32 of the lower HEADER.


2-22


TSS board

The last but six pin of the lower HEADER is connected to power alarm cable.

For the ISDN diagnostic testing




HWC board Pins 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–48, 49–56 and 57–64 of the HEADER on the HWC provide eight differential HW cables, connected to the differential interfaces of RSP-14 subscriber frame.

Note:

In the power mutual aid between the PV8-10 control frame and RSP-14 subscriber frame, there shall be two or three frames.

2.8 RSP-10 Subscriber Frame

2.8.1 Overview

The RSP-10 subscriber frame is used in the ONU-F01&02A. It supplies multiple types of service interfaces through cooperating with upper-layer control boards. It can provide various convergence ratios, such as 1:1, 1:2, 1:4 and 1:8. When two PWX boards are configured, the frame supports 10 subscriber boards. When one PWX board is configured, the frame supports 11 subscriber boards.


The backplane of the RSP-10 frame is the HGB. The frame contains the following boards.

RSP TSS Analog subscriber board, such as ASL, A32 PWX

Figure 2-17 shows the configuration of the RSP-10 subscriber frame.


2-23

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415 16 17

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

RSP

PWX

RSP

TSS

PWX

Figure 2-17 Configuration of the RSP-10 subscribe frame


Figure 2-18 shows the rear view of the RSP-10 subscriber frame.

Figure 2-18 Rear view of the RSP-10 subscriber frame

Table 2-12 describes the external interfaces of the RSP-10 subscriber frame (excluding the interface on the HEADER).

Table 2-12 External interfaces of the RSP-10 subscriber frame


F1, F4 Connected to the 5A fuse. Providing the B48V feed safety.

F2 Connected to the 5A fuse. Providing the S48V safety.

F3 Connected to the 10A fuse. Providing the –24 V power safety.


2-24


JA1 Power alarm socket, connected to the last but six pin of the lower HEADER on the TSS. Providing the power alarms.

JA2 Power alarm socket, connected to power alarm cables from other frames in the power alarm subtending of multiple frames.


JA3 B48V monitoring socket, connected to the ESC. Providing the B48V monitoring.



JA6, JA7 Subscriber line testing socket. In the subtending of subscriber line test, JA6 is for input and JA7 for output. For subscriber line test.

JC1 Management series port socket (RJ45). Providing NM serial ports for the left PV8/PV4.

JC2, JC3 ESC serial ports socket (RJ45). JC2 (corresponding to the left PV8/PV4 board) and JC3 (corresponding to the right PV8/PV4 board) are connected to the ESC board through cables (RJ45).


JC4, JC5 Reserved. Reserved.



JD3 –24 V power socket, connected to the –24 V. Providing the –24 V power supply.





JT1, JT2 Testing the bus socket, connected to TSS test bus from other frames. JT1 is for input and JT2 for output.


JT3 Test bus socket. Providing the second test bus.

Caution:



2-25

Table 2-13 Interfaces on the HEADER of the RSP-10 subscriber frame


ASL board Pins 1–8 (eight channels) of the upper HEADER and pins 25–32 (eight channels) of the lower HEADER on the ASL are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 16 subscribers. As for the DSL board, the eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected with subscriber lines.

A32 board Pins 1–8 and pins 9–16 of the upper HEADER, and pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER on the A32 are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 32 subscribers.

RSP board Pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 1–2, 3–4 of the RSP respectively.

TSS board

The last but six pin of the lower HEADER is connected to the power alarm cable. In practical, pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER provide an AMP connector. When CC04PWX/H301PMX is configured, the power alarm cable is not needed.





Note:

If eight E1 channels are connected to the RSP-10 subscriber frame, four E1 channels are connect to the left RSP, and the other four to the right RSP.

To realize the inter-frame power mutual aid, the RSP-10 subscriber frame can only cooperate with other RSP-10 subscriber frames or the RSP-14 subscriber frame. The mutual aid happens between every two frames.


2.9.1 Overview

The RSP-14 subscriber frame is used in the ONU-F01&02A. It supplies multiple types of service interfaces through cooperating with upper-layer control boards. It can provide various convergence ratios, such as 1:1, 1:2, 1:4 and 1:8. The frame can house up to 14 subscriber boards.


2-26


The backplane of the RSP-14 subscriber frame is the HUNM. The frame contains the following boards.

RSP Analog subscriber board, such as ASL, A32 PWX


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415 16 17

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

RSP

PWX

RSP

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

Figure 2-19 Configuration of the RSP-14 subscriber frame


Figure 2-20 shows the rear view of the RSP-14 subscriber frame.


2-27

Figure 2-20 Rear view of the RSP-14 subscriber frame

Table 2-14 describes the external interfaces of the RSP-14 frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER).

Table 2-14 External interfaces of the RSP-14 frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER)


F1, F2 Connected to the 5 A safety fuse. Providing the B48V feed safety.

F3 Connected to the 5 A safety fuse. Providing the S48V safety.

F4 Connected to the 10 A safety fuse. Providing the –24V power safety.

JA1, JA2 Power alarm socket, connected to power alarm line from other frame while multiple cascading. JA1is for input, while JA2 for output.





JC1, JC2 ESC serial ports socket (RJ45). JC2 (corresponding to the left PV8/PV4) and JC3 (corresponding to the right PV8/PV4) are connected to the ESC through cables (RJ45).




2-28



JD3 –24 V power socket, connected to the –24 V. Providing the –24 V power.



JF1 GND socket, connected to the GND. Providing the GND connection.


JT1, JT2 Test bus socket, connected to the TSS test bus from other frames. JT1 is for input and JT2 for output.


Note:


Table 2-15 Interfaces on the header of the RSP-14 frame


ASL board Pins 1–8 (eight channels) of the upper HEADER and pins 25–32 (eight channels) of the lower HEADER on the ASL board are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 16 subscribers. As for the DSL board, the eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected to with subscriber lines.

A32 board Pins 1–8 and pins 9–16 of the upper HEADER, and pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER on the A32 are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 32 subscribers.

RSP board Pins 17–24 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 1–2 of the RSP. Pins 25–32 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 3–4.

Mark: In the quasi-local mode, both pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER on the left and right RSPs can provide eight differential interfaces.

Note:

If eight E1 channels are connected to the RSP-14 subscriber frame, four E1 channels are connected to the left RSP board, and four to the right one.

The RSP-14 subscriber frame has only one PWX. To ensure the reliable running of the system, the RSP-14 subscriber frame shall has the mutual aid of power and ringing current with other control/subscriber frames. The mutual aid may happen between two frames, or between every two frames when there are three frames.

The RSP-14 subscriber frame does not support the TSS. To test subscriber boards, connect the frame with the TSS test buses of other frames through the test bus socket JT1 and JT2.


2-29


2.10.1 Overview

The RSP-14 subscriber frame is used in the ONU-1000A and is at the subscriber side. It can provide various service interfaces to subscribers. Each frame contains 19 subscriber boards.


The backplane of the RSP-19 subscriber frame is the HCB. The frame contains the following boards.

RSP Analog subscriber board, such as ASL, A32 TSS PWX


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 1500 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

PWX

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

RSP

RSP

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

ASL

TSS

PWX

Figure 2-21 Configuration of the RSP-19 subscriber frame


Figure 2-22 shows the external interfaces of the RSP-19 subscriber frame.


2-30

Figure 2-22 External interfaces of the RSP-19 subscriber frame

Table 2-17 describes the external interfaces of the RSP-19 subscriber frame (excluding the interface on the HEADER).

Table 2-16 External interfaces of the RSP-19 subscriber frame (excluding the interface on the HEADER)


F1 Connected to the 5 A safety fuse. Providing the fuses of the feed and ringing current

F2-F3 Connected to the 5 A safety fuse. Providing the safety fuse of the power supply

J0 Connected to the coaxial cable from the clock frame. Providing the extended external clock source.

JA1 Connected to the cable from the last but six pin of the lower HEADER on the TSS. Providing power alarms.

JA2 Connected to the power alarm cable from other frames Providing the subtending of power alarms.

JP1-JP5 Connected to PGND, B48V, S48V1, GND and S48V2 respectively. Providing the power supply and grounding.

JP6 Reserved. Reserved.

JP8-JP9 Connected to the monitoring cable from the ESC. Providing the monitoring interface for environment and power.

JP10-JP11 Connected to the printing cable from the RSP. For debugging only

JT1-JT2 Connected to the TSS test bus of other frames. Providing the subtending interface of the test bus.

JT3-JT4 Reserved. Reserved.


2-31


XR1, XR8 Connected to the coaxial E1 input cables of the left and right RSPs respectively.

Providing the first E1 input interface of both the left and right RSPs.

XT1, XT8 Connected to the coaxial E1 input cables of the left and right RSPs respectively.

Providing the first E1 input interface of both the left and right RSPs.

Caution:

Do not connect the B48V, S48V1 and S48V2 power cables to the JP7 socket. Otherwise, the board will be damaged.

The environment and power monitoring interface JP8 is connected to the RSPL, and JP9 to the RSPR. When the ESC is configured with the left RSP, the DB-9 connector of the environment and power monitoring cable shall be connected to JP8.

Table 2-17 Interfaces on the HEADER of the RSP-19 subscriber frame

Board type Interface description

ASL board Pins 1–8 (eight channels) of the upper HEADER and pins 25–32 (eight channels) of the lower HEADER on the ASL are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 16 subscribers. As for the DSL, the eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected with subscriber lines.

A32 board Pins 1–8 and pins 9–16 of the upper HEADER, pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER on the A32 are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 32 subscribers.

RSP board

Pins 17–24 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 1–2 of the RSP. Pins 25–32 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 3–4 of the RSP.

In the quasi-local mode, pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER on the left and right RSPs provide 1–8 differential interfaces.

TSS board

The last but six pin of the lower HEADER is connected to the power alarm cable.






2-32

Note:

If eight E1 channels are connected to the RSP-19 subscriber frame, four E1 channels are connect to the left RSP, and four to the right one.

When the RSP-19 subscriber frame is connected to the PV8, it is connected to the HWC or PV8 through differential interfaces. The differential interfaces are at pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER on the left and right RSPs. In this case, E1 interfaces are unavailable. When the RSP subscriber frame is connected to the transmission unit or trunk board through E1 interfaces, the differential interfaces are also unavailable.

Hardware Description Manual HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 3 Introduction to Boards

3-1

Chapter 3 Introduction to Boards

3.1 ATM Service Processing Board (H601APMA)

3.1.1 Overview

The H601APMA board is the ATM service processing board, also called the broadband control board. It controls the UA5000 broadband subscriber boards, and provides the broadband switching resources, clock frequencies and various interfaces for upstream broadband services. Two H601APMA boards work in hot backup mode.

The H601APMA board has two interfaces for subboards:

One is at the front panel side for the ATM optical interface subboard (supporting 155 Mbit/s) or the VP Ring optical interface board (supporting 622 Mbit/s).

The other is at the backplane side for CES subboard, IMA E1 subboard or ATM E3 subboard.

3.1.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-1 shows the front panel of the H601APMA board.


3-2

APMA

RESET

RUN

ACTET

HC

ON

Hig

h sp

eed

sign

al in

terfa

ce

Figure 3-1 Front panel of the H601APMA board

Table 3-1 describes the front panel.

Table 3-1 Front panel description of the H601APMA board

Name Color Meaning Description

RUN Red Running indicator

Indicating the work status of the board.Blinking at the rate of 0.5 Hz (ON for one second, OFF for one second periodically): the board is running normally.

ACT Green Active-standby indicator

ON: the board is active. OFF: the board is standby.

RESET NA Manual resetting switch Resetting the system.

CON NA Maintenance serial port

Providing the local maintenance and remote maintenance. The system is configured through the command lines with the tools such as hyper terminal.


3-3


ETH NA Maintenance network interface

Providing the 10Base-T network management interface for the system maintenance and configuration.

High speed signal interface

NA High speed signal interface

Providing different high speed signal interfaces in the front panel by applying different subboards, including 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interface and 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interfaces.

3.1.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane

See Figure 3-2 for the pin assignment between the H601APMA board and backplane. (It's the front view of the backplane.)

1

Lower connector J8 signal pin

5

10

15

20

25

a b c d e

1

Lower connector J4 signal pin

5

10

15

20

25

a b c d e Figure 3-2 Pin assignment between the H601APMA board and backplane

J4 and J8 in Figure 3-2 are the lower connectors in the H601APMA backplane, corresponding to two slots of broadband control boards. E1 cables connect to pin rows 1-4 and pin rows 6-9 at the lower part. Table 3-2 lists the signal definitions of pin rows 1-9.


3-4

Table 3-2 Signal definition of the H601APMA backplane pins

Column Row

a b c d e

9 TXA1-R TXA1-T PGND RXA1-R RXA1-T




5 PGND PGND PGND PGND PGND





See Figure 3-3 for the description of the numbering.

Serial number ofE1 signal cable

T for tipR for ring

TXA1-T

T for transmittingR for receiving

Figure 3-3 Pin numbering

3.1.4 Subboard

I. Overview

Table 3-3 lists the subboards supported by the H601APMA board.

Table 3-3 Description of subboards supported by the H601APMA board

Name Interface Description

H601V2HAF Two 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interfaces

1310 nm, single-mode, 15 km, SC. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side. This subboard is used when one APMA board is configured and the UA5000 is used as an ONU.

H602V2HAF Two 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interfaces

1310 nm, single-mode, 15 km, SC. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side. This subboard is used when the UA5000 is used as an ONU.


3-5


H601V2HAG Two 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interfaces


H602V2HAG Two 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interfaces


H602V1HAF One 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interfaces

One-port, single-mode, 15 km, or one-port multi-mode 2 km, SC. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side.This subboard is used when the UA5000 is used as an ONU.

H602V1HAG One 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interfaces

One-port, single-mode, 40 km, or one-port multi-mode 2 km, SC. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side.This subboard is used when the UA5000 is used as an ONU.

H602V1HTF One 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interface

One-port, single-mode, 15 km, SC, one electrical interface. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side. This subboard is used when the UA5000 is used as an ONU.

H602V1HTG One 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interface

One-port, single-mode, 40 km, SC, one electrical interface. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side. This subboard is used when the UA5000 is used as an ONU.

H602V2HCF Two 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interfaces

1310 nm, single-mode, 15 km, SC. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side. It has stratum-3 clock, which is used for the VP Ring when the UA5000 one-layer networking mode is adopted.

H602V2HCF Two 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interfaces


H602V2HCG Two 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interfaces


H602V1HCF One 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interface

One-port, single-mode 15 km, or one-port multi-mode, 2 km, SC. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side.It has stratum-3 clock, which is used for the VP Ring when the UA5000 one-layer networking mode is adopted.

H602V1HCG One 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interface

One-port, single-mode, 40 km, or one-port, multi-mode, 2 km, SC. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side.It has stratum-3 clock, which is used for the VP Ring when the UA5000 one-layer networking mode is adopted.


3-6


H602V1HEF One 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interface

One-port, single-mode, 15 km, SC, or one electrical interface. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side. It has stratum-3 clock, which is used for the VP Ring when the UA5000 one-layer networking mode is adopted.

H602V1HEG One 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical interface

One-port, single-mode, 40 km, SC, or one electrical interface. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side. It has stratum-3 clock, which is used for the VP Ring when the UA5000 one-layer networking mode is adopted.

H601O1CNH

One-port 155 M single-mode optical interface board, 60 kM


H601O2CNH

Two-port 155M single-mode optical interface board, 60 km


H601O2CNG

Two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interfaces

Single-mode, 30 km, SC. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side. This subboard is used when the UA5000 is used as an ONU.

H601O2CNB Two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interfaces

Multi-mode, 2 km, SC. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side. This subboard is used when the UA5000 is used as an ONU.

H601CESA Eight E1 interfaces Provides the circuit emulation service. It’s the subboard at the H601APMA side.

H601E8IA Eight IMA E1 electrical interfaces Subboard of the H601APMA at the backplane side.

H601E23A Two ATM E3/DS3(T3) electrical interface Subboard of the H601APMA at the backplane side.

H601E13A One ATM E3/DS3(T3) electrical interface Subboard of the H601APMA at the backplane side.

II. DIP switches and jumpers of H601CESA

There are four sets of DIP switches S1-S4 on the H601CESA board. S1 and S4 are used to select the matching resistance of E1 port, S2 and S3 are used to set the grounding of E1 port.


3-7

Table 3-4 DIP switchesS1 and S4 description of the H601CESA board

Switch 75Ω cable 120Ω cable Note

S1 ON for Bits 1–8 OFF for Bits1–8 Bits 1-8 corresponding to E1 ports 1–8.

S41 ON for Bits 1–4 OFF for Bits1–4 Used for the host query, consistent with S1. Only S4–1 is applied, others are reserved by the system.

Table 3-5 DIP switchesS2 and S3 description of the H601CESA board

Switch Connected to PGND Suspended Note

S1 ON OFF Used to set E1 ports 1–4


III. DIP switches and jumpers of H601E8IA

There are five sets of DIP switches S1–S5 on the H601E8IA board:

S1 is used to query the port resistance, which should be consistent with S2 and S4.

S2 and S4 are used to select the matching resistance of the port. The settings of all 8 E1 ports should be the same.

S3 and S5 are used to select the balancing/unbalancing transmission (whether to ground the E1 port).

Table 3-6 S1, S2 and S4 DIP switches description of the H601E8IA board

Switch 75Ω cable 120Ω cable Note

S1 ON OFF Only S1–1 is applied, others are reserved.



Table 3-7 S3 and S5 DIP switches description of the H601E8IA board

Switch Connected to PGND Suspended Note




3-8

3.2 IP Service Process Board (H601IPMA)

3.2.1 Overview

The H601IPMA board controls the UA5000 broadband subscriber boards, processes various broadband services, such as ADSL, ADSL2+, VDSL, SHDSL and FE services, and provides the IP upstream service.

The H601IPMA board provides the broadband switching resources. It works in active/standby mode, and supports the active/standby switchover.

The FE interface provided by the IPMA board can be configured as:

Downstream interface, providing the Ethernet access service. Subtending interface connecting slave frames. Ethernet upstream interface (provided by the GE/FE interface of the subboard) for

connection with the MD5500.

See Figure 3-4 for details.

IPMA

PVM

PVM

GE

1FE

1FE

2FE/1GE2 FE/GE upstreaminterfaces

Backplane

1FE1FE

4 LVDS subtendinginterfaces

4FE

4FE

4 LVDS subtendinginterfaces IPMA

PVM

PVM

GE

1FE

1FE

2FE/1GE2 FE/GE upstreaminterfaces

Backplane

1FE1FE


4FE

4FE


Figure 3-4 External interfaces of the IPMA board

The board provides the following interfaces:

One FE interface (through the backplane) for connection with PVM board, providing the IP channel for the VoIP service.

Four LVDS subtending interfaces. Four FE interfaces. Two FE/GE upstream interfaces (on the front panel). One GE interface (through the backplane), providing broadband access service,

or serving as upstream interface.

See Table 3-8 for the subboards of the IPMA board.


3-9

Table 3-8 List of IPMA subboards

Subboard Description

H601E2FN 2-port 10/100 M Ethernet electrical interface subboard

H601O2FNF 2-port 10/100 M Ethernet optical interface subboard (1310 nm, single-mode, 15 km, LC interface)

H601O2FNB 2-port 10/100 M Ethernet optical interface subboard (1310 nm, multiple-mode, 2 km, LC interface)

H601O1FNF 1-port 10/100 M Ethernet optical interface subboard (1310 nm, single-mode, 15 km, LC interface)

H601O1FNB 1-port 10/100 M Ethernet optical interface subboard (1310 nm, multiple-mode, 2 km, LC interface)

H601O1GNE 1-port GE optical interface subboard (1310 nm, single-mode, 10 km, LC interface)

H601O1GNA 1-port GE optical interface subboard (850 nm, multiple-mode, 500 m, LC interface)

H601O1GNG 1-port GE optical interface subboard (1510 nm, single-mode, 40 km, LC interface)

3.2.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-5 shows the front panel of the H601IPMA board.


3-10

IPMA

RESET

RUN

ACTET

HC

OM

Ethernet interface

Figure 3-5 Front panel of the H601IPMA board

Table 3-9 describes the front panel of the H601IPMA board.

Table 3-9 Front panel description of the H601APMA board


RUN Red Indicating the work status of the board.

Blinking at the frequency of 8 Hz: the system is starting up.Blinking at the frequency of 0.5 Hz: the board is working normally. Constantly ON or OFF: the board is faulty.

ACT Green Active-standby indicator

ON: the board is active. OFF: the board is standby.

RESET NA Manual resetting switch

Used to reset the system.

COM NA Maintenance serial port

RJ45 interface, providing the local and remote maintenance functions.


3-11


ETH NA Maintenance network interface

RJ45 interface, providing the 10Base-T network management interface for the system maintenance and configuration.

Ethernet interface

NA Ethernet interface

The H601IPMA board can provide different Ethernet interfaces, such as FE optical (electrical) interface and GE optical interface, through its subboards.

3.2.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers

There is no DIP switch or jumper on the IPMA board.


Figure 3-6 shows the pin assignment between the H601IPMA board and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)

J8

J7

J6

J5

J4

J3

J2

J1

J8 signal pin in the lower connector

1

5

10

15

20

25

a b c d e


a b c d e

1

5

10

15

20

25

1

5

10

15

20

25

a b c d e

J2 signal pin in the middle/upper connector

a b c d e

1

5

10

15

20

25


Back connector of the IPMA board

J8

J7

J6

J5

J4

J3

J2

J1

J8

J7

J6

J5

J8

J7

J6

J5

J4

J3

J2

J1


1

5

10

15

20

25

a b c d e


a b c d e

1

5

10

15

20

25

1

5

10

15

20

25

a b c d e


a b c d e

1

5

10

15

20

25


Back connector of the IPMA board

Figure 3-6 Signal definition for the H601AIUA board connectors

In Figure 3-6, J6 and J2 are the upper and middle connectors; J8 and J4 are the lower connectors of the H601IPMA board.

The four subtended LVDS signal cables are connected to 1st–4th and 6th–96th rows of pins in J2 and J6.

The four FE signal cables are connected to 1st–4th and 6th–96th rows of pins in J8 and J4.

Table 3-10 and Table 3-11 define the 1st–96th rows of pins.


3-12

Table 3-10 Definition of J6 and J2 connectors of the H601IPMA backplane

Pin serial number of J6 and J2 connectors (row) LVDS signal

9

8 First LVDS signal

7

6 Second LVDS signal

5 NA

4

3 Third LVDS signal

2

1 Four LVDS signal

Table 3-11 Definition of J4 and J8 connectors of the H601IPMA backplane

Pin serial number of J4 and J8 connectors (row) FE interface

9

8 First FE interface

7

6 Second FE interface

5 NA

4

3 Third FE interface

2

1 Fourth FE interface

3.3 V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board (H303PV8/H303PV4)

3.3.1 Overview

The H303PV8/H303PV4 board is the V5 protocol processing and control board, also called the narrowband control board. It controls the narrowband subscriber boards, and provides the upstream E1 interface, switching resources and working clock for narrowband services.


3-13

The H303PV8/H303PV4 board is usually used in pair, with two boards working in active/standby mode to make the system more reliable. However, E1 interfaces do not work in active/standby mode. When two H303PV8/H303PV4 boards are applied, the E1 interface will be double.

Each H303PV8 board provides 8 E1 interfaces, 8 TTL HW interfaces and 32 extended differential HW interfaces.

A pair of H303PV8 boards can provide 16 E1 interfaces, 8 TTL HW interfaces and 32 extended differential HW interfaces.

The difference between the H303PV8 board and the H303PV4 board is: the H303PV4 board has 4 E1 interfaces.

Through these E1 interfaces, the H303PV8/H303PV4 board can be interconnected or cascaded with local exchange, optical line terminal or optical network unit.

Depending on the interconnected upstream equipment, the H303PV8/H303PV4 software varies and possesses different features accordingly.

I. Interconnected with local exchange and HONET GV5

The H303PV8/H303PV4 supports V5 interface. The system clock can be synchronized to any one of 16 E1 channels. Moreover, the local oscillator clock can work as the system clock. The system monitors the status of timing source at any time, implements the protection switchover according to the preset priority of clock source (up to 8 clock source priorities).

II. Interconnected with MD5500

The H303PV8/H303PV4 does not support V5 interface. The MD5500 controls the H303PV8/H303PV4 board through internal protocol. The system clock is preset at port 0 of two H303PV8/H303PV4 boards (synchronized to E1 channel) and the local oscillator clock of two H303PV8/H303PV4 boards. H303PV8/H303PV4 monitors the status of the timing source in real time, selects the clock source and implements the protection switchover according to the priority of the clock source. The priority (from high to low) of the clock sources is set as follows.

1) The first E1 interface of the active H303PV8/H303PV4 board 2) The first E1 interface of the standby H303PV8/H303PV4 board 3) The active local oscillator clock 4) The standby local oscillator clock

3.3.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-7 shows the front panels of the H303PV8 and H303PV4 boards.


3-14

PV4

RUN

CLKV5SV5L

MSL

COM

E1S

NOD

ETN

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

PV8

RUN

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

CLKV5SV5L

MSL

COM

E1S

NOD

ETN

(1) Reset switch (2) DIP switch (3) NM serial port (4) Reserved serial port

Figure 3-7 Front panels of the H303PV8 and H303PV4 boards

Table 3-12 describes the front panels of the H303PV8 and H303PV4 boards.

Table 3-12 Front panel description of the H303PV8 and H303PV4 boards

Name Color Meaning Description Normal status

RUN Red

Running indicator: It indicates the running status, active/standby board status, and loading status of the board program.

ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the active board is normal. ON for 0.1 seconds and OFF for 1.9 seconds periodically: standby board is normal. ON for 1.9 seconds and OFF for 0.1 seconds periodically: smooth switching from standby mode to active mode. ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds periodically: the system is being loaded, or the active-standby mode is not yet determined. Blinking at a rate of higher than 4 Hz: the loading program is being decompressed.

Active board: ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically. Standby board: ON for 0.1 seconds and OFF for 1.9 seconds periodically.


3-15


CLK Green Indicator of active/standby status of the board clock

ON: this board clock is active. OFF: this board clock is standby. ON/OFF

V5S Green Indicator of interface status

For the active board: ON: all interfaces are normal. OFF: all interfaces are abnormal. Blinking: some interfaces are abnormal. The more abnormal interfaces, the higher the blinking frequency. For the standby board: Constantly OFF.

If the V5 interface is provided, the active board is constantly ON, and the standby board is constantly OFF. If no V5 interface is provided, both the active and standby boards are constantly OFF.

V5L Green Indicator of interface link status

For the active board: ON: all links are normal. OFF: all links are abnormal. Blinking: some links are abnormal. If there are more abnormal links, the blinking frequency is higher. For the standby board: Constantly OFF.


MSL Green Indicator of active/standby board communication link status

ON for 1. 9 seconds and OFF for 0.1 seconds periodically: links are normal. OFF: links are abnormal.

ON for 1. 9 seconds and OFF for 0.1 seconds periodically.

COM Green NM serial port indicator

ON: communication is normal. OFF: communication is abnormal. ON


3-16


E1S Green E1 interface status indicator

Display the status of E1 interface of this board through the DIP switch on the panel. ON: E1 interface is normal. OFF: E1 interface frame is out of synchronization or loses carrier. ON for 0.9 seconds and OFF for 0.1 seconds periodically: bit slip. ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds: remote frame is out of synchronization.

ON

NOD Green Master/slave node communication indicator

ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds periodically: failed to communicate with the host. ON for one second and OFF for one second: start to run normally after configuration.

ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically.

ETN Green Reserved NA ON

Reset switch NA Reset switch Used for resetting the board. NA

NM serial port NA NM serial port

RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 connector, used as the front-access network management interface.

NA


Figure 3-8 shows the layout of the H303PV8 board.


3-17

S102

H303PV81 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J902

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

J1000

J1100

J1200

J1300

J903

HGB

HFBHCBHDB

1 2

J1400

J1500

J1600

J1700

1 2

1 2

1 2

Figure 3-8 Layout of the H303PV8 board


S102

H303PV41 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J902

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

J1000

J1100

J1200

J1300

J903

HGB

HFBHCBHDB

Figure 3-9 Layout of the H303PV4 boards


3-18

I. DIP switch S102

When the system is powered on or reset, the DIP switches S102-X (Figure 3-7 (2)) determines the BIOS working mode. Table 3-13 lists its specific functions.

Table 3-13 Settings of the S102 (in the case that the system is powered on or reset)

Status DIP switch

ON OFF

S102-1 Load program Not to load program

S102-2 Load data Not to load data

S102-3 Program and data are not written to the Flash memory/Load logic

Program and data are written to the Flash memory/Load logic

S102-4 Reserved

II. Set the DIP switch S102-3 as follows:

1) Setting the S102-3 to ON is only for delivery test and cannot be performed by users.

2) When the S102-1 or the S102-2 is set to ON and the S102-3 is set to OFF, the loaded program or data will be written into the Flash memory for the power-off protection.

During the normal operation of the system, the setting of DIP switch S102 will specify the E1 channel whose status is to be displayed by the E1S indicator. See Table 3-14 for details, where 0 stands for OFF, and 1 for ON.

Table 3-14 Settings of the S102 of the H303PV8/H303PV4 board

DIP switch S102-321 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111

E1 number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

III. Jumpers J1000, J1100, J1200, J1300, J1400, J1500, J1600 and J1700

These jumpers are used to select the matching impedance at the E1 receiving end. See Table 3-15.

Table 3-15 Settings of jumpers of the H303PV8/H303PV4 board

Status DIP Switch

ON OFF Factory setting

J1000-1 75Ω 120Ω ON Control 1#E1 J1000-2 75Ω 120Ω ON

Control J1100-1 75Ω 120Ω ON


3-19

Status DIP Switch


2#E1 J1100-2 75Ω 120Ω ON







75Ω and 120Ω are the matching impedances of the E1 transmission terminal.

For the 75Ω matching impedance, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable) for transmission.

For the 120Ω matching impedance, use the balanced cable (differential symmetric pair) for transmission.

IV. Jumper J902

Jumper J902 is used to specify whether to ground the shielding layer of the E1 sending end. Table 3-16 lists the setting methods.

Table 3-16 Settings of jumper J902

Status DIP switch


1#E1 J902-1 Grounded Not grounded OFF







3-20

Status DIP switch




V. Jumper J903

This jumper is reserved for the system. By default, the end with silk-screened HGB is short circuited. If the applied backplane is not the HGB, the other end will be short circuited.


Figure 3-10 and Figure 3-11 show the connection between the H303PV8/H303PV4 boards and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)

Figure 3-10 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H303PV8/H303PV4 board


3-21

Figure 3-11 Signal definition of lower HEADER connector on the H303PV8/H303PV4 board

The PV8 board provides up to 8 E1 interfaces, distributed on the 17th–32nd rows of pins (in columns A and C), as shown in Figure 3-11. See below for the meanings of the characters on the pins.

“R” and “T” at the very beginning: “receiving” and “transmitting” of E1 signal for the PV8.

Number: E1 number. “R” and “T” at the end: ring and tip of the shielding layer of E1 signal cable.

The table below lists the definitions of other signals.

Table 3-17 Definitions of other signals

Signal Definition

SCCRXD Receiving signal end of maintenance and network management communication serial port.

SCCTXD Transmitting signal end of maintenance and network management communication serial port.

H2ML Output, 2 M clock signal, for the left half of the frame (front view of the frame).

H2MR Output, 2 M clock signal, for the right half of the frame (front view of the frame).

HFSL Output, 8 k clock frame head signal, for the left half of the frame (front view of the frame).

HFSR Output, 8 k clock frame head signal, for the right half of the frame (front view of the frame).



3-22

Signal Definition

GND Working ground.

+5 V +5 V power supply.

3.4 V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board (H302PV8/H302PV4)

3.4.1 Overview

The H302PV8/H302PV4 board is the V5 protocol processing and control board. It controls the narrowband subscriber board, provides the upstream E1 interface, switching resources and working clock for narrowband services.

The H302PV8/H302PV4 board is usually used in pair, with two boards working in active/standby mode to make the system more reliable. However, E1 interfaces do not have the active-standby function. When two H302PV8/H302PV4 boards are applied, the E1 interface resources will be double.

Each H302PV8 board provides 8 E1 interfaces, 8 TTL HW interfaces and 32 extended differential HW interfaces.

A pair of H302PV8 boards can provide 16 E1 interfaces, 8 TTL HW interfaces and 32 extended differential HW interfaces.

Compared with the H302PV8 board, the functions and performances of the H302PV4 board are the same, except the H302PV4 board has 4 E1 interfaces.

Through these E1 interfaces, the H302PV8/H302PV4 board can be interconnected or cascaded with the local exchange (LE), Optical Line Terminal (OLT) or ONU SSM module.

Depending on the interconnected upstream equipment, the H303PV8/H303PV4 software varies and possesses different features accordingly.

I. Interconnected with the LE and HONET GV5

H303PV8/H303PV4 supports V5 interface. The system clock can be synchronized to any one of 16 E1 channels. Moreover, the local oscillator clock can work as the system clock. The system monitors the status of timing source at any time, implements the protection switchover according to the preset priority of clock source (up to 8 clock source priorities).

II. Interconnected with the MD5500

H303PV8/H303PV4 does not support V5 interface. The MD5500 controls the H303PV8/H303PV4 board through internal protocol. The system clock is preset at port 0 (E1 clock signal) of two H303PV8/H303PV4 boards and at the local oscillator clock of


3-23

two H303PV8/H303PV4 boards. The H303PV8/H303PV4 board monitors the status of the timing source in real time, selects the clock source and implements the protection switchover according to the priority of the clock source. The priority (from high to low) of the clock sources is set as follows:

1) The first E1 interface of the active H303PV8/H303PV4 board 2) The first E1 interface of the standby H303PV8/H303PV4 board 3) The active local oscillator clock 4) The standby local oscillator clock

3.4.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-12 shows the front panels of the H302PV8 and H302PV4 boards.

PV4

RUN

CLKV5SV5L

MSL

COM

E1S

NOD

ETN

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

PV8

RUN

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

CLKV5SV5L

MSL

COM

E1S

NOD

ETN

(1) Reset switch (2) Dip switch (3) NM serial port (4) Reserved serial port

Figure 3-12 Front panels of the H302PV8 and H302PV4 boards

Table 3-18 describes the front panels of the H302PV8 and H302PV4 boards.


3-24

Table 3-18 Front panel description of the H302PV8 and H302PV4 boards


RUN Red

Running indicator: It indicates the running status, active/standby board status, and loading status of board program.

ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the active board is normal. ON for 0.1s and OFF for 1.9 seconds periodically: standby board is normal. ON for 1. 9 seconds and OFF for 0.1 seconds periodically: smooth switching from standby mode to active mode. ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds periodically: the system is being loaded, or the active-standby mode is not yet determined. Blinks at a rate of higher than 4 Hz: the loading program is being decompressed.





For the active board: ON: all interfaces are normal. OFF: all interfaces are abnormal. Blinking: some interfaces are abnormal. If there are more abnormal interfaces, the blinking is higher. For the standby board: Constantly OFF.



3-25



For the active board: ON: all links are normal. OFF: all links are abnormal. Blinking: some links are abnormal. IF there are more abnormal links, the blinking is higher. For the standby board: Constantly OFF.


MSL Green Indicator of active/standby board communication link status






Display the status of E1 interface of this board through setting the DIP switch on the panel. ON: E1 interface is normal. OFF: E1 interface frame is out of synchronization or loses carrier. ON for 0.9 seconds and OFF for 0.1 seconds periodically: bit slip. ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds periodically: remote frame is out of synchronization.

ON






NM serial port NA NM serial port

RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 connector, used as front-access-cabled network management interface.

NA


3-26



J0101

J0403

S0101

S0102

H302PV81 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

S0501

1 2

1 2

ON1 2

ON1 2

ON

ON

S1101

S1102

S1201

S1202

1 2

ON1 2

1 2

S1301

ON

S1302

ON

S1401

1 2

ON

S1402

J060

4

HGB

HFBHCBHDB




3-27

S0101

H302PV41 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

S0501

1 2

1 2

ON1 2

ON1 2

ON

ON

S1101

S1102

S1201

S1202

J060

4

HGB

HFBHCBHDB


I. DIP switch S0101

When the system is powered on or reset, the DIP switch S0101 ((2) in Figure 3-12) determines the BIOS working mode. Table 3-19 lists its specific functions.

Table 3-19 Settings of the S0101 (in the case that the system is powered on or reset)

Status DIP switch

ON OFF

S0101-1 Load program Not to load program

S0101-2 Load data Not to load data

S0101-3 Program and data are not written to the Flash memory/Load logic

Program and data are not written to the Flash memory/Load logic

S0101-4 Load logic

Set the DIP switch S0101-3 as follows:

Setting the S0101-3 to ON is only for delivery test and can not be performed by users.

Set both S0101-4 and S0101-3 to ON simultaneously to load logic. However, it’s unnecessary for users to set them, because there is no need to change the logic.

When the S0101-1 or the S0101-2 is set to ON and the S0101-3 is set to OFF, the loaded program or data will be written into the Flash memory for the power-off protection.


3-28

During the normal operation of the system, which E1 link status will be shown by the E1S indicator depends on the setting of DIP switch S0101, see Table 3-20. Here, 0 stands for OFF, and 1 stands for ON.

Table 3-20 Settings of the S0101 of the H302PV8/H302PV4 board (in the case that the host runs normally)

DIP switch S0101-321 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111

E1 number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

II. DIP switches S1101, S1102, S1201, S1202, S1301, S1302, S1401, and S1402

These DIP switches are used to select the matching impedance at the E1 receiving end, as shown in Table 3-21.

Table 3-21 Settings of the S1101-S1402 of the H302PV8/H302PV4 board

StatusDIP Switch


S1101-1 75Ω 120Ω ON Control 1#E1 S1101-2 75Ω 120Ω ON










3-29



Configure the data and set the DIP switches according to the selected matching impedance.

III. DIP switch S0501

This DIP switch is used to select whether the shielding layer at the transmitting end of E1 is grounded or not. Table 3-22 lists the setting methods.

Table 3-22 Settings of the S0501

Status DIP switch


1# E1 S0501-1 Grounded Not grounded OFF








IV. Jumper J0604

This jumper is reserved for the system. By default, the end with silk-screened HGB is short circuited. If the applied backplane is not the HGB, the other end will be short circuited.


Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the pin assignment between the H302PV8/H302PV4 boards and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)


3-30

Figure 3-15 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H302PV8/H302PV4 board

Figure 3-16 Signal definition of lower HEADER connector on the H302PV8/H302PV4 board


3-31

The PV8 board provides up to 8 E1 ports, distributed on the 17th–32nd rows of pins (in columns A and C), as shown in Figure 3-15. The characters on the pins are shown as follows.



Table 3-23 lists the definitions of HEADER connector signals in Figure 3-16.

Table 3-23 Definitions of HEADER connector signals

Signal Definition

SCCRXD Receiving end of the communication serial port used for maintenance and network management.

SCCTXD Transmitting end of the communication serial port used for maintenance and network management

H2ML Output, 2 M clock signal, for the left half of the frame (front view of the frame).

H2MR Output, 2 M clock signal, for the right half of the frame (front view of the frame).

HFSL Output, 8 k clock frame head signal, for the left half of the frame (front view of the frame).

HFSR Output, 8 k clock frame head signal, for the right half of the frame (front view of the frame).


GND Working ground.

+5 V +5 V power supply.

3.5 V5 Interface Processing Board (H601PVU)

3.5.1 Overview

The H601PVU board, as the control board of the ONU frame applied in one-layer networking mode, controls the narrowband subscriber boards or the slave frame, and provides the upstream E1 interface, switching resources and working clock for narrowband services.

Usually, two H601PVU boards are applied to work in the active/standby mode to make the system more reliable. However, E1 interfaces do not work in the active/standby mode. When two H601PVU boards are applied, the E1 interface is doubled.

Each H601PVU board provides 8 E1 interfaces, 8 TTL HW interfaces and 32 extended differential HW interfaces. Two H601PVU boards can provide 16 E1 interfaces, 8 TTL HW interfaces and 32 extended differential HW interfaces.


3-32

Through these E1 interfaces, the H601PVU board can be interconnected or subtended with LE, OLT or ONU.

The H601PVU board has NM interface, by which the operator is able to configure it using the command line terminal or NMS.

3.5.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-17 shows the front panels of the H601PVU board.

PVU

RUN

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

CLKV5SV5L

MSL

COM

E1S

NOD

ETN

(1) Reset switch (2) DIP switch (3) NM serial port (4) Reserved serial port

Figure 3-17 Front panel of the H601PVU board

Table 3-24 describes the front panel of the H601PVU board.


3-33

Table 3-24 Description of front panel of the H601PVU board


RUN Red

Running indicator: It indicates the running status, active/standby board status, and loading status of the board program.

ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the active board is normal. ON for 0.1 seconds and OFF for 1.9 seconds periodically: standby board is normal. ON for 1.9 seconds and OFF for 0.1 seconds periodically: smooth switching from standby mode to active mode. ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds periodically: the system is being loaded, or the active-standby mode is not yet determined. Blinking at a rate of higher than 4 Hz: the loading program is being decompressed.





For the active board: ON: all interfaces are normal. OFF: all interfaces are abnormal. Blinking: some interfaces are abnormal. The more abnormal interfaces, the higher the blinking frequency. For the standby board: Constantly OFF.

If the V5 interface is provided, the active board is constantly ON, and the standby board is constantly OFF.If no V5 interface is provided, both the active and standby boards are constantly OFF.


3-34



For the active board: ON: all links are normal. OFF: all links are abnormal. Blinking: some links are abnormal. If there are more abnormal links, the blinking frequency is higher. For the standby board: Constantly OFF.

If the V5 interface is provided, the active board is constantly ON, and the standby board is constantly OFF.If no V5 interface is provided, both the active and standby boards are constantly OFF.

MSL Green

Indicator of active/standby board communication link status






Display the status of E1 interface of this board through the DIP switch on the panel. ON: E1 interface is normal. OFF: E1 interface frame is out of synchronization or loses carrier. ON for 0.9 seconds and OFF for 0.1 seconds periodically: bit slip. ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds: remote frame is out of synchronization.

ON






NM serial port

NA NM serial port RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 connector, used as the front-access network management interface.

NA


3-35


Figure 3-18 shows the layout of the H601PVU board.

S102

H601PVU1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J902

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

J1000

J1100

J1200

J1300

J903

HGB

HFBHCBHDB

1 2

J1400

J1500

J1600

J1700

1 2

1 2

1 2

Figure 3-18 Layout of the H601PVU board

I. DIP switch S102

During the normal operation of the system, the setting of DIP switch S102 will specify the E1 channel whose status is to be displayed by the E1S indicator. See Table 3-25 for details, where 0 stands for OFF and 1 for ON.

Table 3-25 Setting of DIP switch S102 of the H601PVU board

DIP switch S102-321 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111

E1 number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

II. Jumpers J1000, J1100, J1200, J1300, J1400, J1500, J1600 and J1700

These jumpers are used to select the matching impedance at the E1 receiving end. See Table 3-26.


3-36

Table 3-26 Settings of jumpers of the H601PVU board

StatusDIP Switch


J1000-1 75Ω 120Ω ON Control 1#E1

J1000-2 75Ω 120Ω ON


J1100-2 75Ω 120Ω ON


J1200-2 75Ω 120Ω ON


J1300-2 75Ω 120Ω ON


J1400-2 75Ω 120Ω ON


J1500-2 75Ω 120Ω ON


J1600-2 75Ω 120Ω ON


J1700-2 75Ω 120Ω ON




III. Jumper J902

Jumper J902 is used to specify whether to ground the shielding layer of the E1 sending end. Table 3-27 lists the setting methods.

Table 3-27 Settings of jumper J902

Status DIP switch





3-37

Status DIP switch








IV. Jumper J903

This jumper is reserved for the system. By default, the end with silk-screened HGB is short circuited. If the applied backplane is not the HGB, the other end needs to be short circuited.


Figure 3-19 shows the pin assignment between the H601PVU board and backplane. (It’s the rear view of the backplane).

Figure 3-19 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H601PVU board


3-38

The PVU board provides up to 8 E1 interfaces, distributed on the 17th–32nd rows of pins (in columns A and C), as shown in Figure 3-19. See below for the meanings of the characters on the pins.



3.6 Remote Subscriber Processing Board (H303RSP)

3.6.1 Overview

The H303RSP board is the control unit of subscriber frame. Each H303RSP board provides up to four E1 interfaces, eight TTL HW interfaces and eight differential HW interfaces. One or two such boards can be installed into one frame. If there are two H303RSP boards in the frame, they shall work in load sharing mode, and support mutual aid in case of the failure of either H303RSP.

The H303RSP board has three types: H303RSP0, H303RSPA0 and H303RSPB0. See Table 3-28 for their features and applied situations.

Table 3-28 Performance list of H303RSP series of boards

Board Features Applied situation

Maximum usable resource

Convergence ratio

H303RSP0 Four E1 interfaces

Situation with heavy traffic.

Each board provides four E1 interfaces or eight differential HW interfaces.

1:1 1:2

H303RSPA0 One E1 interface

Applied universally.

Each board provides one E1 interface or eight differential HW interfaces.

1:4

H303RSPB0 No E1 interface Applied along with the PV8.

Each board provides eight differential HW interfaces

1:1 1:2 1:4

Through E1 or differential HW interface, the H303RSP board

Communicates with the equipment of upper layer Controls boards in the subscriber frame and Converges the TTL HWs in the subscriber frame to E1 link or differential HW.

The convergence ratio, such as 1:1, 1:2 or 1:4, can be adjusted under the control of the upper layer equipment.

3.6.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-20 shows the front panel of the H303RSP board.


3-39

RSP

RUN

CLK

AID

LNK1

LNK2

E11

E12

E13

E14

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1) Reset switch (2) DIP switch (3) Debugging serial port (4) Monitoring serial port

Figure 3-20 Front panel of the H303RSP

Table 3-29 describes the front panel of the H303RSP board.

Table 3-29 Front panel description of the H303RSP board

Indicator Color Explanation Meaning Normal state


ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds periodically: the board is abnormal. ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the board is normal.


AID Green Mutual aid indicator

ON: mutually aid to the opposite board. OFF: without mutual aid.

Corresponding board abnormal: ON; Corresponding board normal: OFF

CLK Green Clock active indicator

ON: this board provides system clock for the current functional frame. OFF: this board does not provide system clock for the current functional frame.

ON/OFF


3-40

Indicator Color Explanation Meaning Normal state

LINK1 Green Communication links status indicator

ON: communication with upper layer equipment is normal. OFF: communication with upper layer equipment is abnormal.

ON

LINK2 Green Reserved Reserved OFF

E1 status indicator in the case of remote work mode

It indicates the status of the first to the fourth E1 links: ON: the link is abnormal. OFF: the link is normal.

OFF

E11- E14

Green

Quasi local work mode

Before the RSP receives the HW configuration of the host, the four E1 indicators are OFF. After the RSP receives the HW configuration (suppose N HW cables are configured), if N≤ 4, the first N indicators are OFF; and the rest are ON. Otherwise, the four E1 indicators are OFF.

NA

Resetting switch NA Resetting switch Used to reset the board. NA

Debugging serial port NA Debugging serial

port RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 connector, used for debugging. NA

Monitoring serial port NA Monitoring serial

port RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 connector. It’s the front leading-out interface used for the environment and power supply monitoring.

NA


Figure 3-21 shows the layout of the H303RSP board.

Caution:

Do not set the DIP switches and Jumpers before unplugging the board from the backplane. Otherwise, the board will be damaged.


3-41

JZ4

JZ2

SG1

H1

SG2

H303RSP

SG4

SH1

1 2

15 16

UA5 UB5

1 2

4

4 2 1

UC5 UD5

1 2

4

4 2 1

1 1

2 4 2 4

SG3

Figure 3-21 Layout of the H303RSP board

I. DIP switch SG1

Table 3-30 describes the settings of DIP switch SG1 of H303RSP board. Here, 0 stands for OFF and 1 for ON.

Table 3-30 Settings of DIP switch SG1

DIP switch

Status 1234 Meaning Factory

setting

1000 Software online upgrade in remote working mode

0000 Normal operation in remote working mode

0001 Local maintenance in remote working mode

0101 Local maintenance in quasi local working mode

1100 Software online upgrade in quasi local working mode

0100 Normal operation in quasi local working mode

SG1

Other Reserved

0000


3-42

Note:

The local maintenance is used for fault locating. At this time, the RSP board does not need to communicate with upper layer equipment. If the RSP board works in the default configuration, it will judge whether it is normal itself. Because the ring back is performed to the E1 links, the E1 LEDs on the front panel will turn off.

II. Settings of jumpers UA5/UB5/UC5/UD5/SG3/SG4/SH1

When the line impedance is selected for E1, it not only sends signal at the transmitting end according to the template defined in ITU-T G.703, but also adopts the corresponding impedance matching at the receiving end. The involved jumpers include UA5, UB5, UC5, UD5, SG3, SG4, SH1, The jumper SG4 is reserved. The settings of UA5, UB5, UC5, and UD5 determine the impedance selection of the four E1 interfaces.

1) Settings of jumper UA5, UB5, UC5, UD5 and SG3

Table 3-31 Settings of jumpers UA5, UB5, UC5, UD5 and SG3

Jumper ON OFF Factory setting

UA5 75Ω 120Ω ON

UB5 75Ω 120Ω ON

UC5 75Ω 120Ω ON

UD5 75Ω 120Ω ON

SG3-1 75Ω 120Ω ON

SG3-2

SG3-3

SG4

Reserved for the system. ON

Note:

The settings of DIP switch will not take effect until you reset the board. The impedances for 4 E1 interfaces on the board should be the same, either 120Ω or 75Ω.

2) Settings of jumper SH1 All are set to OFF when the line impedance is 120Ω. When the line impedance is 75Ω, bits 1–4 of SH1 are used to set the grounding of

receiving shielding layer of 1–4 E1 interfaces, and bits 5–8 of SH1 are used to set that of transmitting shielding layer of 5–8 E1 interfaces. Each jumper corresponds


3-43

to one E1 interface. ON: the shielding layer is connected with the PGND; OFF: the shielding layer is not connected with the PGND.

When the line impedance is 75Ω, ground the transmitting shielding layer, not the receiving layer.


Figure 3-22 (upper HEADER) and Figure 3-23 (lower HEADER) show the connection between the H303RSP board and backplane. (It is the front view of the backplane).

Figure 3-22 Connection between the H303RSP board and the backplane (upper HEADER)

The H303RSP board can connect externally with up to four E1 interfaces, which are located on the 17th–32nd rows of pins in the upper HEADER (Columns A and C). If the AMP header is inserted to the 17th–24th rows of pins, the first two E1 interfaces are led out. When the AMP header is inserted to the 25th–32nd rows of pins, the other two E1 interfaces are led out. See below for the meanings of the characters on the pins.


3-44



Figure 3-23 Connection between the H303RSP and the backplane (lower HEADER)

The H303RSP can externally connect up to eight differential HW signals.

The first four differential HW signals are distributed in the 17th–24th rows of pins of lower HEADER. Columns A and C include two differential HWs, the middle column includes two differential HWs, as shown in Figure 3-23. These four differential HWs are included in one AMP header.

The latter four differential HW signals are distributed in the 25th–32nd rows of pins of lower HEADER. Columns A and C include two differential HWs, the middle column includes two differential HWs, as shown in Figure 3-23. These four differential HWs are included in one AMP header. See below for the meanings of the characters on the pins.

H-UHW: upstream differential HW. H-DHW: downstream differential HW. Digital: number of differential HW. +/-: Up/low levels of differential signal.


3-45

3.7 Remote Subscriber Processing Board (H302RSP)

3.7.1 Overview

The H302RSP board is the control unit of the slave frame. One or two such boards can be installed into one frame. If there are two H302RSP boards in the frame, they shall work in load sharing mode, and support mutual aid in case of the failure of either H302RSP.

The H302RSP board has three types: H302RSP0, H302RSPA0 and H302RSPB0. See Table 3-32 for their features and applied situations.

Table 3-32 Performance list of H302RSP series of boards

Board Features Applied situation Maximum usable resource

Convergence ratio

H302RSP0 Four ports of E1 signals

Situation with heavy traffic.

Each board provides four E1 interfaces or eight differential HW interfaces.

1:1 1:2

H302RSPA0 One port of E1 signal Applied universally.

Each board provides one E1 interface or eight differential HW interfaces.

1:4

H302RSPB0 No ports of E1 signal

Applied along with the PV8.

Each board provides eight differential HW interfaces

1:1 1:2 1:4

Through E1 or differential HW interface, the H302RSP board

Communicates with the upper layer equipment. Controls boards in the subscriber frame. Converges the TTL HWs in the subscriber frame to E1 link or differential HW.

The convergence ratio, such as 1:1, 1:2 or 1:4, can be adjusted under the control of the upper layer equipment.

3.7.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-24 shows the front panel of the H302RSP board.


3-46

RSP

RUN

CLK

AID

LNK1

LNK2

E11

E12

E13

E14

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1) Reset switch (2) DIP switch (3) Debugging serial port (4) Monitoring serial port

Figure 3-24 Front panel of the H302RSP board

Table 3-33 describes the front panel of the H302RSP board.

Table 3-33 Front panel description of the H302RSP board

Indicator Color Description Meaning Normal status


ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds periodically: the board is abnormal. ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the board is normal.


AID Green Mutual aid indicator

ON: mutually aid to the opposite board. OFF: without mutual aid.

Board abnormal: ON. Board normal: OFF

CLK Green Clock active indicator

ON: this board provides system clock for the current functional frame. OFF: this board does not provide system clock for the current functional frame.

ON/OFF


3-47

Indicator Color Description Meaning Normal status

LINK1 Green Communication links status indicator

ON: communication with upper layer equipment is normal. OFF: communication with upper layer equipment is abnormal.

ON

LINK2 Green Reserved Reserved OFF

E1 status indicator in the case of remote work mode

It indicates the status of the first to the fourth E1 links. ON: the link is abnormal. OFF: the link is normal.

OFF

E11–E14 Green

Quasi local work mode

Before the RSP receives the HW configuration of the host, the four E1 indicators are OFF. After the RSP receives the HW configuration (suppose N HW cables are configured), if N≤ 4, the first N indicators are OFF; and the rest are ON. Otherwise, the four E1 indicators are OFF.

NA

Resetting switch NA Resetting switch Used to reset the board. NA

JZ4 NA Debugging serial port

RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 connector, used for debugging. NA

JZ2 NA Monitoring serial port

RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 connector. It’s the front leading-out interface used for the environment and power supply monitoring.

NA


Figure 3-25 shows the layout of the H302RSP board.

Caution:

Do not set the DIP switches and jumpers before the board is unplugged from the backplane. Otherwise, the board will be damaged.


3-48

JZ4

JZ2

SG1

H1

SG2

H302RSP

1 2 3 4

ON

SG3

1 2

3

4

ON

UC5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

SH1

1 2

3

4

ON

UA5

Figure 3-25 Layout of the H302RSP

I. DIP switch SG1

Table 3-34 describes the settings of DIP switch SG1 of H302RSP board. Here, 0 stands for OFF and 1 for ON.

Table 3-34 Settings of DIP switch SG1

DIP switch Status 1234 Meaning Factory setting

1000 Software online upgrade in remote working mode

0000 Normal operation in remote working mode

0001 Local maintenance in remote working mode


1100 Software online upgrade in quasi local working mode

0100 Normal operation in quasi local working mode


SG1

Other Reserved

0000


3-49

Note:

The local maintenance is used for fault locating. In this mode, the RSP does not need to communicate with equipment of upper level. If it works in the default configuration, it will judge whether it is normal itself. Because the ring back is performed to the E1 links, the E1 LEDs on the front panel will turn off.

II. DIP switches SH1/UA5/UC5/SG3

When the line impedance is selected for E1, it not only sends signal at the transmitting end according to the template defined in ITU-T G.703, but also adopts corresponding impedance matching at the receiving end. The involved DIP switches include SG3, SH1, UA5 and UC5.

Table 3-35 describes the settings of these DIP switches.

Table 3-35 Settings of DIP switches SH1/UA5/UC5/SG3

DIP switch ON OFF Factory setting

SH1 The E1 transmitting and receiving ring is connected to PGND.

The E1 transmitting and receiving ring is not connected to PGND.

ON

UA5 75Ω 120Ω ON

UC5 75Ω 120Ω ON

SG3-1 75Ω 120Ω ON

SG3-2

SG3-3

SG3-4

Reserved for the system. ON

Note:

The settings of DIP switch will not take effect until you reset the board. The impedances for four E1 interfaces on the board should be the same, either 120Ω or 75Ω, and the

DIP switches UA5 and UC5 shall be set consistently with the SG3.


Figure 3-26 (upper HEADER) and Figure 3-27 (lower HEADER) show the pin assignment between the H302RSP board and backplane. (It is the front view of the backplane).


3-50

Figure 3-26 Pin assignment between the H302RSP board and the backplane(upper HEADER)

The H302RSP board can connect externally with up to 4 E1 interfaces, which are located on the 17th–32nd rows of pins in the upper HEADER (Columns A and C). If the AMP header is inserted to the 17th–24th rows of pins, the first two E1s are led out; and when the AMP header is inserted to the 25th–32nd rows of pins, the latter two E1s are led out. In Figure 3-26, the meanings of the characters on the pins are shown below.




3-51

Figure 3-27 Pin assignment between the H302RSP and the backplane (lower HEADER)

The H302RSP board can externally connect up to eight differential HW signals.

The first four differential HW signals are distributed in the 17th–24th rows of pins of lower HEADER. Columns A and C include two differential HWs, the middle column includes two differential HWs, as shown in Figure 3-27. These four differential HWs are included in one AMP header.

The latter four differential HW signals are distributed in the 25th–32nd rows of pins of lower HEADER. Columns A and C include two differential HWs, the middle column includes two differential HWs, as shown in Figure 3-27. These four differential HWs are included in one AMP header. The meanings of the characters on the pins are shown below.

H-UHW: upstream differential HW. H-DHW: downstream differential HW. Digital: number of differential HW. +/-: Up/low levels of differential signal.

3.8 Packet Voice Processing Board (H601PVM)

3.8.1 Overview

The H601PVM board is the packet voice processing board, which encapsulates the TDM voice signals into IP packets. The PVM board manages and communicates with


3-52

service boards in the UA5000 frame, implements signal tone sending and number receiving, and processes the H.248/MGCP protocols. There are two FE interfaces in the front panel of the PVM board, respectively for IP voice service transmission and equipment maintenance. Figure 3-28 shows the interfaces between the PVM board and subscriber board (taking the ASL board as the example).

PVM

8·HWs 8·HWs

Clock Clock

Serial port Serial port

ASL slotsin the

left halfframe

ASL slots in the right halfframe

PVM

8·HWs 8·HWs

Clock Clock

Serial port Serial port

ASL slotsin the

left halfframe

ASL slots in the right halfframe

Figure 3-28 Interfaces between the PVM board and the ASL board

3.8.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-29 shows the front panel of the H601PVM board.

PVM

RUN

FAIL

RESET

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) Serial port (2) Maintenance network interface (3) Service network interface

Figure 3-29 Front panel of the PVM board

Table 3-36 describes the front panel of the H601IPVM board.


3-53

Table 3-36 Front panel description of the H601PVM board

Indicator Color Function Description

RUN Red Operation status indicator

Loading: blinking quickly. Normal running: blinking at the frequency of 0.5 Hz.Standby: constantly ON.

FAIL Green Failure indicator Normal running: OFF Fault: constantly ON.

RESET NA Resetting button Reset the board manually.

Serial port NA NA Providing the local and remote dial-up access function.

Maintenance network interface

NA 10/100MBaseT network interface

For the loading of BIOS version and the debugging information query in case of error.

Service network interface

NA 10/100MBaseT network interface

Connecting the NMS workstation, or working as the version loading channel in the host mode.


The H601PVM board has no DIP switch or jumper.


See Figure 3-30 and Figure 3-31 for the pin assignment between the H601IPVM board and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)


3-54

Figure 3-30 Definition of upper HEADER pin of the PVM board

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

+5V+5V

GNDGND

+5V+5V

GNDGND

A B C

Figure 3-31 Definition of lower HEADER pin of the PVM board

The PVM board provides two FE interfaces, which are at 1st–3rd and 31st–32nd rows of pins of upper HEADER.


3-55

“R” stands for signal receiving, and “T” stands for signal transmitting.

3.9 ATM Interface Board (H601AIUA)

3.9.1 Overview

The H601AIUA board implements the remote cascading function of the UA5000. It is installed in the slot of interface board in the UA5000 frame.

The H601AIUA board provides two interfaces for subboards:

The interface at the front panel side supports the 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interface subboard.

The other interface at backplane side supports the ATM E3 subboard or IMA E1 subboard.

The H601AIUA board can provide up to two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interfaces, while the backplane can provide up to eight E1 interfaces or two E3 interfaces.

3.9.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-32 shows the front panel of the H601AIUA board.


3-56

AIUA

RESET

RUN

ALM

Sign

al in

terfa

ce

Figure 3-32 Front panel of the H601AIUA board

Table 3-37 describes the front panel of the H601AIUA board.

Table 3-37 Front panel description of the H601AIUA board


RUN Green Running indicator

It indicates the work status of the board. When it blinks at the rate of 2 Hz (ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds periodically), the board is running normally. During the system start-up, it blinks at the rate of 4 Hz (ON for 0.125 seconds and OFF for 0.125 seconds periodically).

ALM Red Alarm indicator

It turns off when the system runs normally, and turns on when the system becomes abnormal.

RESET NA Manual resetting switch

It is used to reset the board.


3-57


Signal interface NA Signal

interface The front panel of the H601AIUA has optical interfaces, and one or two 155 Mbit/s subboards can be configured as per the service requirements.

3.9.3 Subboard

I. Overview

Table 3-38 lists the subboards supported by the H601AIUA board.

Table 3-38 Subboards supported by the H601AIUA board


H601O1CNG One 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interface Single-mode, 30 km, SC.

H601O1CNB One 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interface Multi-mode, 2 km, SC.

H601O2CNG Two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interfaces Single-mode, 30 km, SC.

H601O2CNB Two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interfaces Multi-mode, 2 km, SC.

H601E8IA Two IMA E1 electrical interfaces Led out from the backplane pins.

H601E23A Two ATM E3/DS3(T3) electrical interfaces Led out from the backplane pins.

H601E13A One ATM E3/DS3(T3) electrical interface Led out from the backplane pins.

II. DIP switches and jumpers of H601E8IA

Five sets of DIP switches (S1–S5) on the H601E8IA board are used to distinguish the cable type.

Table 3-39 DIP switches description of the H601E8IA board

Switch 75Ω cable 120Ω cable

S1 ON for Bits 1–4 OFF for Bits 1–4






3-58


See Figure 3-33 and Figure 3-34 for the pin assignment between the H601E8IA board and backplane. (It’s the rear view of the backplane.)

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687888990919293949596

RT1TT1

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

RT2TT2RT3TT3RT4TT4

RR1TR1RR2TR2RR3TR3RR4TR4

PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND

Figure 3-33 Signal definition for upper HEADER connector on the H601AIUA board


3-59

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687888990919293949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132


PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND

RT5TT5RT6TT6RT7TT7RT8TT8

Figure 3-34 Signal definition for lower HEADER connector on the H601AIUA board

In the above two figures:

RR1–8: the 1st to 8th channels of E1 signal correspond to the “ring” of the signal received at the H601AIUA.

RT1–8: the 1st to 8th channels of E1 signal correspond to the “tip” of the signal received at the H601AIUA.

TR1–8: the 1st to 8th channels of E1 signal correspond to the “ring” of the signal sent from the H601AIUA.

TT1–8: the 1st to 8th channels of E1 signal correspond to the “tip” of the signal sent from the H601AIUA.

PGND: protection ground.

3.10 16-port Circuit Emulation E1 Interface Board (H601DEHA)

3.10.1 Overview

The H601DEHA board provides independent 16 E1 interfaces. It supports the unstructured data transfer (UDT) CES. Each interface supports system clock, line clock and SRTS clock. The clock of each interface is independent from each other.

The H601DEHA board is installed in the slot of interface board in the UA5000 frame. Configure a maximum of two DEHA boards in one UA5000 frame.


3-60

The H601DEHA board provides private line E1 access service and TDM E1 access service.

I. E1 private line access

The H601DEHA board supports private line access service through E1 channels. The UA5000 adapts the E1 signals into ATM cells, and transmits them to the MD5500, where the ATM cells are recovered into E1 signals and transmitted to a DDN node. The private line access service here acts like the extension of DDN private line service.

Another application of the private line access service is to connect two E1 nodes at one or two UA5000s directly, without passing through the upper layer equipment.

II. TDM E1 access

The H601DEHA board supports TDM services through E1 channels. The UA5000 adapts the E1 signals into ATM cells, and transmits them to the MD5500, where the ATM cells are recovered into E1 signals and transmitted to the PSTN.

3.10.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601DEHA board, as described in Table 3-40.

Table 3-40 Indicator description of the H601DEHA board

Indicator Color Description Meaning


It indicates the work status of the board. When it blinks at the rate of 1 Hz (ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds periodically), the board is running normally. During the system start-up, it blinks at the rate of 4 Hz (ON for 0.125 seconds and OFF for 0.125 seconds periodically).

3.10.3 DIP Switches

Figure 3-35 shows the layout of the H601DEHA board.


3-61

H601DEHA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONS1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONS5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONS2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONS6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONS4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONS3

S81 2 3 4

Figure 3-35 Layout of the H601DEHA board

I. DIP switches S1/S2/S5/S5

These switches are used to select whether the shielding layer at the transmitting end or receiving end of E1 is grounded or not. Table 3-41 shows the setting methods.

Table 3-41 Settings of DIP switches S1/S2/S5/S5

Status DIP switch


S1 1-4#E1 Grounded Not grounded OFF




Remark: Every DIP switch contains eight bits for controlling four channels of E1. The grounding for the shielding layer of every E1 is controlled by two bits: the first one for transmission, the second one for reception.

II. DIP switches S3/S4

DIP switches S3/S4 are used to select the matching impedance at the E1 receiving end, as shown in Table 3-42.


3-62

Table 3-42 Settings of DIP switches S3/S4

StatusDIP switch

ON OFF factory setting

Control 1#E1 S3-1 75Ω 120Ω ON



















To select the matching impedance, you need to set the DIP switches correctly while maintaining the consistency of configuration data.

III. DIP switch S8

DIP switch S8 is used to express the impedance at the E1 receiving end, as shown in Table 3-43.


3-63

Table 3-43 Settings of DIP switch S8

StatusDIP switch

ON OFF factory setting

S8-1 75Ω 120Ω ON

S8-2-4 Reserved

Caution:

The setting of DIP switch will not take effect until you reset the board. The impedances for 16 E1 interfaces on the board should be the same, either 120Ω or 75Ω. The DIP

switches S3 and S4 shall be set consistently with the S8-1.


Figure 3-36 and Figure 3-37 show the connection between the H601DEHA board and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

787980818283848586878889

90919293949596

RT1TT1

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

464748495051525354555657

58596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

RT2TT2RT3TT3RT4TT4


PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND

-48V-48V

-48V-48V

GNDGND

GND

GNDGND

GND

RR9RT9TR9TT9RR10RT10TR10TT10RR11RT11TR11TT11RR12RT12TR12TT12

Figure 3-36 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H601DEHA board


3-64

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687888990919293949596

RT5TT5

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

RT6TT6R67T67RT8TT8

RR5

TR5RR6TR6RR7TR7RR8TR8

BGNDBGND-48V-48V

PGNDPGND


GND

GND

GNDGND

BGNDBGND-48V-48V

PGNDPGND

GND

GND

GNDGND

Figure 3-37 Signal definition of lower HEADER connector on the H601DEHA board


RR1–16: Channels 1–16 of E1 signal corresponding to the “ring” of the signal received at the H601DEHA.

RT1–16: Channels 1–16 of E1 signal corresponding to the “tip” of the signal received at the H601 DEHA.

TR1–16: Channels 1–16 of E1 signal corresponding to the “ring” of the signal sent from the H601 DEHA.

TT1–16: Channels 1–16 of E1 signal corresponding to the “tip” of the signal sent from the H601 DEHA.

3.11 32-port Analog Subscriber Board (CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL)

3.11.1 Overview

The 32-port analog subscriber board (CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL) (with the silk-screen of “A32”) consists of two parts: subscriber line interface and control part. It can provide the BORSCHT function, as well as 32 subscriber ports.

The differences between CC0HASL, CC0NASL and CC0RASL are:

Only the 16th and 17th ports of the CC0HASL board provide the reversal polarity.


3-65

All 32 ports of the CC0NASL and CC0RASL board provide the reversal polarity. The feed current of the CC0NASL board is different from the CC0RASL board.

The following description will take the CC0HASL board as the example.

Note:

The meanings of BORSCHT are listed below. B: Battery O: Overvoltage and overcurrent protection R: Ringing S: Supervision C: Codec H: Hybrid T: Test

3.11.2 Front Panel

There are two indicators on the front panel of the CC0HASL board: RUN and BSY. Table 3-44 shows their meanings.

Table 3-44 Front panel description of the CC0HASL board



ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the board is normal.Blinking quickly or OFF: the board is abnormal.Constantly ON: the protection unit of the board is fused, or the 48V power supply fails to work.

BSY Green Busy/idle indicator

OFF: all ports of the board are idle.ON: at least one port of the board is busy.


Figure 3-38 shows the pin assignment between the CC0HASL board and backplane. (It’s the rear view of the backplane).


3-66

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

2627

28

2930

3132

1

2

34

5

67

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

a ba

b

a

b

a b

1st to 16th rows of pins of upper HEADER 17th to 32th rows of pins of lower HEADER

Figure 3-38 Pin assignment between the CC0HASL board and the backplane

Note:

Numbers in Figure 3-38 are the subscriber numbers.

3.12 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CC09ASL)

3.12.1 Overview

The analog subscriber board (CC09ASL) (with the silk-screen “ASL”) provides 16 analog subscriber ports, implements the BORSCHT functions. According to the requirements, the board can provide different functions, including common subscribers, pre-paid service, remote subscriber, full polarity reversal and pulse.

3.12.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the CC09ASL board, as described in Table 3-45.


3-67

Table 3-45 Front panel description of the CC09ASL board

Indicator Color Explanation Meanings

RUN Red Running indicator ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the board works normally. Blinks quickly or OFF: the board works abnormally.


Figure 3-39 show the pin assignment between the CC09ASL board and backplane.

The first eight channels of subscriber signals are subject to the 1st to the 8th rows of pins on the upper HEADER.

The last eight channels of subscriber signals are subject to the 25th to the 32nd rows of pins on the lower HEADER.

1st to 8th rows of pins on the upper HEADER

25th to 32nd rows of pinson the upper HEADER



Figure 3-39 Pin assignment between the CC09ASL board and backplane

3.13 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CC0KASL/CC0MASL)

3.13.1 Overview

The CC0KASL/CC0MASL board (with the silk-screen of ASL) provides 16 analog subscriber ports, implements the BORSCHT function of analog subscriber circuit and adjusts the interface impedance and level through software. Decoding/encoding of A/µ-law can be selected freely without any change to the hardware.


3-68

The differences between the CC0MASL and CC0KASL are:

All 16 ports of the CC0MASL provide the reversal polarity. Only 8th and 9th of the CC0KASL provide the reversal polarity.

Note:

CC0KASL has two types of finished boards: C0KASL0 and CC0KASL1. Besides all functions of the CCOKASL0 board, the CC0KASL1 board has additional commands for multiple types of impedance, multiple ringing modes, configurable ringing and stopping howler tone. The following CC0KASL board indicates these two finished boards.

3.13.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the CC0KASL board, as described in Table 3-46.

Table 3-46 Front panel description of the CC0KASL board

Indicator name Color Description Meaning Normal status


OFF for 0.5 seconds and ON for 0.5 seconds: the board is being started. OFF for one second and ON for one second: the board is working normally. Constantly ON: the power supply BAT is powered off.

OFF for one second and ON for one second.


The pin assignment between the CC0KASL board and backplane is the same as that for the CC09ASL board.

3.14 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CB36ASL/CB37ASL)

3.14.1 Overview

The CB36ASL/CB37ASL board (with the silk-screen of ASL) can implement the BORSCHT functions for 16 pairs of analog subscriber lines. Besides, it has the following functions:

Interface impedance, interface level and battery feeding mode (constant-voltage battery feeding or constant-current battery feeding) can be adjusted by the software.


3-69

All its 16 subscriber ports can provide the reversed polarity.

The only difference between the CB36ASL and CB37ASL boards is: the former can provide the 16/12KC charging signal.

Note:

The CB37ASL has two types: CB37ASL0 and CB37ASL1. The CB37ASL1 has the remote power supply function.

3.14.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the CB36ASL board, as described in Table 3-47.

Table 3-47 Front panel description of the CB36ASL board



OFF for 0.5 seconds and ON for 0.5 seconds: the board is being started. OFF for one second and ON for one second: the board is working normally. Constantly ON: the power supply BAT is powered off.

OFF for one second and ON for one second.


The pin assignment between the CB36ASL board and backplane is the same as that for the CC09ASL board.

3.15 16-port ADSL Board (POTS Splitter Inside) (H601ADLA)

3.15.1 Overview

The H601ADLA board provides 16 G.DMT/G.Lite ADSL interfaces and 16 PSTN interfaces. The ADSL splitter in the board can

Separate the POTS signal on subscriber line from the ADSL signal. Send the POTS signal to the ASL board for processing. Send the ADSL signal to corresponding modules for processing.

In converse, the POTS and ADSL signals are sent to external subscriber line after synthesization through the splitter.


3-70

3.15.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601ADLA board, as described in Table 3-48.

Table 3-48 Front panel description of the H601ADLA board



ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds: the board is just powered on. ON for one second and OFF for one second: the board is working normally.


S5: open, the board software is loaded for upgrading.

Jumper: open by default. Make it short circuited before loading the software, and restore it after the loading.


See Figure 3-40 for the pin assignment between the H601ADLA board and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND

GND GND

A B CA0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7

B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

A8B8A9B9A10B10A11B11A12B12A13B13A14B14A15B15

-48V1-48V1BGNDBGND

+5V1

-5V1-5V1+5V1

GNDGND

-48V1-48V1BGNDBGND

+5V1

-5V1-5V1+5V1

GNDGND

GND

Figure 3-40 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ADLA board


3-71

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

+5VII+5VII

-5V II-5V II

A B CGND

DGND

+5V II

-48VII-48VII

PGNDPGND

GND

+5VII+5VII

-5VII-5VII

GND

DGND

+5VII

-48VII-48VII

PGNDPGND

POTS8+POTS9+POTS10+POTS11+POTS12+POTS13+POTS14+POTS15+

POTS0+POTS0-POTS1+POTS1-POTS2+POTS2-POTS3+POTS3-POTS4+POTS4-POTS5+POTS5-POTS6+POTS6-POTS7+POTS7-

POTS8-POTS9-POTS10-POTS11-POTS12-POTS13-POTS14-POTS15-

Figure 3-41 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ADLA board

The cable design of the H601ADLA board is the same as that of the CC0HASL board. 16 pairs of subscriber lines are connected to pins rows 1–16 on the upper HEADER, and 16 POTS interface cables are connected to pin rows 25–32 on the lower HEADER. Numbers in the above figure refer to the serial numbers of users.

3.16 16-port ADSL2+ Subscriber Board (H602ADMB)

3.16.1 Overview

The H602ADMB board transmits broadband services to the control board through the Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS) interface, and the control board provides the ATM or IP upstream broadband service interfaces. The H602ADMA board has no relay, and cannot test the internal and external subscriber lines. The H602ADMA board is installed in the UA5000 subscriber frame.

The H602ADMB board is embedded with the splitter (the resistance impedance is 600Ω). It splits the POTS signal from the ADSL signal in the subscriber line, sends the POTS signal to the ASL board for processing, and sends the ADSL to corresponding module for processing. In converse, the POTS and ADSL signals are sent to external subscriber line after reassembled through the splitter.


3-72

3.16.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601ADMB board, as described in Table 3-49.

Table 3-49 Front panel description of the H601ADMB board





The H602ADMB board has no DIP switches or jumpers.


See Figure 3-42 and Figure 3-43 for the pin assignment between the H601ADMB board and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND

GND GND


B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7


-48V1-48V1BGNDBGND

+5V1

-5V1-5V1+5V1

GNDGND

-48V1-48V1BGNDBGND

+5V1

-5V1-5V1+5V1

GNDGND

GND

Figure 3-42 Definition of upper HEADER pin of the ADMB board


3-73

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

+5VII+5VII

-5VII-5VII

A B CGND

DGND

+5VII

-48VII-48VII

PGNDPGND

GND

+5VII+5VII

-5VII-5VII

GND

DGND

+5VII

-48VII-48VII

PGNDPGND




Figure 3-43 Definition of lower HEADER pin of the ADMB board

Among them:

A0(B0)-A15(B15) connect with port signal cables 0–15 of ADSL subscribers. POTS0-POTS15 connect with ports signal cables 0–15 of PSTN subscribers.

3.17 16-port ADSL2+ Subscriber Board (H602ADMC)

3.17.1 Overview

The H602ADMC transmits broadband services to the control board through the Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS) interface, and the control board provides the ATM or IP upstream broadband service interfaces. The H602ADMC board has the relay, and can test the internal and external subscriber line. The H602ADMC board is installed in the UA5000 subscriber frame.

The H602ADMC board is embedded with the splitter (the resistance impedance is 600Ω). It splits the POTS signal from the ADSL signal in the subscriber line, sends the POTS signal to the ASL board for processing, and sends the ADSL to corresponding module for processing. In converse, the POTS and ADSL signals are sent to external subscriber line after reassembled through the splitter.

3.17.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601ADMC board, as described in Table 3-49.


3-74

Table 3-50 Front panel description of the H601ADMC board





The H602ADMC board has no DIP switches or jumpers.


See Figure 3-42 and Figure 3-43 for the pin assignment between the H601ADMC board and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND

GND GND


B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7


-48V1-48V1BGNDBGND

+5V1

-5V1-5V1+5V1

GNDGND

-48V1-48V1BGNDBGND

+5V1

-5V1-5V1+5V1

GNDGND

GND

Figure 3-44 Definition of upper HEADER pin of the ADMC board


3-75

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

1

32

456789

10111213141516

18

20

22

24

17

19

21

23

2526272829303132

+5VII+5VII

-5VII-5VII

A B CGND

DGND

+5VII

-48VII-48VII

PGNDPGND

GND

+5VII+5VII

-5VII-5VII

GND

DGND

+5VII

-48VII-48VII

PGNDPGND




Figure 3-45 Definition of lower HEADER pin of the ADMC board

Among them:

A0(B0)-A15(B15) connect with port signal cables 0–15 of ADSL subscribers. POTS0-POTS15 connect with ports signal cables 0–15 of PSTN subscribers.

3.18 Subscriber Board Combining POTS and ADSL (H601CSLA)

3.18.1 Overview

The H601CSLA board integrates the POTS with ADSL interfaces.

The ADSL interface supports the G.DMT/G.Lite standard, and integrates a splitter. The POTS interface supports the full reserved polarity of 16 channels, like the ASL

board.

The H601CSLA board can provide 16 ADSL interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces. The ADSL and POTS interfaces are controlled respectively by two control units; therefore, they won’t affect each other on service and management.

3.18.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601CSLA board, as described in Table 3-51.


3-76

Table 3-51 Front panel description of the H601CSLA board

Name Color Meaning Status Description

ON for one second and OFF for one second The board works normally.

ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds The board is being powered on.

Constantly ON The –48 V power supply of the POTS module is abnormal (no feedback or extra low voltage.)

Blinking at the rate of 2 Hz (ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds) for 8 seconds continuous ON for several seconds blinking at the rate of 2 Hz (ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds) for 8 seconds, and so on.

The POTS service is abnormal. The control unit of POTS access module is reset repeatedly.


Blinking at the rate of 2 Hz (ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds) for more than 8 seconds

The POTS service is normal, and the ADSL access module works abnormally.

Note:

Indicators on the H601CSLA board mainly indicate the narrowband service status, they can not indicate the broadband service status normally in case of narrowband functions failure. Therefore, the broadband service status should be queried at the maintenance terminals.


Refer to Table 3-52 for the jumper settings of the H601CSLA board.

Table 3-52 Jumper settings of the H601CSLA board

Jumper Status Meaning Description

S1, S4 Open For the upgrade loading of board software of the POTS access module

It is open by default. Make it short circuited with the short-circuiter before software loading, and recover it after the loading.

S5, S6 Open For the upgrade loading of board software of the ADSL access module

It is open by default. It is used as above.


3-77

Note:

Jumpers have been set correctly in the normal delivery of equipment. Do not set them before you know the correct setting methods so as to avoid software loss or board damage.


See Figure 3-46 for the pin assignment between the H601CSLA board and backplane. (It is the rear view of the backplane.)

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

a b

a b

17th to 32th row pins of the lower HEADER1st to 16th row pins of the upper HEADER

Figure 3-46 Pin assignment between the H601CSLA and backplane

It has the same cable design as the CC09ASL board. The former 8 channels of subscriber lines are connected to pin rows 1–8 of the upper HEADER, and the latter 8 channels of subscriber lines are connected to pin rows 25–32 of the lower HEADER.

3.19 16-port VDSL board (H601VDLA)

3.19.1 Overview

The H601VDLA board consists of the H601V16A backplane and H601L2EA subboard, providing 16 VDSL subscriber interfaces. The H601VDLA board can be installed in the slot of any service board of the UA5000 frame.

3.19.2 Front panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601VDLA board, as described in Table 3-53.


3-78

Table 3-53 Front panel description of the H601VDLA board



ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds periodically: the board is just powered on. ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the board is working normally.


There is no DIP switch or jumper on the board.


See Figure 3-47 and Figure 3-48 for the pin assignment between the H601VDLA board and backplane. (It is the rear view of the backplane.)

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

787980818283848586878889

90919293949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

464748495051525354555657

58596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND

-48V-48V

-48V-48V

GNDGND

GND

GNDGND

GND

LINE0+LINE1+LINE2+LINE3+LINE4+LINE5+LINE6+LINE7+

LINE0-LINE1-LINE2-LINE3-LINE4-LINE5-LINE6-LINE7-

GND

LINE8+LINE8-LINE9+LINE9-LINE10+LINE10-LINE11+LINE11-LINE12+LINE12-LINE13+LINE13-LINE14+LINE14-LINE15+LINE15-

Figure 3-47 Definition of upper HEADER on the H601VDLA board


3-79

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687888990919293949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

PGNDPGND

POTS0+POTS0-

GND

GND

GNDGND

PGNDPGND

GND

GND

GNDGND



POTS1+POTS1-POTS2+POTS2-POTS3+POTS3-POTS4+POTS4-POTS5+POTS5-POTS6+POTS6-POTS7+POTS7-

Figure 3-48 Definition of lower HEADER on the H601VDLA board


LINE0(+ -)–LINE15(+ -): the 1st–16th VDSL subscriber of the board POTS0(+ -)–POTS15(+ -): the 1st–16th POTS subscriber of the board GND: ground PGND: protection ground

Note:

The cable of VDLA board is same as that of A32 board.

3.20 2/4-Wire E&M Interface Board (H601ATIA/H301ATI)

3.20.1 Overview

The H601ATIA board provides six 2/4-wire E&M interfaces. It is slot compatible with service boards.


3-80

Note:

The only difference between the H301ATI and H601ATIA boards is: the H301ATI board can be used only in the frames without broadband bus, such as the PV8-10 control frame; while the H601ATIA board can be used in the frame containing broadband bus, such as UAM frame and UAFM frame. The following takes the H601ATIA board as an example.

The H601ATIA board connects to the opposite H601ATIA board through the semi-permanent connection, as follows.

1) The H601ATIA board detects the E and M signaling. 2) If the signaling is changed, the occupied channel will send it to the opposite end

through special coding. 3) The opposite H601ATIA board monitors the received signaling codes. 4) The opposite H601ATIA board controls the corresponding interface to send out

relative signals.

In this way, the H601ATIA board achieves the transparent transmission of the signaling and service.

Each port of the H301ATI board can provide the 2/4-wire voice frequency line and 1E1M signaling line, instead of 2E2M signaling line. When E and M lines are not used, the 2/4 voice frequency line can be used independently to carry voice frequency signals.

The voice frequency interface level of the H601ATIA board can be adjusted through the software. The settings of 2/4-wire voice frequency line can be done through software configuration and hardware jumper.

3.20.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-49 shows the front panel of the H601ATIA board.


3-81

Figure 3-49 Front panel of the H601ATIA board

Table 3-54 describes the front panel of the H601ATIA board.

Table 3-54 Front panel description of the H601ATIA board



ON for one second and OFF for one second: the board is normal. ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds: the board fails to communicate with the host.

CH1-6 Green Indicator of channel occupation

Blinks: the channel is being connected.Constantly ON: the channel is already connected and can be used for conversation, or is in conversation.

EM2 Green Indicator of EM2 trunk interface

EM2 and EM4 are ON simultaneously: the host hasn't sent the configuration command to the H601ATIA board. Only EM2 is ON among EM2, EM4 and AT2: the board is configured as an EM2 trunk interface.


3-82


EM4 Green Indicator of EM4 trunk interface

Reserved.

AT2 Red Indicator of AT2 trunk interface Reserved.


Figure 3-50 shows the layout of H601ATIA board.

ON ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

SW14SW13SW12

SW8SW7SW6

1

2

3

4

ON

SW1

1 2

ON

SW2

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

SW9SW10SW11

ON ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

SW3SW4SW5JP12

JP13 JP11

JP10

JP14

JP9

JP8

JP7

JP6

JP5

SS1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8JP17

JP16

JP15

JP18

JP19

JP4

H601ATIA

Figure 3-50 Layout of the H601ATIA board

Table 3-55 describes the settings of DIP switch SW1 of the H601ATIA board.

Table 3-55 Settings of DIP switch SW1

Status Switch


SW1-1 The WATCHDOG circuit does not work. WATCHDOG circuit works. OFF

SW1-2 Voice frequency lines A and B are for input.

Voice frequency lines A, B, C and D are for input. OFF


3-83

Table 3-56 describes the settings of DIP switch SW2 of the H601ATIA board.


State DIP switch

ON OFF

SW2 SPROM loads FPGA. CPU loads FPGA.

Note: You are required to set DIP switch SW2 of the ATI board in OFF state.

Table 3-57 describes the settings of DIP switches SW3-SW14 of the H601ATIA board.

Table 3-57 Settings of DIP switches SW3-SW14

DIP switch Function Meaning Factory setting

SW3-SW8 Select the trunk mode of 1-6 channel interfaces

Bit 2 and Bit 5 are set to ON, and others are OFF: the corresponding interfaces are used by EM2.

SW9-SW14 Select the voice frequency input mode of 1-6 channel interfaces

When voice frequency lines A and B are for input: Bit 1 and Bit 4 are set to ON, and Bit 2 and Bit 3 are OFF. When voice frequency lines A, B, C and D are for input: Bit 1 and Bit 4 are set to OFF, and Bit 2 and Bit 3 are ON.

Bit 1 and Bit 4 are set to OFF. Bit 2 and Bit 3 are ON.

DIP switch SS1 is used to reset the H601ATIA board.


Figure 3-51 and Figure 3-52 show the pin assignment between the H601ATIA board and backplane.


3-84

Figure 3-51 Definition of upper HEADER on the ATI board

Figure 3-52 Definition of lower HEADER on the ATI board

Figure 3-52 lists the meanings of the signal cables.


3-85

Table 3-58 Meanings of signal cables of the H60ATIA components

Signal Cable Meaning

G1A–G6A 1–6 ports of Cable A

G1B–G6B 1–6 ports of Cable B

G1C–G6C 1–6 ports of Cable C

G1D–G6D 1–6 ports of Cable D

G1E1–G6E1 1–6 ports of E1 cable

G1E2–G6E2 1–6 ports of E2 cable

G1M1–G6M1 1–6 ports of M1 cable

G1M2–G6M2 1–6 ports of M2 cable

Note:

The ATIA dedicated cable should be configured.

3.21 Direct Dial-in Subscriber Interface Board (H301CDI/H601CDIA)

3.21.1 Overview

As the 16-port direct dial-in subscriber interface board, the H301CDI board can realize the transparent transmission of analog subscriber port. It is slot compatible with the service board, adopting the same cables with the 16-port ASL board.

The H301CDI board can extend transparently the external analog subscriber port through the HONET system by digital-analog conversion, transparent transmission and host signaling processing between the CDI and ADSL port.

As a foreign exchange office (FXO) interface, the H301CDI board can be used together with the foreign exchange subscriber (FXS) interface to realize the analog access from AN POTS subscribers to the LE. The ASL board provides the FXS interface.

Note:

The difference between the H301CDI and H601CDIA board lies in the front panel.


3-86

3.21.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-53 shows the front panel of the H301CDI board.

Figure 3-53 Front panel of the H301CDI board

Table 3-59 describes the front panel of the H301CDI board.

Table 3-59 Front panel description of the H301CDI board

Indicator Color Meaning Description


ON for one second and OFF for one second: the board is normal. ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds: the board fails to communicate with the host.Blinking at the rate of 5 Hz for three seconds: the board self-check fails.


3-87


CH0-15 Green Channel monitoring indicator

ON: the corresponding channel is occupied.


Figure 3-54 and Figure 3-55 show the pin assignment between the H301CDI board and backplane.

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

787980818283848586878889

90919293949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

464748495051525354555657

58596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND

-5V-5V

GNDGND

GND

GNDGND

GND

R0R1R2R3R4R5R6R7

T0T1T2T3T4T5T6T7

+5V+5V

-5V-5V+5V+5V

Figure 3-54 Definition of upper HEADER on the CDI board


3-88

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687888990919293949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

PGNDPGND

GND

GND

PGNDPGND

GND

GND

GNDGND

R8

-5V-5V

+5V+5V

+5V

GNDGND-5V-5V

+5V+5V

+5V

R9R10R11R12R13R14R15

T8T9T10T11T12T13T14T15

Figure 3-55 Definition of lower HEADER on the CDI board

3.22 Digital Subscriber Board (CB02DSL/CB03DSL)

3.22.1 Overview

The CB02DSL/CB03DSL board, a digital subscriber board, provides eight ISDN BRA (2B+D) interfaces. The CB02DSL board can not supply the power remotely while the CB03DSL can. The digital subscriber board is slot compatible with the analogue subscriber board.

Each CB02DSL/CB03DSL board has eight subscriber ports. The board provides:

standard ISDN BRA services TA128 semi-permanent connection mode MTA access mode U-interface transparent transmission access mode.

The 8 U interfaces in the CB02DSL/CB03DSL board can be configured to different working modes).

The CB03DSL board can provide the power supply to subscriber terminals. It controls the DC power supply of eight ports through the remote power control circuit. The provision of power supply can be set by ports through the data configuration at the background. The power supply circuit has the functions of overcurrent detection and


3-89

automatic protection. The automatic recovery of power supply can be implemented through the software control.

3.22.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-56 shows the front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL board.

DSL

RUN

COM

L0

L1

L4

L7

L2L3

L5

L6

Figure 3-56 Front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL board

Table 3-60 describes the front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL board.

Table 3-60 Front panel description of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL board


RUN Red Operation status

ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the board works normally. ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds periodically: the board is requesting the configuration information to the control board.ON/OFF: the board works abnormally.


3-90


L0-7 Green Port active indicators: indicates respectively the activation status of the 8 ports

ON: activated. OFF: deactivated. ON for 0.625 seconds and OFF for 0.625 seconds periodically: activating the U port. ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds periodically: activating the S/T port.

COM Red Serial port communication indicator

The status of the indicator changes once every 160 times of active and standby boards communication (one second in general).


The CB02DSL/CB03DSL board provides eight 2B+D interfaces, which are located on the first eight rows of pins (A1/B1–A8/B8) in the upper HEADER. See Figure 3-57.

Numerals 0–7 indicate subscriber signals 1–8. LA and LB indicate A-wire and B-wire of the 2B+D port respectively.

Figure 3-57 Pin assignment between the DSL board and the backplane (upper HEADER)


3-91

3.23 High Speed Subscriber Board (H302HSL)

3.23.1 Overview

The H302HSL board is the synchronous high-speed line interface board. It provides two V.35 ports and two E1 ports in the rate of N × 64kbit/s (1≤N≤31).

When the internal HW resources are occupied, the maximum available rate of the V.35 port is 25 x 64 kbit/s.

When the E1 port resources are occupied, the maximum available rate of the V.35 port is 31 × 64 kbit/s.

The E1 port on the board can be connected with the remote data service unit to:

Access the remote N x 64 kbit/s data service, or Serve as the trunk channel to carry N × 64 kbit/s data service.

When the E1 port is used for trunking, the N x 64kbit/s data will be transmitted through E1 port, without occupying the HW resources.

The board can lock the phase of different clock sources, including the clock provided by ST-BUS in the subscriber frame or the clock extracted from the E1 port.

The H302HSL board has the digital cross-connection function, with the exchange capability of 6HW timeslots.

Note:

The H302HSL works in data connection equipment (DCE) mode. When the DTE is required, the DCE-DTE conversion connector will convert the DCE to DTE (the HSL board still works in DCE mode).

3.23.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-58 shows the front panel of the H302HSL board.


3-92

Figure 3-58 Front panel of the H302HSL board

Table 3-61 describes the front panel of the H302HSL board.

Table 3-61 Front description of the H302HSL board



ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds periodically: board power-on, self-test. ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the board self-test is passed.

ON for one second and OFF for one second.

RXD0-1 Green Data receiving indicators of V.35 interfaces 1 and 2

ON: V.35 interface is receiving data. OFF: V.35 interface is not receiving data.

ON/OFF


3-93


TXD0-1 Green Data sending indicators of V.35 interfaces 1 and 2

ON: V.35 interface is sending data. OFF: V.35 interface is not sending data.

ON/OFF

LFA0-1 Green

Frame out-of-sync. indicators of FE1 interfaces 1 and 2

ON: Frame out-of-sync. OFF: normal.

OFF

LOS0-1 Green Signal loss indicators of FE1 interfaces 1 and 2

ON: Loss of signal. OFF: normal.

OFF

LINK Green Indicator of FE1 signal

ON: A signal exists over any FE1 on the board. ON/OFF


Figure 3-59 shows the layout of the H302HSL board.

H302HSL

S1

1 2 3 4

ON

Sw4

1 2 3 4

ON

Sw1

1 2 3 4

ON

Sw5

1 2 3 4

ON

Sw2

1 2 3 4

ON

Sw3

1 2 3JP1JP2

JP3

Figure 3-59 Layout of the H302HSL board

Table 3-62 describes the settings of DIP switches on the H302HSL board.


3-94

Table 3-62 Settings of DIP switches and jumpers on the H302HSL board

DIP switch/ Jumper Function Meanings Default setting

SW4

Switch for selecting the working mode of the first V.35 interface.

SW4-1 and SW4-2 are ON, SW4-3 and SW4-4 are OFF: the first V.35 interface works in the DCE mode.

SW5-1 and SW5-2 are ON. SW5-3 and SW5-4 are OFF.

SW5

Switch for selecting the working mode of the second V.35 interface.

SW5-1 and SW5-2 are ON, SW5-3 and SW5-4 are OFF: the second V.35 interface works in the DCE mode.

SW5-1 and SW5-2 are ON. SW5-3 and SW5-4 are OFF.

SW1, SW3 Switch for setting the impedance of the first FE1 interface

SW1-1, SW1-2 and SW3-1 are ON: the first FE1 interface uses the 75-ohm matching impedance. SW1-1, SW1-2 and SW1-3 are OFF: the second FE1 interface uses the 120-ohm matching impedance. SW1-3 is ON: Receiving ring connects to PGND. SW1-4 is ON: Sending ring connects to PGND.

SW1-1 and SW1-2 are ON. SW1-3 and SW1-4 are OFF. SW3-1 is ON.

SW2, SW3 Switch for setting the impedance of the second FE1 interface

SW2-1, SW2-2 and SW3-2 are ON: the second FE1 interface uses the 75-ohm matching impedance. SW2-1 and SW2-2 and SW3-2 are OFF: the second FE1 interface uses the 120-ohm matching impedance. SW2-3 is ON: Receiving ring connects to PGND. SW2-4 is ON: Sending ring connects to PGND.

SW2-1, SW2-2 and SW3-2 are ON. SW2-3 and SW2-4 are OFF.

JP1–JP3 Set for determining the logic loading mode

JP1 short connects JP2: Load through PROM. JP2 short connects JP3: Load through CPU.

JP2 and JP3 are short circuited.


Pin rows 1–8 in the upper HEADER: for the first V.35 port and the first E1 port. E1 port is at pin rows 7 and 8.

Pin rows 25–32 in the lower HEADER: for the second V.35 port and the second E1 port. E1 port is at pin rows 31 and 32.


3-95

3.24 High Speed Subscriber Board (H303HSL)

3.24.1 Overview

By adopting the SHDSL technique, the H303HSL board can access the Nx64kbit/s (3≤N) and E1 services from a long transmission distance.

Compatible with the high layer protocol of H302HSL, H303HSL can be applied directly in the environment for H302HSL.

The H303HSL board provides two E1 interfaces and two SHDSL interfaces. After the modem conversion, the two SHDSL interfaces can change to two V.35 interfaces (N x 64 kbit/s, 3ñNñ31) or two E1 (2048 kbit/s) interfaces.

The H303ASL board has the following two functions.

I. User service data transmission through SPC

1) Inter-board SPC

After the inter-board SPC is established, the user data borne at the SHDSL port can be transmitted to RSP or PV8 frame over HW, and then transmitted over E1 channels. In this case, the maximum available transmission rate at the SHDSL port is 26x64kbit/s (for the RSP frame) or 28x64kbit/s (for the PV8 frame).

2) Intra-board SPC

After the intra-board SPC (between the SHDSL port and E1 port of the board) is established, the user data borne at the SHDSL port can be transmitted directly over E1 port of the board. In this case, the maximum available rate at the SHDSL port is 31 x 64 kbit/s.

II. Clock locking

The H303HSL board can lock clock signals from E1 interface or from the HW of the backplane. Therefore, the H303HSL board can work at the environment where the PSTN clock and the DDN clock are not synchronized with each other.

For the E1 access, the H303HSL board should lock the E1 clock signals.

For the HW access, the H303HSL board should lock the HW clock signals.

Moreover, the MD5500 system clock should be synchronized to the DDN clock.

3.24.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-60 shows the front panel of the H303HSL board.


3-96

Figure 3-60 Front panel of the H303HSL board

Table 3-63 describes the front panel of the H303HSL board.

Table 3-63 Front panel description of the H303HSL board



ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds: the board is powered on and is performing the self-check. ON for one second and OFF for one second: the self-check is passed.

ON for one second and OFF for one second

WAN1/ WAN2 Green SHDSL indicator

ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds: the SHDSL port is in the training status. ON: the SHDSL port is in the normal operation. OFF: the SHDSL port is deactivated.

ON

E1-1/ E1-2 Green E1 status indicator

ON: the E1 interface is in the normal operation. OFF: the E1 interface has LOS or service is interrupted. ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds: the LFA alarm occurs.

ON


3-97


RESET NA Resetting switch Used to reset the board. NA

COM NA Debugging serial port

RS-232 for local maintenance. The default setting is 96000bit/s. NA

Note: All indicators are off except the WAN1 when the software is loaded or the board software is to be run.


Figure 3-61 shows the layout of the H303HSL board.

H303HSL

1 2

3 4 ON

S7

1 2

3 4 ON

1 2

3 4 ON

S3

S4

Figure 3-61 Layout of the H303HSL board

Table 3-64 DIP switch settings of the H303HSL board

DIP switch Function Meaning Default setting

S3 Impedance setting switch for first E1 interface

If S3-1-4 are set to ON, the first E1 interface adopts the 75Ω matching impedance. If they are set to OFF, the first E1 interface adopts the 120Ω matching impedance.

S3-1-4: ON

S4 Impedance setting switch for second E1 interface

If S3-1-4 are set to ON, the second E1 interface adopts the 75Ω matching impedance. If they are set to OFF, the second E1 interface adopts the 120Ω matching impedance.

S4-1-4: ON


3-98


S7 SHDSL port working mode

If S7-1 is set to ON, the SHDSL port is set to the E1 working mode. If S7-1 is set to OFF, the SHDSL port is set to the V.35 working mode. S7-2-4: reserved by the system.

S7-1-4: ON

Note:

The activation distance varies with the working mode of the SHDSL interface. When it works in E1 mode, the maximum activation distance is 3 km. When it works in V.35 mode, the higher the transmission rate is, the shorter the activation distance is.

When N is 3, the maximum activation distance is 6km. When N is 32, the maximum transmission distance is 3km. the line quality should also be taken into consideration during the configuration.


Figure 3-62 and Figure 3-63 show the pin assignment between the H303HSL board and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

787980818283848586878889

90919293949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

464748495051525354555657

58596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND

-48V-48V

DGND

TT0RT0

BGNDBGND

TT1RT1

TR0RR0TR1RR1

+5V+5V

-48V-48V

DGND

BGNDBGND

+5V+5V

Figure 3-62 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H303HSL board


3-99

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687888990919293949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

BGNDBGND-48V-48V

+5V+5V

+5V

LINEA0LINEA1

LINEB0LINEB1

BGNDBGND-48V-48V

+5V+5V

+5V

Figure 3-63 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H303HSL

1) The H303HSL board provides 2 E1 interfaces, distributed on the 1st – 4th rows of pins (in columns A and C). The characters on the pins are shown as follows. TT0-1: the 1st to 2nd channels of E1 signal correspond to the “tip” of the

signal sent from the H303HSL. TR0-1: the 1st to 2nd channels of E1 signal correspond to the “ring” of the

signal sent from the H303HSL. RT0-1: the 1st to 2nd channels of E1 signal correspond to the “tip” of the

signal received at the H303HSL. RR0-1: the 1st to 2nd channels of E1 signal correspond to the “ring” of the

signal received at the H303HSL. 2) The H303HSL board provides 2 ports of SHDSL, distributed on the 31st – 32nd

rows of pins (in columns A and C), as shown in Figure 3-63.The characters on the pins are shown as follows. LINEA0-1: the line A of the 1st to 2nd SHDSL subscriber lines. LINEB0-1: the line B of the 1st to 2nd SHDSL subscriber lines.

3) The definitions of other HEADER connector signals are shown as follows. PGND: Protection ground. DGND: Digital ground. +5 V: +5 V power supply. -48 V: –48 V power supply.


3-100

3.24.5 Notes

1) The H303HSL board can be used in the GV5 system or work together with the MD5500 system. When being used in the GV5 system, the NMS of the GV5 can not configure the STU_R or the line attributes of SHDSL. The line attributes can be configured via the debugging serial port on the H303HSL board. In general, use the default configuration.

2) To be compatible with the H302HSL board, there are several configuration selections for V.35 interface. Among the configurations, only the port rate is effective.

3) Use Modem produced by XAVI Technologies Corporation. The followings should be noted when you configure the Modem. Set the terminal type as CPE and the SHDSL Standard as ANNEX_B. E1 Modem: Set the E1 frame structure as PCM31 and no CRC check. V.35 Modem: Set V.35 rate attribute at initial status as auto negotiation. Refer to the user guide of the Modem for detailed configuration.

4) Set the SHDSL terminal activation duration to 20-50 seconds when the SHDSL terminal is connected with that from XAVI Technologies Corporation. The duration may vary when the SHDSL terminal is connected with terminals from other manufactures.

5) The matching subscriber line of the H303HSL board is different from that of the H302HSL board. There are four AMP connectors at one end of the cable (the other end is connected to the cable distribution frame). Accordingly, one cable can be connected with four H303HSL boards. Pay attention to the colors and labels of cables connected with the AMP connectors.

3.25 SHDSL Interface Board (H521SDL)

3.25.1 Overview

The H521SDL board provides the SHDSL service access in the TDM mode. Each H521SDL board provides four E1 interfaces and four SHDSL interfaces. After the modem conversion, the four SHDSL interfaces change to V35 interfaces (N × 64 kbit/s, 3≤N≤31) or E1 interfaces (2048 kbit/s).

According to the data configuration, the H521SDL board can track the clock of different interfaces, including HW interface, trunk interface and SHDSL interface at subscriber side. The SHDSL interfaces of the H521SDL board may be configured flexibly for various applications. The SHDSL interface board can report the interface status.

3.25.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-64 shows the front panel of the H521SDL board.


3-101

SDL

RUNC

OM

WAN1

WAN2

WAN3

WAN4

E1-1

E1-2

E1-3

E1-4

RESET

Figure 3-64 Front panel of the H521SDL board

Table 3-65 describes the front panel of the H521SDL board.


3-102

Table 3-65 Indicator description of the H521SDL board



ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds periodically: the board is powered on and is performing the self-check. ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the self-check is passed.

ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically

WAN1- WAN4 Green SHDSL indicator

ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds periodically: the SHDSL interface is in the training status. Constantly on: the SHDSL interface is in the normal operation. OFF: the SHDSL interface is deactivated.

ON

E1-1- E1-4 Green E1 status indicator

Constantly ON: the E1 interface is in the normal operation. OFF: the E1 interface has LOS or service is interrupted. ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds: the LFA alarm occurs.

ON

RESET NA Resetting switch Used to reset the board. NA

COM NA Debugging serial port

RS-232 for local maintenance. The default setting is 9600 bit/s. NA

Note: All indicators are off except the WAN1 when the software is loaded or the board software is to be run.


Figure 3-65 shows the layout of the H521SDL board.


3-103

H521SDL

1 2

3 4 ON

1 2

3 4 ON

1 2

3 4 ON

1 2

3 4 ON

S3

S4

S5

S6

1 2

3 4 ON

S7

Figure 3-65 Layout of the H521SDL board

Table 3-66 Settings of DIP switches of the H521SDL board


S3 Impedance setting switch for first E1 interface

S3-1–4 are set to ON: 75Ω matching impedance. S3-1–4 are set to OFF, 120Ω matching impedance.

ON

S4 Impedance setting switch for second E1 interface

S4-1–4 are set to ON: 75Ω matching impedance. S4-1–4 are set to OFF, 120Ω matching impedance.

ON

S5 Impedance setting switch for third E1 interface

S5-1–4 are set to ON: 75Ω matching impedance. S5-1–4 are set to OFF: 120Ω matching impedance.

ON

S6 Impedance setting switch for fourth E1 interface

S5-1–4 are set to ON: 75Ω matching impedance. S5-1–4 are set to OFF: 120Ω matching impedance.

ON

S7 SHDSL interface working mode

S7-1 is set to ON: E1 mode. S7-1 is set to OFF: V.35 working mode. S7-2–4: reserved by the system.

ON


3-104

Note:

When the H521SDL works in the slave mode, only ports 0 and 2 are available, and ports 1 and 3 are unavailable. The activation distance varies with the working mode of the SHDSL interface.

When it works at E1 mode, the maximum activation distance is 3 km. When it works at V.35 mode, the activation distance is related to the transmission rate.


Figure 3-66 and Figure 3-67 show the pin assignment between the H521SDL board and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

787980818283848586878889

90919293949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

464748495051525354555657

58596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND

-48V-48V

DGND

TT0RT0

BGNDBGND

TT1RT1TT2RT2TT3RT3

TR0RR0TR1RR1TR2RR2TR3RR3

+5V+5V

-48V-48V

DGND

BGNDBGND

+5V+5V

Figure 3-66 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H521SDL board


3-105

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687888990919293949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

BGNDBGND-48V-48V

+5V+5V

+5V

LINEA0LINEA1LINEA2LINEA3

LINEB0LINEB1LINEB2LINEB3

BGNDBGND-48V-48V

+5V+5V

+5V

Figure 3-67 Signal definition of lower HEADER connector on the H521SDL board

1) The H521SDL board provides 4 E1 interfaces, distributed on the 1st–8th rows of pins (in columns A and C), as shown in Figure 3-66. The characters on the pins are shown as follows. TT0–3: the 1st to 4th channels of E1 signal correspond to the “tip” of the

signal sent from the H521SDL. TR0–3: the 1st to 4th channels of E1 signal correspond to the “ring” of the

signal sent from the H521SDL. RT0–3: the 1st to 4th channels of E1 signal correspond to the “tip” of the

signal received at the H521SDL. RR0–3: the 1st to 4th channels of E1 signal correspond to the “ring” of the

signal received at the H521SDL. 2) The H521SDL board provides 4 ports of SHDSL, distributed on the 296th – 32nd

rows of pins (in columns A and C), as shown in Figure 3-67.The characters on the pins are shown as follows. LINEA0–3: the line A of the 1st to 4th SHDSL subscriber lines. LINEB0–3: the line B of the 1st to 4th SHDSL subscriber lines.

3) The definitions of other HEADER connector signals are shown as follows. PGND: Protection ground DGND: Digital ground +5 V: +5 V power supply –48 V: –48 V power supply


3-106

Note:

There are two AMP connectors at each end of the cable (the other end is connected to the cable distribution frame). Accordingly, one cable can be connected with two H521SDL boards. Pay attention to the different colors and labels of cables connected with AMP connectors.

3.26 16-Port SHDSL Board (H601SDLA)

3.26.1 Overview

The H601SDLA board (with the silk screen of SDLA) is the SHDSL port board, provides the SHDSL service access in the ATM mode. Each board provides 16 SHDSL ports. The upstream service ports are provided by the control board. The H601SDLA board is used in the UA5000 frame.

After the SHDSL port is converted by the modem connecting with FE traffic, the SHDSL port can provide FE interface. The higher the SHDSL port rate, the shorter the transmission distance is:

If N is 3, the maximum activation distance is 6 km. If N is 32, the maximum activation distance is 3 km.

However, reduce the above maximum activation distances due to the line quality.

3.26.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601SDLA board, as described in Table 3-67.

Table 3-67 Indicator description of the H601SDLA board



ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds: the board is performing self-check. ON for one second and OFF for one second: the board is running normally.


Figure 3-68 shows the pin assignment between the H601SDLA board and backplane. (It’s the rear view of the backplane).


3-107





Figure 3-68 Signal definition of connector HEADER on the H601SDLA board

The cable design is the same as that of the CC09ASL board. The former eight subscriber lines are connected to the 1st–8th of the upper HEADER, while the latter 8 subscriber lines are connected to the 25th–32nd of the lower HEADER.

3.27 Voice Frequency Interface Board (CB02VFB)

3.27.1 Overview

The CB02VFB board is a voice frequency interface board with sixteen 2-wire or eight 4-wire voice frequency interfaces. It is compatible with the slots of other common subscriber boards.

The board implements the conversion between the 2-wire and 4-wire signals and gain adjusting under the control of software. However, it does not provide the feeding, ringing and on-hook detection.

3.27.2 Front Panel

There is a RUN indicator in the front panel of the CB02VFB board, as described in Table 3-68.


3-108

Table 3-68 Front panel description of the CB02VFB board

Indicator Color Meaning Description Normal status

RUN Red Running status indicator

ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the board is normal. Blinking quickly or OFF: the board is abnormal.

ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically


Figure 3-69 shows the layout of the CB02VFB board.

ONS091

ONS071

ONS031

ONS151

ONS131

ONS011

ONS111

ONS051

Figure 3-69 Layout of the CB02VFB board

Table 3-69 describes the settings of DIP switches of the CB02VFB board.

Table 3-69 Settings of DIP switches of the CB02VFB board

DIP switch Controlled port ON OFF Factory

setting

S011-1 1 Select 600Ω impedance. Select 1650Ω impedance. ON





3-109

DIP switch Controlled port ON OFF Factory

setting














The CB02VFB provides 16 common audio interfaces.

The first eight interfaces are located on pin rows 1st–8th in the upper HEADER. See Figure 3-70.

The last eight interfaces are located on pin rows 25th–32nd in the lower HEADER. See Figure 3-71.


3-110

Figure 3-70 Pin assignment between the CB02VFB and the backplane (upper HEADER)

Figure 3-71 Pin assignment between the CB02VFB and the backplane (lower HEADER)


3-111

3.28 Railway Collinear Voice Frequency Interface Board (CB03VFB)

3.28.1 Overview

The railway collinear voice frequency interface board (CB03VFB) is developed specially for the railway market. It provides the terminal interfaces for the railway collinear dispatch system and the common 2/4-wire audio frequency interfaces. The board is slot compatible with subscriber board, and uses the same cables as the 32-port subscriber board.

The CB03VFB board implements the 2/4-wire conversion, gain adjustment. However, it has not the functions of feedback, ringing and hang-on/off check.

3.28.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the CB03VFB board, as described in Table 3-70.


Indicator Color Meaning Description Normal status

RUN Red Running indicator: used to indicate the working status of the board

ON for one second and OFF for one second: the board is normal. Blinks quickly or OFF: the board is abnormal.

ON for one second and OFF for one second


Figure 3-72 shows the layout of the CB03VFB board.


3-112

ONSW0

ONSW1

Figure 3-72 Layout of the CB03VFB board

Table 3-71 describes the settings of DIP switch of the CB03VFB board.

Table 3-71 Settings of DIP switches of the CB03VFB board

DIP switch Function ON OFF Factory setting

SW0 For backplane setting

Corresponding to the backplanes of HFB, HGB and HIB. When it is set to ON, the upper eight ports support the switchover between new and old systems.

Corresponding to the backplanes of HFB, HGB and HIB. When it is set to OFF, the upper from five to eight ports don’t support the switchover between new and old systems.

OFF

SW1 For backplane setting

Corresponding to the backplanes of HFB, HGB and HIB. When it is set to ON, the lower eight ports support the switchover between new and old systems.

Corresponding to the backplanes of HFB, HGB and HIB. When it is set to OFF, the lower from five to eight ports don’t support the switchover between new and old systems.

OFF


3-113

Note:

CB03VFB can be applied in the PV8 or RSP frame, instead of the UA5000 frame.


The interfaces of the CB03VFB are distributed as follows.

The first eight interfaces are located on pin rows 1st–8th in the upper HEADER. They are dedicated to the railway collinear telephone system, and cannot connect with common audio frequency Modem. See Figure 3-70.

The last eight interfaces are located on pin rows 25th–32nd rows of pins in the lower HEADER. They are common audio interfaces that provide audio services. See Figure 3-71.

3.29 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H301HWC)

3.29.1 Overview

Installed in the UA5000 Master (UAM) and PV8-10 frames, the H301HWC board implements the level conversion of HW signal and clock signal.

The H301HWC board provides 32 differential HWs. So, both the UAM frame and PV8-10 control frames can support multiple RSP-14 subscriber frames.

The UAM frame can be cascaded with both the UAS and RSP-14 subscriber frames, while the PV8-10 control frame can only be cascaded with the RSP-14 subscriber frame.

3.29.2 Front Panel

There is only one red indicator for power supply (PWR) in the front panel of the H301HWC board, as described in Table 3-72.



PWR Red Power supply indicator

ON: the power supply of the board is normal.OFF: the power supply of the board is abnormal.


The differential HW interface of the H301HWC lie in pin rows 1–64. See Figure 3-73.


3-114

I1DUHW0-UHW1-

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

DHW0-DHW1-

I1C12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

I1B12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

UHW4-UHW4-DHW5-DHW5-



UHW0+UHW1+DHW0+DHW1+




UHW2+UHW3+DHW2+DHW3+UHW2-UHW3-DHW2-DHW3-UHW6+UHW7+DHW6+DHW7+UHW6-UHW7-DHW6-DHW7-

UHW10+UHW11+DHW10+DHW11+UHW10-UHW11-DHW10-DHW11-


I1DUHW16-UHW17-

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061526364

DHW16-DHW17-

I1C I1B








3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061526364

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061526364

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061526364





Figure 3-73 Pin definition of the H301HWC


3-115

3.30 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H601HWCA)

3.30.1 Overview

Installed in the UAFM frame, the H601HWCA board implements the level conversion of HW signal and clock signal.

The H601HWCA board can provide 16 differential HWs. When two boards are configured, they can provide 32 differential HWs. So, the UAFM frame can be cascaded with up to four UAFS frames.

3.30.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-74 shows the front panel of the H601HWCA board.

Figure 3-74 Front panel of the H601HWCA board

There is only one DB100 connector in the front panel of the H601HWCA board.

3.31 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H301HWT)

3.31.1 Overview

Installed in the PV8-19 control frames, the H301HWT board implements the differential level conversion of HW signal.

The H301HWT board can provide 32 differential HWs. So, the PV8-19 control frame can support multiple RSP subscriber frames.


3-116

Note:

The H301HWT board can only be used in the PV8-19 control frames for their upgrade and expansion. It must be used together with the H302PV8/H302PV4 board.

The H301HWT is a small subboard at the back of the backplane. It occupies three slots, two of which are slots of the PV8/4 control board and one is the subscriber slot left to the control board (front view of the frame). Therefore, when the H301HWT board is used, this subscriber slot will not be available for other boards.

3.31.2 External Interfaces

The description of the HEADER interfaces on the backplane is as follows.

I. Left and right PV8 slots of H301HWT board

Pin rows 17th–24th and 25th–32nd on the upper HEADER at the PV8Lslot (corresponding to the left PV8 board) are connected respectively to the 1st–8th E1 interfaces of the left PV8 board.

Pin rows 17th–24th and 25th–32nd on the upper HEADER at the PV8R slot (corresponding to the right PV8 board) are connected respectively to the 1st–8th E1 interfaces of the right PV8 board.

II. HWT slots of the H301HWT board

The following rows of pins provide eight differential cables to connect to the differential interfaces of the RSP subscriber frame:

Pin rows 1st–8th, 96th–16th, 17th–24th and 25th–32nd on the upper HEADER. Pin rows 1st–8th, 96th–16th, 17th–24th and 25th–32nd on the lower HEADER.

3.32 Environment & Power Supply Monitoring Board (H302ESC)

3.32.1 Overview

The H302ESC board is the environment and power supply monitoring board. It monitors the environment and power supply in the cabinet. The monitoring parameters are as follows.

Temperature Humidity Primary power supply Access control Cable distribution frame Under-voltage power-off of the battery


3-117

Status of the internal fans Even and floating charge of the storage battery by the primary power supply

The H302ESC board can also be connected to the environment monitoring equipment AMS-2 through serial port.

3.32.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-75 shows the front panel of the H302ESC board.

RUN

EALM

PALM

Fixing hole

Indicators

Figure 3-75 Front panel of the H302ESC

Table 3-73 describes the front panel of the H302ESC board.

Table 3-73 Indicator description of the H302ESC board


RUN Red Running indicator ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the board works normally.

EALM Red Environmental alarm indicator

OFF: environment parameter is normal. ON: alarm for the environment parameter.

PALM Red Power supply alarm indicator

OFF: power supply parameter is normal. ON: alarm in the power supply parameter.


Figure 3-76 shows the layout of the H302ESC board.


3-118

J3

J2

J1

J4

P2

J5

J6

J8

J9

J7

J10

P3

J11J14

J12

J13

J14

J15

P1S1

S3S2S5

S6H302ESC

D3D2D1

S4

Figure 3-76 Layout of the H302ESC board

Table 3-74 describes the jumper settings of the H302ESC board.

Table 3-74 Settings of jumpers of the H302ESC board

Jumper Meaning Setting before delivery

S1 1-2 connected: indicating serial port SIO1 is RS422. 2-3 connected: indicating serial port SIO1 is RS232.

2-3 connected


2-3 connected


2-3 connected

S4 1-2 connected: ESC board alarm buzzer enabled. 2-3 connected: ESC board alarm buzzer shielded.

1-2 connected

S5

1-2 connected: indicating the external intelligent power supply system is PS48100-3/20. 2-3 connected: indicating the external intelligent power supply system is PS48100.

1-2 connected

S6 Reset switch. NA

3.33 Environment & Power Monitoring Board (H303ESC)

3.33.1 Overview

The H303ESC board is the environment and power supply monitoring board. It monitors the following items.

Temperature Humidity Access control


3-119

Infrared (external sensor should be connected) Smoke sensor (external sensor should be connected) Fan

The H303ESC board communicates with the host through serial port.

The H303ESC board can connect with the following parts.

Six external analog sensors Sixteen external digital sensors Intelligent power supply equipment through serial ports Environment monitoring equipment AMS-2 through serial ports

3.33.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-77 shows the front panel of the H303ESC board.

RUN

OFF

ON

ESC Fixing hole

Buzzer switch

Indicator

Figure 3-77 Front panel of the H303ESC board

Table 3-75 describes the front panel of the H303ESC board.

Table 3-75 Indicator description of the H302ESC board


RUN Red Running indicator ON for one second and OFF for one second: Working normally. Blinks quickly: Working abnormally

Beeper switch NA Beeper switch Used to set the audio alarm.

RESET NA Manual resetting switch Used to reset the board.


3-120


Figure 3-78 shows the layout of the H303ESC board.

H303ESC

S11

D1

S9

1 2

3 4

ON

S7

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

ON

S6

S1 S2 S10

S3 S8

J2 J5

S5

Figure 3-78 Layout of the H303ESC

Table 3-76 describes the jumper setting of the H303ESC board. Table 3-77 and Table 3-78 describe the DIP switch settings of the H303ESC board.

Table 3-76 Jumper settings of the H302ESC board

Jumper Description of setting Default setting


2-3 connected


2-3 connected

S11 1-2 connected: running indicator on the board is valid. 2-3 connected: running indicator on the board is invalid.

1-2 connected

S3, S8, S10

When pins 1 and 2 of S3, S8 and S10 are connected: serial port SIO3 is RS232. When pins 2 and 3 of S3 are connected, and pins 1 and 2 of S8 and S10 are connected: serial port SIO3 is RS422. When pins 2 and 3 of S8 and S10 are connected, without consideration of S3: serial port SIO3 is RS485.

All as 1-2 connected


3-121

Table 3-77 Settings of DIP switch S6 on the H303ESC board

DIP switch Meaning Default setting

When S6-1 to S6-6 are ON: indicates that the external analog sensor is the current sensor.

When S6-1 to S6-6 are OFF: indicates that the external analog sensor is the voltage sensor.

S6

S6-7 to S6-8 are meaningless, and are reserved.

ON

Table 3-78 Settings of DIP switch S7 on the H303ESC board

Status DIP:

ON OFF Default setting

S7-1 The H303ESC board is used in the access network.

The H303ESC board is used in the switch. ON

S7-2 The H303ESC board uses one serial port for reporting.

The H303ESC board uses two serial ports for reporting. ON

S7-3 Reserved. ON

S7-4 Indicating that the reported baud rate is 19200.

Indicating that the reported baud rate is 9600. ON

3.34 Subscriber Test Board (CC08TSS)

3.34.1 Overview

The CC08TSS board is the subscriber test board of the HONET. It tests the analog subscriber interface (Z interface) and digital subscriber interface (U interface). The board provides two testing channels.

It provides interfaces and channels for AN subscriber test, implementing the following functions.

Subscriber line test Analog subscriber circuit test Analog phone test Digital subscriber circuit test Digital subscriber terminal test Alarm collection and report

Besides, The CC08TSS board provides:

Serial ports for the maintenance and board monitoring printing. Testing bus interface to connect with the subscriber line test equipment.


3-122

3.34.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-79 shows the front panel of the CC08TSS board.

Figure 3-79 Front panel of the CC08TSS board

Table 3-79 describes the front panel of the CC08TSS board.

Table 3-79 Front panel description of the CC08TSS board


RUN Red Running indicator ON: the board works normally.

FAIL Green Alarm indicator OFF: normal

+12V Green +12 V power indicator ON: +12 V power is normal.

-12V Green –12 V power indicator ON: –12 V power is normal.

+5VD Green Digital +5 V power indicator ON: digital +5 V power is normal.


3-123


+5VA Green Analog +5 V power indicator ON: analog +5 V power is normal.

HOW Green Howler tone indicator ON: Howling tone is given.

ACT Green U port activation indicator ON: the U port is activated.


Figure 3-80 shows the layout of the CC08TSS board.

J5

CC08TSS

J1

Figure 3-80 Layout of the CC08TSS board


Figure 3-81 and Figure 3-82 show the pin assignment between the CC08TSS board and backplane. (It’s the front view of the backplane.)


3-124

Figure 3-81 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the TSS board

Figure 3-82 Signal definition of lower HEADER connector on the TSS board


3-125

In the diagram:

MANR and MANL: Manual testing channel HAUTOR and HAUTOL: Semiautomatic testing channel ISLR1 and ISLT2: The first internal line testing channel IAT0A and IAT0B: AT0 internal line testing channel OSLR1 and OSLT1: The first outer line testing channel IAT0A and IAT0B: AT0 internal line testing channel TELR and TELT: analog phone interface of the subscriber line test center console RINGI: PWX ringing signal, input -48V: –48 V power supply GND: –48 V power supply ground RIO1+ to RIO16+: 16 reserved testing channels FGND: Test ground TNT1R and TNT1T: Analog phone interface of the subscriber line test center

console TDSLR and TDSLT: Local standard NT1 interfaces +5VBB: +5 V power supply GND: +5 V power supply ground IDBACI: C&C08 B or C&C08 A and C&C08 C switch judging signal (input signal) BRX1 and BTXO: C&C08 B serial port sending/receiving channel ISLR1 and ISLT2: The second internal line testing channels OSLR2 and OSLT2: The second outer line testing channels RX422+, RX422-, TX422+ and TX422-: C&C08 A or C&C08 C serial port

sending/receiving channels APOWI+: Secondary power supply alarm signal (input) A48VO+ and A48VO-: –48 V alarm signals (output) A48VO+ and A48VO-: CPU alarm signals (output) AIMPO+ and AIMPO-: Major alarm signals (output) AORDO+ and AORDO-: Normal alarm signals (output) ABLKO+ and ABLKO-: Block alarm signals (output) ATSL+ and ATSL-: TSL board alarm signals (output)

3.35 Subscriber Test Board (H601TSS)

3.35.1 Overview

The H601TSS tests the following items.

Analog subscriber circuit line/loop line Telephone set AT0 circuit line/loop line Activation/deactivation/feed of ISDN 2B+D U interface Activation capability of ISDN digital terminal Transmission error ratio


3-126

It also sends alarm information to alarm box or rack alarm indicators, and detects the secondary power alarm.

Compared to the CB01TSS, the H601TSS board adds some functions.

Communicating with the APM/IPM boards through serial port. Testing the circuit quality test (CQT) for the ADSL service and communicating with

external CQT equipment. Providing a DB-8 interface in the front panel. Connecting internal and external test bus for the emulation test at the XDSL CO

end.

3.35.2 Front Panel

TSS

RUN

+12V

FAIL

-12V

+5VD

+5VA

HOW

ACT

(1)

(1) CQT interface

Figure 3-83 Front panel of the H601TSS board

Table 3-80 describes the front panel of the H601TSS board.

Table 3-80 Front panel description of the H601TSS board


RUN Red Operation status indicator ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the board works normally. Blinking quickly: not started yet.


3-127


FAIL Green Alarm indicator ON: running abnormally. OFF: running normally.

+12V Green +12 V power indicator ON: +12 V power is normal. OFF: +12 V power is abnormal.

-12V Green –12 V power indicator ON: –12 V power is normal. OFF: –12 V power is abnormal.

+5VD Green Digital +5 V power indicator ON: digital +5 V power is normal. OFF: digital +5 V power is abnormal.

+5VA Green Analog +5 V power indicator ON: analog +5 V power is normal. OFF: analog +5V power is abnormal.

HOW Green Howler tone indicator ON: Howling tone is given. OFF: Howling tone is not given.

ACT Green U port activation indicator ON: the U port is activated. OFF: the U port is not activated.


There is no DIP switches or Jumpers on the H601TSS board.


Figure 3-84 and Figure 3-85 show the pin assignment between the CC08TSS board and backplane. (It’s the front view of the backplane.)


3-128

Figure 3-84 Pin assignment between the H601TSS board and backplane (Upper HEADER)

B-RXD B-TXD

Figure 3-85 Pin assignment between the H601TSS board and backplane (Lower HEADER)

Table 3-81 lists the meanings of the signal cables.


3-129

Table 3-81 Meanings of signal cables of the H60ATSS components

Signal Cable Definition

MANR, MANL Manual testing channel

HAUTOR, HAUTOL Semiautomatic testing channel

ISLR1, ISLT1 The first internal line testing channel

IAT0A, IAT0B AT0 internal line testing channel

OSLR1, OSLT1 The first outer line testing channel

OAT0A, OAT0B AT0 internal line testing channel

TELR, TELT analog phone interface of the subscriber line test center console

RINGI PWX ringing signal (input)

–48 V –48 V power supply

GND –48 V power supply ground

RIO1+ RIO16+ 16 reserved testing channels

FGND Test ground

TNT1R, TNT1T analog phone interface of the subscriber line test center console

TDSLR, TDSLT Local standard NT1 interfaces

+5VBB +5 V power supply

GND +5 V power supply ground

IDBACI C&C08 B or C&C08 A and C&C08 C switch judging signal (input signal)

BRXI, BTXO C&C08 B serial port sending/receiving channel

ISLR2, ISLT2 The second internal line testing channels

OSLR2, OSLT2 The second external line testing channels

RX422+, RX422-, TX422+, TX422- C&C08 A or C&C08 C serial port sending/receiving channels

APOWI+ Secondary power supply alarm signal (input)

A48VO+, A48VO- –48 V alarm signals (output)

ACPUO+, ACPUO- CPU alarm signals (output)

AIMPO+, AIMPO- Major alarm signals (output)

AORDO+, AORDO- Minor alarm signals (output)

ABLKO+, ABLKO- Block alarm signals (output)

ATSL+, ATSL- TSL board alarm signals (output)

B-RXD Broadband serial port input

B-TXD Broadband serial port output


3-130

3.36 Secondary Power Supply Board (CC03PWX)

3.36.1 Overview

The CC03PWX secondary power supply board is a universal medium-power output power board for the access network equipment. The power board can provide three types of outputs: +5 V/20 A, –5 V/5 A, and 75 V AC/0.4 A.

Usually, two CC03PWX boards are plugged in one frame. However, for mutual assistance between frames or for HIB backplane, only one board needs to be configured. Two secondary power supply boards in one frame work in the load sharing mode.

3.36.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-86 shows the front panel of the CC03PWX board.

Figure 3-86 Front panel of the CC03PWX board

Table 3-82 describes the front panel of the CC03PWX board.


3-131

Table 3-82 Front panel description of the CC03PWX board


VIN Red The current board input voltage status

ON: normal. OFF: abnormal.

ON

VA0 Green Ringing working status ON: ringing output normal. OFF: ringing output abnormal. ON

VB0 Green +5 V working status ON: +5 V output normal. OFF: +5V output abnormal. ON

VC0 Green –5 V working status ON: –5 V output normal. OFF: –5 V output abnormal. ON

FAIL Yellow Failure status Blinks (at the rate of 25 Hz): errors occur in any module in this board. OFF: no error occurs in any module in this board.

OFF

POWER S1 NA Various module control

switch in this board

ON: modules in this board works normally. OFF: no output from modules in this board.

ON

ALM S2 NA Audio/visual alarm switchover switch

ON: simultaneous audio/visual alarm occurs if fault occurs in this board. OFF: only visual alarm occurs when fault occurs in this board.

ON


Figure 3-87 shows the layout of the CC03PWX board. Table 3-83 gives the jumper settings of the CC03PWX board.


3-132

S2

S1

CC03PWX

XP21 2 3

1 2 3XP3

1 2 3 XP1

xs1

xs2

Figure 3-87 Layout of the CC03PWX board

Table 3-83 Settings of jumpers of the CC03PWX board

Jumper Description Meanings Leave factory setting

XP1 Module mode selection jumper

1–2: module of AMERSON is selected. 2–3: CP company's module is selected.

Connect 1–2

XP2 Module mode selection jumper

1–2: Huawei electrical module is selected. 2–3: CP company's module is selected.

Connect 1–2

XP3 Jumper compatible with system alarm box

1–2 (02): Alarm box is version 02. 2–3 (03): Alarm box is version 03. Connect 1–2 (02)

3.37 Secondary Power Supply Board (CC04PWX)

3.37.1 Overview

The output power of the CC04PWX board is greater than the CC03PWX board.

The functions of the CC04PWX board are as follows.

Providing three types of outputs (+5 V DC/30 A, –5 V DC/10 A and 75 V AC/400 mA).

Adopting the cold-hot status automatic conversion circuit for the switching of ringing current on the backplane.

Communicating in real time with the network management system.


3-133

Automatic checking. Flow equalization.

The CC04PWX board is inserted in the subscriber frame. One or two CC04PWX boards are plugged in one frame to realize the hot backup of power for the loading of subscriber frame and enhance the system reliability.

3.37.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-88 shows the front panel of the CC04PWX board.

Figure 3-88 Front panel of the CC04PWX board

Table 3-84 describes the front panel of the CC04PWX board.

Table 3-84 Indication description of the CC04PWX board


RUN Red Board operation status

Slow flickering: normal communication. Quick flickering: abnormal communication.

Quick flickering


3-134


VA0 Green Ringing working status

ON: ringing output is normal. OFF: ringing output is abnormal.

ON

VB0 Green +5 V working status

ON: +5 V output is normal. OFF: +5 V output is abnormal.

ON

VC0 Green –5 V working status

ON: –5 V output is normal. OFF: –5 V output is abnormal. ON

FAIL Yellow Failure status

Blinks (at the rate of 25 Hz): abnormal status occurs on any module within this board. OFF: no abnormal status occurs in any module within this board.

OFF

POWER NA Control switch for each module within this board

ON: all modules within this board work properly. OFF: no output from all modules within this board.

ON

ALM NA Audio/visual alarm switchover switch

ON: If failure status occurs within the board, audio/visual alarms are sent simultaneously. OFF: If failure status occurs within the board, only visual alarm is sent.

ON

3.37.3 DIP Switches

Figure 3-89 shows the layout of the CC04PWX board. Table 3-85 and Table 3-86 give respectively the description of DIP switch and jumper settings of the CC04PWX board.


3-135

S401

S101

CC04PWX

SW401

1 2 3JP402V

SW4021 2

ON

JPA1

JPB1

Figure 3-89 Layout of CC04PWX board

I. Reset key SW401

The key SW401 within the board is designed to reset the CPU of the board.

II. DIP switch SW402

One gear of the DIP switch SW402 is used to switch the status monitoring of –24 V input voltage. The other gear is used to power the auxiliary loop within the control board, as shown in Table 3-85.

Table 3-85 Settings of DIP switch SW402 of the CC04PWX board

DIP switch Description Meanings Leave factory setting

SW402-1 To switch over monitoring of –24 V input voltage status

ON: this board is used to detect input –24 V voltage working status.OFF: this board is not used to detect input –24 V voltage working status.

When the system has –24 V, this position is ON. Otherwise, the position is set to OFF.

SW402-2 Power for auxiliary loop in the board

ON: auxiliary loop power is on.OFF: auxiliary loop power is not ON.

ON


3-136

III. NOD monitoring serial port

The NOD communication serial port is connected to the subscriber backplane through PIN 61 and PIN 62 of the JPB1. The corresponding signals are TXD1 and RXD1 respectively.

Table 3-86 Settings of jumper of the CC04PWX board

Jumper Description Meanings Leave factory setting

JP402 Jumper compatible with system alarm box

Alarm box: version 02 and version 03. Jumpers are set to pins 1–2: alarm box is version 02. Jumpers are set to pins 2–3: alarm box is version 03.

Connect pins 1–2

3.38 Secondary Power Supply Board (H601PWX/H301PWX)

3.38.1 Overview

The H601PWX/H301PWX board is a secondary power supply board. It is improved based on the CC04PWX board by adding the reset function when a module is locked due to output over-voltage. In addition, it has the functions of auto-detection, even current, and real-time communication with background.

This board is installed in the UAM/UAS/UAFM/UAFS frame, with a maximum of two H301PWX boards in each frame. They work in the active/standby mode to ensure the system security.

The H601PWX board is the same as the H301PWX board, the following will take the H301PWX board as the example.

3.38.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-90 shows the front panel of the H301PWX board.


3-137

Figure 3-90 Front panel of the H301PWX board

Table 3-87 describes the front panel of the H301PWX board.

Table 3-87 Indicator description of the H301PWX board



Blinks slowly: the communication is normal. Blinks quickly: the communication is abnormal.

Blinks slowly

VA0 Green Ringing current working status indicator

ON: ringing current output is normal. OFF: ringing current output is abnormal.

ON

VB0 Green +5 V working status indicator

ON: +5 V output is normal. OFF: +5 V output is abnormal.

ON

VC0 Green –5 V working status indicator

ON: –5 V output is normal. OFF: –5 V output is abnormal.

ON

FAIL Green Fault status indicator

Blinks at 25 Hz: abnormal status occurs to any module of this board. OFF: all modules are normal.

OFF


3-138


POWER NA Control switch for each module of this board

ON: all modules work normally. OFF: all modules have no output. ON

ALM NA Audio/visual alarm switchover switch

ON: If failure status occurs to the board, audio/visual alarms are given simultaneously. OFF: If failure status occurs to the board, only visual alarm is given.

ON


Figure 3-91 shows the layout of the H301PWX board.

S401

S101

SW401

JPA1

JPB1

H301PWX

3 2 1 1234

ONOFF

SW402JP101

Figure 3-91 Layout of the H301PWX board

I. Reset switch SW401

This switch is used to reset the board.

II. DIP switch SW402

Table 3-88 describes the settings of DIP switch of the H301PWX board.


3-139


DIP switch Description Factory setting

SW402-1

It is used to set the RUN indicator. ON: the running indicator is set to blinking status. OFF: the running indicator is set to constantly ON status. When it is configured with the CC03PWX board together, this DIP switch is placed in OFF status.

OFF

SW402-2

It is used to switch over the monitoring status of –24 V input voltage. ON: use this board to monitor the working status of the input –24 V voltage. OFF: do not use this board to monitor the working status of the input –24 V voltage.

It is placed in ON status if the system has –24 V voltage, otherwise in OFF status.

SW402-3 ON: the backplane matches H301HEB and H301HCB boards. OFF: the backplane matches H301HFB, H301HGB, H301HIB and CB01SLB.

OFF

SW402-4 ON: DC/DC module can be reset after being locked. OFF: DC/DC module cannot be reset after being locked.

ON

III. Jumpers

As shown in Figure 3-91, Pins 1, 2, and 3 of JP101 are arranged from right to left. By default, Pins 1 and 2 are connected.

3.39 155 Mbit/s SDH Optical Transmission Board (H302ASU)

3.39.1 Overview

The H302ASU board integrates all the functions of the standard SDH transmission equipment. It provides the following interfaces or ports.

dual STM-1 optical interfaces up to 16 E1 electrical interfaces RS-232 transparent transmission serial port Ethernet interface

The H302ASU adopts the same network management system together with all OptiX SDH transmission units.

The H302ASU board is an upgraded version of the 155 Mbit/s STM-1 optical transmission board H301ASU. With all functions of the H301ASU, it expands its functions on the tributary part.


3-140

Note:

The H302ASU board is not compatible with backplane of the UA5000UAM/UAS/UAFM/UAFS frame. When the H302ASU board provides only 8 E1 interfaces, it is fully compatible with the backplanes

HGB, HIB, HCB, HDB and HEB. When it provides 16 E1 interfaces, it is not compatible with the backplanes HCB, HDB and HEB.

3.39.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-92 shows the front panel of the H302ASU board.

(1)

(2)

(1) Western optical interface (2) Eastern optical interface

Figure 3-92 Front panel of the H302ASU board


3-141

Table 3-89 describes the front panel of the H302ASU board.

Table 3-89 Front panel description of the H302ASU board

Indicator, interface &

switch Color Meaning Illustration Normal

status

OFF for five seconds: initiation of hardware and operation system.

Yellow for five seconds: loading programming devices.

Green for seven seconds: initiation of BIOS.

Green, blinking per 0.5 seconds: BIOS operation.

Yellow, blinking at the rate of 2 Hz for 13 seconds: loading host software.

Green, blinking at the rate of 10 Hz for 38 seconds: initiation of host software.

Green, blinking per one second: host software is working.

Red and green, alternative blinking (per one second) - eastern optical fiber breakout.

RUN Green/ yellow/ red

Running and alarm indicator

Red and yellow, alternative flickering (per one second) - western or two direction optical fibers breakout.

Green, blinking per one second

ETN Green Ethernet indicator

ON: A network cable connects the Ethernet interface (RJ45) on board with a computer. Blinks quickly: The NMS is transmitting data through Ethernet interface.

ON/Blinking quickly

Western optical interface

NA Western optical interface

Upper receiving/lower sending, 155M single-mode, 1310 nm. NA

Eastern optical interface

NA Eastern optical interface

Upper receiving/lower sending, 155 M single-mode, 1310 nm. NA

BUZ NA Alarm sound switch

Switch moves up: If there is a critical alarm on board, then it sends out squealing sound of critical alarm. Switch moves down: Whether there is critical alarm on board or not, it does not send out alarm sound.

NA


3-142

Indicator, interface &

switch Color Meaning Illustration Normal

status

ETH NA Ethernet interface

A standard 10BASE-T Ethernet interface, providing communication channel between NMS computer and board.

NA

COM NA

Transparent transmission serial port/orderwire telephone interface

RS232 transparent transmission serial port and orderwire telephone share the external interface.

NA

RST NA Reset switch Hardware reset switch. NA

Note:

It takes about one minute for board to cone into normal status since it is powered on. For the RUN indicator, green means normal, yellow means minor alarm, while red means critical

alarm.


Figure 3-93 shows the layout of the H302ASU board.


3-143

SW4 SW3

ON='0'OFF='1'

ON

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14 3 2 1 H302ASU1 2 3 4

ONSW111 1 2 3 4

ONSW101

1 2 3 4

ONSW112 1 2 3 4

ONSW102

1 2 3 4

ONSW115 1 2 3 4

ONSW105

1 2 3 4

ON

SW116 1 2 3 4

ONSW106

SW117 SW1071 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ONSW118 1 2 3 4

ONSW108

1 2 3 4

ONSW113 1 2 3 4

ONSW103

1 2 3 4

ON

SW114 1 2 3 4

ONSW104

J3048V 24V

J17PROM CPU

J3

J28ON OFF

3 2 1

3 2 1

3 2 1

1 2 3

Figure 3-93 Layout of the H302ASU board (DIP switch and jumper)

I. Setup of DIP switches SW3, SW4

DIP switches SW3, SW4 are used to setup the IP address of NEs, as follows:

The lower 8 bits of SW3 indicates the fourth part (0-255) of IP address The upper 4 bits of SW4 indicates the third part (0-15) of IP address. ON indicates”1”, OFF indicates “0”.

Based on the DIP switch setup of SW3, SW4 and SW1, we can see the IP address “129.9” belongs to the third and fourth parts (decimal system).

Correspondingly, objective address for the control software downloading is 090XXX (hex number of lower byte of IP address). The DIP switches of IP address are in the upper right part of board, as shown in Figure 3-94.


3-144

¸

ON ON

SW3SW41234 12345678

The higher four bits are arranged in ascending sequencefrom right to left.

The lower eight bits arearranged in ascending sequence from right to left

¸

ON ON

SW3SW41234 12345678

¸

ON ON

SW3SW41234 12345678



Figure 3-94 DIP switch of IP address

II. DIP switch and jumper setup for 75Ω/120Ω impedance selection of 16 tritubaries

Table 3-90 Settings of tributary DIP switch and jumper

Resistance Tributary no.

75Ω 120Ω

Tributary 1 SW101-1:ON SW101-2:ON

SW111-1:OFF SW111-2:ON

SW101-1:OFF SW101-2:OFF




SW101-3: OFF SW101-4:OFF































3-145


75Ω 120Ω





























III. Jumper setting related to orderwire telephone

Jumper J30 in Figure 3-94 is the jumper of -48/24V power feeding in orderwire telephone on board.

Connect pins 1–2: the power feeding of the orderwire telephone is –24 V.

Connect pins 2–3: the power feeding of the orderwire telephone is –48 V (preset before delivery).

IV. Jumper setting related to charging batteries

In Figure 3-94, J28 is the jumper of charging batteries:

Connect pins 2–3: the configuration information will be lost after the board is powered off.

Connect pins 1–2: the configuration information will not be lost after the board is powered off (preset before delivery). In practical, connect pins 1–2.

V. Jumping setting related to programming logic device loading

Jumper J3: connect pins 1–2.

Jumper J17: when it is open, use the chip to load the programmable logic device. When pins 1–2 are connected, use the CPU to load the programmable logic device (preset before delivery). In practical, connect pins 1–2.


3-146


Figure 3-95 and Figure 3-96 show the pin assignment between the H302ASU board and the backplane. (It’s the rear view of the backplane.)

Figure 3-95 Definition of upper HEADER on the H302ASU board


3-147

Figure 3-96 Definition of lower HEADER on the H302ASU board

In Figure 3-95 and Figure 3-96,

RR1–16: ring of receiving signal of 1–16 E1 channels related to ASU side.

RT1–16: tip of receiving signal of 1–16 E1 channels related to ASU side.

TR1–16: ring of transmitting signal of 1–16 E1 channels related to ASU side.

TT1–16: tip of transmitting signal of 1–16 E1 channels related to ASU side.

PGND: Protection Ground.

Caution:

Do not power off the subscriber frame containing the H302ASU at random.

3.40 8 E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board (H601ATUB)

3.40.1 Overview

The H601ATUB board is used in the UAM/UAS/UAFM/UAFS frame. It integrates all the functions of the standard SDH transmission unit. The functions are as follows.

Dual STM-1 optical interfaces


3-148

Up to eight E1 electrical interfaces Full cross connection capacity Three phase locking modes Order wire telephone RS-232 transparent serial port Ethernet interface

The H601ATUB has two types of boards: H601ATUBG and H601ATUBH. The maximum transmit distance of the H601ATUBG board is 30 km, and that of the H601ATUBH board is 50 km.

3.40.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-97 shows the front panel of the H601ATUBG board. The front panel of H601ATUBH board is similar to that of the H601ATUBG board, only their silk-screens are different.


3-149

(1)

(2)

ATUBG


Figure 3-97 Front panel of the H601ATUBG board

Table 3-91 describes the front panel of the H601ATUBG board.


3-150

Table 3-91 Front panel description of the H601ATUB board

Indicator, interface & switch

Color Meaning Description Normal status


Yellow indicator blinks for seven seconds: loading programming devices.

Green blinks for seven seconds: initiation of BIOS.

Green blinks at the rate of 2 Hz: BIOS operation.

Yellow blinks at the rate of 2 Hz for 13 seconds: loading host software.

Green blinks at the rate of 10 Hz for 38 seconds: initiation of host software.

Green blinks at the rate of 1 Hz: host software running.

Red and green indicators blink alternatively (at the rate of 1 Hz) – the eastern optical fiber is broken.



Red and yellow indicators blink alternatively (at the rate of 1 Hz) –the western or both the eastern and western optical fibers are broken.

The RUN indicator blinks green at the rate of 1 Hz


ON: A network cable connects to the Ethernet interface (RJ45) on the board with a computer. Blinking: The NMS is transmitting data through Ethernet interface.

ON/flicking



Upper interface for receiving and lower interface for transmitting, 155 M single-mode, 1310 nm. NA



Upper interface for receiving and lower interface for transmitting, 155 M single-mode, 1310 nm. NA


Switch moves up: If there is a critical alarm to the ATU board, audio alarm will be generated. Switch moves down: no audio alarm will be generated no matter whether there is critical alarm to the ATU board.

NA



NA


3-151



COM NA


RS232 transparent transmission serial port and orderwire telephone share the external interface. NA

RST NA Reset switch Hardware reset switch. NA

Note:

It takes about one minute for board to be in normal status since it is powered on. For the RUN indicator, green means normal, yellow means minor alarm, while red means critical

alarm.


Figure 3-98 is the layout of the H601ATUB board.

SW4 SW3

ON='0'OFF='1'

ON

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14 3 2 1 H601ATUB1 2 3 4 ON

SW111 1 2 3 4

ONSW101

1 2 3 4

ONSW112 1 2 3 4

ONSW102

1 2 3 4

ONSW113 1 2 3 4

ONSW103

1 2 3 4

ON

SW114

1 2 3 4

ONSW104

J17PROM CPU

J3

J28ON OFF

3 2 1

3 2 1

1 2 3

Figure 3-98 Layout of H601ATUB board (DIP switch and jumper)

I. Setup of DIP switch SW3, SW4

DIP switch SW3, SW4 are used to set the IP address of NEs, as follows.


3-152

The lower eight bits of SW3 indicate the fourth part (0–255) of the IP address. The upper 4 bits of SW4 indicate the third part (0–15) of the IP address. ON indicates ”1”, OFF indicates “0”.



¸

ON ON

SW3SW41234 12345678



¸

ON ON

SW3SW41234 12345678

¸

ON ON

SW3SW41234 12345678





Table 3-92 Settings of tributary DIP switch and jumper


75Ω 120Ω

Tributary 1 SW101-1, SW101-2: ON

SW111-1: OFF SW111-2: ON

SW101-1, SW101-2: OFF

SW111-1: OFF SW111-2: OFF


SW111-3: OFF SW111-4: ON

SW101-3, SW101-4: OFF



SW112-1: OFF SW112-2: ON

SW102-1, SW102-2: OFF



SW112-3: OFF SW112-4: ON

SW102-3, SW102-4: OFF



SW113-1: OFF SW113-2: ON

SW103-1, SW103-2: OFF



SW113-3: OFF SW113-4: ON

SW103-3, SW103-4: OFF



3-153


75Ω 120Ω


SW114-1: OFF SW114-2: ON

SW104-1, SW104-2: OFF



SW114-3: OFF SW114-4: ON

SW104-3, SW104-4: OFF


III. Jumper setting related to charging batteries

In Figure 3-98, J28 is the jumper of charging batteries.


Connect pins 1–2: the configuration will not be lost after the board is powered off (preset before delivery). In practical, connect pins 1–2.

IV. Jumping setting related to loadinf of programmable logic device


Jumper J17: when it is open, use the chip to load the programmable logic device. When pins 1–2 are connected, use the CPU to load the programmable logic device (preset before delivery). In practical, connect pins 1–2.


Figure 3-100 and Figure 3-101 show the pin assignment between the H601ATUBG board and backplane. (It’s the rear view of the backplane.)


3-154

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687888990919293949596

RT1TT1

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

RT2TT2RT3TT3RT4TT4


PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND

Figure 3-100 Definition of upper HEADER on the H601ATUB board

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687888990919293949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132


PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND


Figure 3-101 Definition of lower HEADER on the H601ATUB board

In Figure 3-100 and Figure 3-101, the pins are defined as follows.

RR1–8: ring of receiving signal of 1–16 E1 channels related to the ATU side.


3-155

RT1–8: tip of receiving signal of 1–16 E1 channels related to ATU side.

TR1–8: ring of transmitting signal of 1–16 E1 channels related to ATU side.

TT1–8: tip of transmitting signal of 1–16 E1 channels related to ATU side.


Caution:

Do not power off the subscriber frame containing the H601ATU.

3.41 16 E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board (H601ATUA)

3.41.1 Overview

The H601ATUA board integrates all the functions of the standard SDH transmission unit. It has the following functions.

Dual STM-1 optical interfaces Up to 16 E1 electrical interfaces Full cross-connection capacity Three phase locking modes Order wire telephone RS-232 transparent serial port Ethernet interface

The H601ATUA board has two types: H601ATUAG and H601ATUAH. The maximum transmit distance of the H601ATUAG board is 30 km, and that of the H601ATUAH board is 50 km.

3.41.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-102 shows the front panel of the H601ATUAG board. The front panel of H601ATUAH board is similar to that of the H601ATUAG board, only their silk-screens are different.


3-156

(1)

(2)

ATUAG


Figure 3-102 Front panel of the H601ATUAG board

Table 3-93 shows the front panel of the H601ATUAG board.


3-157

Table 3-93 Front panel description of the H601ATUA board




Yellow indicator for five seconds: loading programming devices.

Green indicator for seven seconds: initiation of BIOS.

Green blinks at the rate of 2 Hz: BIOS operation.

Yellow blinks at the rate of 2 Hz for 13 seconds: loading the host software.

Green blinks at the rate of 10 Hz for 38 seconds: initiation of the host software.

Green indicator blinks at the rate of 1 Hz: the host software operates.

Red and green indicators blink alternatively (at the rate of 1 Hz) -- the eastern optical fiber is broken.



Red and yellow indicators blink alternatively (at the rate of 1 Hz) – the western or both the western and eastern optical fibers are broken.

Green indicator blinks at the rate of 1 Hz.


ON: A network cable connects to the Ethernet interface (RJ45) on the board with a computer. Blinking: The NMS is transmitting data through Ethernet interface.

ON/Blinking



Upper interface for receiving and lower interface for transmitting, 155M single-mode, 1310 nm. NA



Upper interface for receiving and lower interface for transmitting, 155M single-mode, 1310 nm. NA


Switch moves up: If there is a critical alarm to the H601ATUA board, audio alarm will be generated. Switch moves down: No audio alarm will be generated no matter whether there is critical alarm to the H601ATUA board.

NA



NA


3-158



COM NA


RS232 transparent transmission serial port and orderwire telephone share the external interface NA

RST NA Reset switch Hardware reset switch NA

Note:

It takes about one minute for board to be in normal status since it is powered on. For the RUN indicator, green means normal, yellow means minor alarm, while red means critical

alarm.


Figure 3-103 shows the layout of H601ATUA board.

SW4 SW3

ON='0'OFF='1'

ON

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14 3 2 1 H601ATUA1 2 3 4

ONSW111 1 2 3 4

ONSW101

1 2 3 4

ONSW112 1 2 3 4

ONSW102

1 2 3 4

ONSW115 1 2 3 4

ONSW105

1 2 3 4

ON

SW116 1 2 3 4

ON

SW106

SW117 SW1071 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ONSW118 1 2 3 4

ONSW108

1 2 3 4

ONSW113 1 2 3 4

ONSW103

1 2 3 4

ON

SW114 1 2 3 4

ON

SW104

J17PROM CPU

J3

J28ON OFF

3 2 1

3 2 1

1 2 3

Figure 3-103 Layout of the H601ATUA board (DIP switch and jumper)


3-159

I. DIP switches SW3, SW4

DIP switches SW3, SW4 are used to setup the IP address of NEs, as follows:

The lower 8 bits of SW3 indicate the fourth part (0-255) of the IP address. The upper 4 bits of SW4 indicate the third part (0-15) of the IP address. ON indicates ”1”, and OFF indicates “0”.



¸

ON ON

SW3SW41234 12345678



¸

ON ON

SW3SW41234 12345678

¸

ON ON

SW3SW41234 12345678





Table 3-94 Description of tributary DIP switch and jumper


75Ω 120Ω


















3-160


75Ω 120Ω

















































III. Jumper setting related to charging batteries

As shown in Figure 3-103,


Connect pins 1–2: the configuration will not be lost after the board is powered off (preset in factory). In practical, connect pins 1–2.

IV. Jumping setting related to programming logic device loading



3-161

Jumper J17: when it is open, use the chip to load the programmable logic device; when pins 1–2 are connected, use the CPU to load the programmable logic device (preset in factory). In practical, connect pins 1–2.


Figure 3-105 and Figure 3-106 show the pin assignment between the H601ATUA board and backplane. (It’s the rear view of the backplane).

BA C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687888990919293949596

RT1TT1

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

RT2TT2RT3TT3RT4TT4


PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND


Figure 3-105 Definition of upper HEADER signal on the H601ATUA


3-162

BA C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687888990919293949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132


PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND



Figure 3-106 Definition of lower HEADER signal on the H601ATUA

In Figure 3-105 and Figure 3-106:

RR1–16: ring of receiving signal of 1–16 E1 channels related to ASU side.

RT1–16: tip of receiving signal of 1–16 E1 channels related to ASU side.

TR1–16: ring of transmitting signal of 1–16 E1 channels related to ASU side.

TT1-16: tip of transmitting signal of 1–16 E1 channels related to ASU side.


Note:

Do not power off the subscriber frame containing the H302ASU at random.

3.42 Fan Control Board (H601FCB)

3.42.1 Overview

Installed in the fan frame of UA5000 master/slave frameUAM/UAS/UAFM/UAFS frame, the H601FCB board controls the fan speed and detects the fan state. It can report the fan state to ESC board or communicate with the ASX board through RS-485 interface


3-163

for reporting fan alarm and adjusting fan speed. Besides, the H601FCB can output its own running state.

The H601FCB can adjust the fan to rotate within 50%-100% of its rated speed to reduce the fan noise and to prolong the fan’s service life.

The H601HCB is hot-swappable.

3.42.2 Description of Front Panel

Figure 3-107 shows the front panel of the H601FCB board.

Figure 3-107 Front panel of the H601FCB board

Table 3-95 describes the front panel of the H601FCB board.

Table 3-95 Front panel description of the H601FCB board


FAN STATUS Green Running state indicator Blink at 0.5Hz: Normal Blink at 4Hz: Abnormal

3.42.3 Description of DIP Switches and Jumpers

Figure 3-108 shows the layout of the CC08TSS board.

SW101

ON

12

34

56

78

H601FCB

Figure 3-108 Layout of the H601FCB board

The DIP switches SW101-1-SW101-4 are used to set the secondary node address, which ranges from 00H to 0FH. Since this board requires no secondary node address, you can set these DIP switches to any values.

The DIP switches SW101-5 and SW101-6 are used to set the fan number. Table 3-96 lists the settings.


3-164

Table 3-96 Settings of DIP switches SW101-5 and SW101-6

SW101-5 SW101-6 Fan number

ON ON 6

ON OFF 2

OFF ON 4

OFF OFF 3

The DIP switches SW101-7 and SW101-8 are used to set the fan speed adjustment mode. Table 3-97 lists the settings.

Table 3-97 Settings of DIP switchesSW101-7 and SW101-8

SW101-7 SW101-8 Fan speed adjusted by

ON ON Temperature at air inlet

ON OFF Temperature at air outlet

OFF ON Reserved

OFF OFF Temperature at air inlet and stop running

Table 3-98 lists the factory settings of SW101-5 to SW101-8. Change the factory settings with caution.

Table 3-98 Factory settings of DIP switches SW101-5 to SW101-8

SW101-5 SW101-6 SW101-7 SW101-8

Factory setting OFF OFF OFF OFF

Hardware Description Manual HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cable

4-1

Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cables

4.1 Digital Trunk Cables

4.1.1 Trunk Cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect APMA to OptiX 155/622H, both provides 16 E1 interfaces.

75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

I. 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Figure 4-1 shows the outline of the trunk cable, and Table 4-1 shows its pin assignment.

(1) Cable connector-DB-68-Male (2) Main label (3) Heat shrink tube (4) Cable tie (5) 2mmFB wire connector W1, W2: coaxial cable

Figure 4-1 Outline of the 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1


4-2

Table 4-1 Pin assignment of the 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Conn.X1 Coax.& Serial No. Conn.X2 Conn.X1 Coax.& Serial

No. Conn.X4

34 Tip a6 50 Tip a6

33 Ring 1

a5 49 Ring 9

a5

32 Tip d3 48 Tip d3

31 Ring 2

d4 47 Ring 10

d4

30 Tip a4 46 Tip a4

29 Ring 3

a3 45 Ring 11

a3

28 Tip d1 44 Tip d1

27 Ring 4

d2 43 Ring 12

d2


No. Conn.X5

26 Tip a6 42 Tip a6

25 Ring 5

a5 41 Ring 13

a5

24 Tip d3 40 Tip d3

23 Ring 6

d4 39 Ring 14

d4

22 Tip a4 38 Tip a4

21 Ring 7

a3 37 Ring 15

a3

20 Tip d1 36 Tip d1

W1

19 Ring 8

d2

W1

35 Ring 16

d2


No. Conn.X8

68 Ring a5 16 Ring a5

67 Tip 1

a6 15 Tip 9

a6

66 Ring d4 14 Ring d4

65 Tip 2

d3 13 Tip 10

d3


63 Tip 3

a4 11 Tip 11

a4


61 Tip 4

d1 9 Tip 12

d1

W2

Conn.X1 Coax.& Serial No. Conn.X7

W2

Conn.X1 Coax.& Serial No. Conn.X9


4-3


59 Tip 5

a6 7 Tip 13

a6


57 Tip 6

d3 5 Tip 14

d3


55 Tip 7

a4 3 Tip 15

a4


W2

53 Tip 8

d1

1 Tip 16

d1

Table 4-2 describes the labels on the trunk cable.

Table 4-2 Labels on the 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Label 1 Label 2 Label 3 Label 4

(1–2)E1 (3–4)E1 (5–6)E1 (7–8)E1


(9–10)E1 (11–12)E1 (13–14)E1 (15–16)E1

II. 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2


(1) Cable connector-DB-68-Male (2) Main label (3) Heat shrink tube (4) Cable tie (5) 2mmFB wire connector W1, W2: coaxial cable

Figure 4-2 Outline of the 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2


4-4

Table 4-3 Pin assignment of the 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2


No. Conn.X3

34 Tip b6 50 Tip b6

33 Ring 1

a6 49 Ring 9

a6

32 Tip c6 48 Tip c6

31 Ring 2

d6 47 Ring 10

d6

30 Tip a5 46 Tip a5

29 Ring 3

a4 45 Ring 11

a4

28 Tip d5 44 Tip d5

W1

27 Ring 4

d4 43 Ring 12

d4

26 Tip a3 42 Tip a3

25 Ring 5

a2 41 Ring 13

a2

24 Tip d3 40 Tip d3

23 Ring 6

d2 39 Ring 14

d2

22 Tip a1 38 Tip a1

21 Ring 7

b1 37 Ring 15

b1

20 Tip d1 36 Tip d1

W1

19 Ring 8

c1

W1

35 Ring 16

c1


No. Conn.X5


67 Tip 1

b6 15 Tip 9

b6


65 Tip 2

c6 13 Tip 10

c6


63 Tip 3

a5 11 Tip 11

a5


61 Tip 4

d5 9 Tip 12

d5


59 Tip 5

a3 7 Tip 13

a3


W2

57 Tip 6

d3

W2

5 Tip 14

d3


4-5


No. Conn.X5

W2 56 Ring b1 W2 4 Ring b1

55 Tip 7

a1 3 Tip 15

a1

54 Ring c1 2 Ring c1 W2

53 Tip 8

d1

W2

1 Tip 16

d1


Table 4-4 Labels on the 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2


(1–4) E1 (5–8) E1 (9–12) E1 (13–14) E1

4.1.2 Trunk Cable From APMA/AIUA to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect APMA/AIUA board to DDF.

When H601CESA or H601E8IA subboard is used, the trunk cable is the same as the one from ATUA/DEHA to DDF.

When E23A subboard is used, the trunk cable from APMA/AIUA to DDF is described as follows.

When the E23A subboard is used, there is only the 75Ω trunk cable available to connect APMA/AIUA to DDF. This cable provides two ATM E3/DS3 (T3) interfaces.


(1) Cable connector-DB-68-Male (2) Main label (3) Heat shrink tube W: coaxial cable

Figure 4-3 Outline of the 75Ω trunk cable from APMA/AIUA (with the E23A subboard) to DDF


4-6

Table 4-5 Pin assignment of the 75Ω trunk cable from APMA/AIUA (with E23A subboard) to DDF

Conn.X1 Coax.& Serial No. Label

34 Tip

33 Ring 1 R0

32 Tip

31 Ring 2 T0

30 Tip

29 Ring 3 R1

28 Tip

27 Ring 4 T1

4.1.3 IPMA Subtending Cable

Figure 4-4 shows how to connect the IPMA subtending cable in the front access frame.

（1）

（2）

（4）

HUBE

HUBF1

HUBF2

（3）

HUBF3

HUBF4

(1) RIGHT 1#FE (2) LEFT 1#FE (3) 1#FE (4) 2#FE

Figure 4-4 Connection of the IPMA subtending cable in the front access frame

Connection Description:

See Figure 4-5 for the HUBE cable. See Figure 4-6 for the HUBF cable. The first and second HUBF cables are 1.5

meters long, and the third and fourth HUBF cables are three meters long.

Connection Mode:


4-7

Connect branch “1#FE” of the cable of HUBF 1 to branch “left 1#FE” of the HUBE cable, and connect branch “2#FE” of the cable of HUBF 1 to branch “right 1#FE” of the HUBE cable.




8

A

B

B

（5）

（4）

W1

X1

X2

X9

A

（1）（2）

W2W3W4

W8

W5W6W7

1

（3）

(1) Cable connector (2) Main label (3) Label 1 (4) Label 8 (5) Network interface connector W1–8: Twisted pairs

Figure 4-5 IPMA subtending cable (connected with master frame)

Table 4-6 shows the label prints on the cable.

Table 4-6 Label prints on the IPMA subtending cable (connected with master frame)

Label Label 1 Label 2 Label 3 Label 4 Label 5 Label 6 Label 7 Label 8

Label prints

LEFT 1# FE

LEFT 2# FE

LEFT 3# FE

LEFT 4# FE

Right 5# FE

Right 6# FE

Right 7# FE

Right 8# FE

Table 4-7 Pin assignment of IPMA subtending cable (connected with master frame)

Conn.X1 Conn. X2 Remarks Conn.X1 Conn. X2 Remarks

34 3 68 3

33 6 One pair

67 6 One pair

32 1 66 1

W4

31 2 One pair

W8

65 2 One pair


4-8


30 3 64 3

29 6 One pair

63 6 One pair

28 1 62 1

W3

27 2 One pair

W7

61 2 One pair


26 3 60 3

25 6 One pair

59 6 One pair

24 1 58 1

W2

23 2 One pair

W7

57 2 One pair


22 3 56 3

21 6 One pair

55 6 One pair

20 1 54 1

W1

19 2 One pair

W5

53 2 One pair

8 1A

A

B

B

（1）

（2）

（3）

（4）

（5）

（6）

W1

W2

X1

X2

X3

(1) Cable connector (2) #4-40 screw (3) Main label (4) Label 1: 1#FE (5) Label 2: 2#FE (6) Network interface connector W1–2: Twisted pairs

Figure 4-6 IPMA subtending cable (connected with slave frame)

Table 4-8 shows the pin assignment of the IPMA subtending cable connected with slave frame.


4-9

Table 4-8 Pin assignment of the IPMA subtending cable (connected with slave frame)


1 2 5 2

2 1 One pair

6 1 One pair

3 6 7 6

W1

4 3 One pair

W2

8 3 One pair

4.1.4 FE Upstream Cable of IPMA Board

The straight through cable is used as the FE upstream cable of the IPMA board.

4.1.5 Trunk Cable From ATUA/DEHA to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect ATUA/DEHA to DDF: 75Ω and 120Ω. Both can provide 16 E1 interfaces.

I. 75Ω trunk cable from ATUA/DEHA to DDF


(1) Cable connector-DB-68-Male (2) Main labelW1,W2: coaxial cable

Figure 4-7 Outline of the 75Ω trunk cable from ATUA/DEHA to DDF


4-10

Table 4-9 Pin assignment of the 75Ω trunk cable from ATUA/DEHA to DDF

Conn.X1 Coax.& Serial No. Label Conn.X1 Coax.& Serial

No. Label

34 Tip 50 Tip

33 Ring 1 R0

49 Ring 9 R4

32 Tip 48 Tip

31 Ring 2 T0

47 Ring 10 T4

30 Tip 46 Tip

29 Ring 3 R1

45 Ring 11 R5

28 Tip 44 Tip

27 Ring 4 T1

43 Ring 12 T5

26 Tip 42 Tip

25 Ring 5 R2

41 Ring 13 R6

24 Tip 40 Tip

23 Ring 6 T2

39 Ring 14 T6

22 Tip 38 Tip

21 Ring 7 R3

37 Ring 15 R7

20 Tip 36 Tip

W1

19 Ring 8 T3

W1

35 Ring 16 T7


No. Label

68 Ring 16 Ring

67 Tip 1 R8

15 Tip 9 R12

66 Ring 14 Ring

65 Tip 2 T8

13 Tip 10 T12

64 Ring 12 Ring

63 Tip 3 R9

11 Tip 11 R13

62 Ring 10 Ring

61 Tip 4 T9

9 Tip 12 T13

60 Ring 8 Ring

59 Tip 5 R10

7 Tip 13 R14

W2

58 Ring 6 T10

W2

6 Ring 14 T14


4-11


No. Label

57 Tip 5 Tip

56 Ring 4 Ring

55 Tip 7 R11

3 Tip 15 R15

54 Ring 2 Ring

W2

53 Tip 8 T11

W2

1 Tip 16 T15

II. 120Ω trunk cable from ATUA/DEHA to DDF


(1) Cable connector-DB-68-Male (2) Main label W1,W2: communication cable

Figure 4-8 Outline of the 120Ω trunk cable from ATUA/DEHA to DDF

Table 4-10 Pin assignment of the 120Ω trunk cable from ATUA/DEHA to DDF

Conn.X1 Color Label Conn.X1 Color Label

34 Pink/Red* 50 Blue/Red**

33 Pink/Black* R0

49 Blue/Black** R4

32 Orange/Red* 48 Gray/Red**

31 Orange/Black*T0

47 Gray/Black** T4

30 Green/Red* 46 Pink/Red***

29 Green/Black* R1

45 Pink/Black*** R5

28 Blue/Red* 44 Orange/Red***

W1

27 Blue/Black* T1

W1

43 Orange/Black*** T5


4-12


26 Gray/Red* 42 Green/Red***

25 Gray/Black* R2

41 Green/Black*** R6

24 Pink/Red** 40 Blue/Red***

23 Pink/Black** T2

39 Blue/Black*** T6

22 Orange/Red** 38 Gray/Red***

21 Orange/Black**R3

37 Gray/Black*** R7

20 Green/Red** 36 Blue/Red****

W1

19 Green/Black**T3

W1

35 Blue/Black**** T7


68 Pink/Black* 16 Blue/Black**

67 Pink/Red* R8

15 Blue/Red** R12

66 Orange/Black* 14 Gray/Black**

65 Orange/Red* T8

13 Gray/Red** T12

64 Green/Black* 12 Pink/Black***

63 Green/Red* R9

11 Pink/Red*** R13

62 Blue/Black* 10 Orange/Black***

61 Blue/Red* T9

9 Orange/Red*** T13

60 Gray/Black* 8 Green/Black***

59 Gray/Red* R10

7 Green/Red*** R14

58 Pink/Black** 6 Blue/Black***

57 Pink/Red** T10

5 Blue/Red*** T14

56 Orange/Black** 4 Gray/Black***

55 Orange/Red**R11

3 Gray/Red*** R15

54 Green/Black** 2 Blue/Black****

W2

53 Green/Red** T11

W2

1 Blue/Red**** T15

4.1.6 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H

There are four types of trunk cables used to connect PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H. Each type of trunk cable can provide eight E1 interfaces.

75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1


4-13

120Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2 120Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

Note:

The OptiX 155/622H has two types of E1 tributary boards: SS42SP1 and SS42SP2, which use the same connector, that is, 2-mm-long FB wire connector (4x6PIN).

For the 75Ω matching, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable) for transmission. For the 120Ω matching, use the balanced cable (differential symmetric pair) for transmission. Configure the data consistently with the matched impedance, and put the DIP switch in the correct state.

I. 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1


(1) View A (2) DB-50 male connector (3) Metal screw (4) Main label (5) Heat shrink tube (6) Label 1 (7) Label 2 (8) Label 3 (9) Label 4 (10) 2-mm-long FB wire connector (11) Cable tie (12) View B (13) Side C (without shell) W1, W2: Coaxial cables

Figure 4-9 Outline of the 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1


4-14

Table 4-11 Pin assignment of the 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Conn.X1 Conn.X2 Coax.& Serial No. Conn.X1 Conn.X4 Coax.& Serial

No.

1 a5 Ring 34 a5 Ring

2 a6 Tip 1

35 a6 Tip 1

3 d4 Ring 36 d4 Ring

4 d3 Tip 2

37 d3 Tip 2


6 a4 Tip 3

39 a4 Tip 3


8 d1 Tip 4

41 d1 Tip 4

Conn.X1 Conn.X3 Coax.& Serial No. Conn.X1 Conn.X5 Coax.& Serial

No.


11 a6 Tip 5

44 a6 Tip 5


13 d3 Tip 6

46 d3 Tip 6


15 a4 Tip 7

48 a4 Tip 7


W1

17 d1 Tip 8

W2

50 d1 Tip 8

Table 4-12 describes the lables on the trunk cable.

When two PV8 boards are configured, two such cables (left and right) are needed, their labels are different.

When two PV4 boards are configured, only one such cable is needed, and use the label of the right cable listed in Table 4-12.

Table 4-12 Labels on the 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Label Contents Description

Label 1 Right cable: Left (1–2) E1

Left cable: Left (5–6) E1

E1 interfaces 1–2 of the left PV8/PV4 board (front view of the frame).

E1 interfaces 5–6 of the left PV8 board.

Label 2 Right cable: Left (3–4) E1

Left cable: Left (7–8) E1

E1 interfaces 3–4 of the left PV8/PV4 board.



4-15


Label 3 Right cable: Right (1–2) E1

Left cable: Right (5–6) E1

E1 interfaces 1–2 of the right PV8/PV4 board.

E1 interfaces 5–6 of the right PV8 board.

Label 4 Right cable: Right (3–4) E1

Left cable: Right (7–8) E1



II. 120Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1


(1) View A (2) DB-50 male connector (3) Metal screw (4) Main label (5) Heat shrinkable tube (6) Label 1 (7) Label 2 (8) Label 3 (9) Label 4 (10) 2-mm-long FB wire connector (11) Cable tie (12) View B W1, W2: Communication cables



4-16


Conn.X1 Conn.X2 Remarks Conn.X1 Conn.X4 Remarks

1 a5 34 a5

2 a6 One pair

35 a6 One pair

3 d4 36 d4

4 d3 One pair

37 d3 One pair

5 a3 38 a3

6 a4 One pair

39 a4 One pair

7 d2 40 d2

8 d1 One pair

41 d1 One pair


10 a5 43 a5

11 a6 One pair

44 a6 One pair

12 d4 45 d4

13 d3 One pair

46 d3 One pair

14 a3 47 a3

15 a4 One pair

48 a4 One pair

16 d2 49 d2

W1

17 d1 One pair

W2

50 d1 One pair

The description of labels on the trunk cable is the same as those on the 75Ω trunk cable. See Table 4-12.

III. 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2



4-17

(1) View A (2) DB-50 male connector (3) Metal screw (4) Main label (5) Label 1 (6) Heat shrinkable tube (7) 2-mm-long FB wire connector (8) View B (9) Side C (without shell) (10) D view (without shell) (11) Cable tie (12) Label 2 W1, W2: Coaxial cables



Conn.X1 Conn.X2

Coax.& Serial No. Conn.X1 Conn.X3 Coax.& Serial

No.


2 b6 Tip 1

35 b6 Tip 1


4 c6 Tip 2

37 c6 Tip 2


6 a5 Tip 3

39 a5 Tip 3


8 d5 Tip 4

41 d5 Tip 4


11 a3 Tip 5

44 a3 Tip 5


13 d3 Tip 6

46 d3 Tip 6

14 b1 Ring 47 b1 Ring

15 a1 Tip 7

48 a1 Tip 7

16 c1 Ring 49 c1 Ring

W1

17 d1 Tip 8

W2

50 d1 Tip 8



4-18


When two PV4 boards are configured, only one such cable is required, and use the label of the right cable listed in Table 4-15.

Table 4-15 Labels on the 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2


Label 1 Right cable: W1-Left PV4/PV8 (1–4) E1.

Left cable: W1-Left PV4/PV8 (5–8) E1.



Label 2 Right cable: W2-Right PV4/PV8 (1–4) E1.

Left cable: W2-Right PV4/PV8 (5–8) E1.



IV. 120Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2


(1) View A (2) DB-50 male connector (3) Metal screw (4) Main label (5) Label 1 (6) Heat shrinkable tube (7) Cable tie (8) 2-mm-long FB wire connector (9) View B (10) Label 2 W1, W2: Communication cables



4-19



1 a6 34 a6

2 b6 One pair

35 b6 One pair

3 d6 36 d6

4 c6 One pair

37 c6 One pair

5 a4 38 a4

6 a5 One pair

39 a5 One pair

7 d4 40 d4

8 d5 One pair

41 d5 One pair

10 a2 43 a2

11 a3 One pair

44 a3 One pair

12 d2 45 d2

13 d3 One pair

46 d3 One pair

14 b1 47 b1

15 a1 One pair

48 a1 One pair

16 c1 49 c1

W1

17 d1 One pair

W2

50 d1 One pair

The description of labels on the trunk cable is the same as those on the 75Ω trunk cable. See Table 4-15.

4.1.7 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect the PV8/PV4 to the H601ATUB: 75Ω and 120Ω. Both can provide eight E1 interfaces respectively.

I. 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB



4-20

(1) View A (2) DB-50 male connector (3) Metal screw (4) Main label (5) Sub-label ATUB (6) DB-68 male connector (7) View B W: Coaxial cable

Figure 4-13 Outline of the 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB

Table 4-17 Pin assignment of the 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB

Conn.X1 Conn.X2 Coax.& Serial No. Conn.X1 Conn.X3 Coax.& Serial No.

34 4 Tip 50 37 Tip

33 3 Ring 1

49 36 Ring 9

32 2 Tip 48 35 Tip

31 1 Ring 2

47 34 Ring 10

30 8 Tip 46 41 Tip

29 7 Ring 3

45 40 Ring 11

28 6 Tip 44 39 Tip

27 5 Ring 4

43 38 Ring 12

26 13 Tip 42 46 Tip

25 12 Ring 5

41 45 Ring 13

24 11 Tip 40 44 Tip

23 10 Ring 6

39 43 Ring 14

22 17 Tip 38 50 Tip

21 16 Ring 7

37 49 Ring 15

20 15 Tip 36 48 Tip

19 14 Ring 8

35 47 Ring 16

II. 120Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB



4-21

(1) View A (2) DB-50 male connector (3) Metal screw (4) Main label (5) Sub-label ATUB (6) DB-68 male connector (7) View B W: Communication cable

Figure 4-14 Outline of the 120Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB

Table 4-18 Pin assignment of the 120Ω cable from PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB


34 4 50 37

33 3 One pair

49 36 One pair

32 2 48 35

31 1 One pair

47 34 One pair

30 8 46 41

29 7 One pair

45 40 One pair

28 6 44 39

27 5 One pair

43 38 One pair

26 13 42 46

25 12 One pair

41 45 One pair

24 11 40 44

23 10 One pair

39 43 One pair

22 17 38 50

21 16 One pair

37 49 One pair

20 15 36 48

19 14 One pair

35 47 One pair


4-22

4.1.8 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect the PV8/PV4 to DDF: 75Ω and 120Ω. Both can provide eight E1 interfaces respectively.

I. 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF


(1) View A (2) DB-50 male connector (3) Metal screw (4) Main label (5) Label 1 (6) Label on bare wire (7) Label 2 W1, W2: Coaxial cables

Figure 4-15 Outline of the 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF

Table 4-19 Pin assignment of the 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF

Conn.X1 Coax. & Serial No. Label Conn.X1 Coax. & Serial

No. Label

1 Ring 34 Ring

2 Tip 1 R1

35 Tip 1 R1

3 Ring 36 Ring

4 Tip 2 T1

37 Tip 2 T1

5 Ring 38 Ring

6 Tip 3 R2

39 Tip 3 R2

7 Ring 40 Ring

8 Tip 4 T2

41 Tip 4 T2

10 Ring 43 Ring

11 Tip 5 R3

44 Tip 5 R3

12 Ring 45 Ring

13 Tip 6 T3

46 Tip 6 T3

14 Ring 47 Ring

W1

15 Tip 7 R4

W2

48 Tip 7 R4


4-23

Conn.X1 Coax. & Serial No. Label Conn.X1 Coax. & Serial

No. Label

16 Ring 49 Ring W1

17 Tip 8 T4 W2

50 Tip 8 T4

Table 4-20 describes of the lables on the trunk cable.


When two PV4 boards are configured, only one such cable is needed, and use the label of the right cable listed in Table 4-20.

Table 4-20 Labels on the 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF


Label 1 Right cable: W1-Left PV8/PV4 (1–4) E1.

Left cable: W1-Left PV8/PV4 (5–8) E1.



Label 2 Right cable: W2-Right PV8/PV4 (1–4) E1.

Left cable: W2-Right PV8/PV4 (5–8) E1.



II. 120Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF


(1) View A (2) DB-50 male connector (3) Metal crew (4) Main label (5) Label 1 (6) Label on bare wire (7) Label 2 W1, W2: Communication cables

Figure 4-16 Outline of the 120Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF


4-24

Table 4-21 Pin assignment of the 120Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF


1 White 34 White

2 Blue 35 Blue

18 Drain Wire

R1

19 Drain Wire

R1

3 White 36 White

4 Orange 37 Orange

20 Drain Wire

T1

21 Drain Wire

T1

5 White 38 White

6 Green 39 Green

22 Drain Wire

R2

23 Drain Wire

R2

7 White 40 White

8 Brown 41 Brown

24 Drain Wire

T2

25 Drain Wire

T2

10 White 43 White

11 Gray 44 Gray

26 Drain Wire

R3

27 Drain Wire

R3

12 Red 45 Red

13 Blue 46 Blue

28 Drain Wire

T3

29 Drain Wire

T3

14 Red 47 Red

15 Orange 48 Orange

W1

30 Drain Wire

R4

31 Drain Wire

R4

16 Red 49 Red

17 Green 50 Green W1

32 Drain Wire

T4

W2

33 Drain Wire

T4

The descriptions of labels on the trunk cable are the same as those on the 75Ω trunk cable, as shown in Table 4-20.

4.1.9 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to APMA

There are two types of trunk cable used to connect PV8/PV4 to APMA: 75Ω and 120Ω. Both can provide 16 E1 interfaces.


4-25

I. 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA


(1) Cable connector-DB-50-Male (2) Main label (3) Cable connector-DB-68-Male W1,W2: coaxial cable

Figure 4-17 Outline of the 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA

Table 4-22 Pin assignment of the 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA


No. Conn.X3

1 Ring 31 34 Ring 47

2 Tip 1

32 35 Tip 9

48


4 Tip 2

34 37 Tip 10

50


6 Tip 3

28 39 Tip 11

44


8 Tip 4

30 41 Tip 12

46

10 Ring 23 43 Ring 39

11 Tip 5

24 44 Tip 13

40

12 Ring 25 45 Ring 41

13 Tip 6

26 46 Tip 14

42

W1

14 Ring 7 19

W1

47 Ring 15 35


4-26


No. Conn.X3

15 Tip 20 48 Tip 36

16 Ring 21 49 Ring 37 W1

17 Tip 8

22

W1

50 Tip 16

38


No. Conn.X3


2 Tip 1

65 35 Tip 9

13


4 Tip 2

67 37 Tip 10

15


6 Tip 3

61 39 Tip 11

9


8 Tip 4

63 41 Tip 12

11


11 Tip 5

57 44 Tip 13

5


13 Tip 6

59 46 Tip 14

7


15 Tip 7

53 48 Tip 15

1


W2

17 Tip 8

55

W2

50 Tip 16

3


Table 4-23 Labels on the 75Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA

Label Content Description

Label 1 PV4 E1 Connected to “PV4 E1” at the cabling area

Label 2 PV8 E1 Connected to “PV8E1” at the cabling area


4-27

II. 120Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA

Figure 4-18 shows the outline of the cable and Table 4-24 shows the pin assignment.

(1) Cable connector-DB-50-Male (2) Main label (3) Cable connector-DB-68-Male W1,W2 Twisted pairs

Figure 4-18 Outline of the 120Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA

Table 4-24 Pin assignment of 120Ω trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA


1 31 34 47

2 32 one pair

35 48 one pair

3 33 36 49

4 34 one pair

37 50 one pair

5 27 38 43

6 28 one pair

39 44 one pair

7 29 40 45

8 30 one pair

41 46 one pair

10 23 43 39

11 24 one pair

44 40 one pair

12 25 45 41

13 26 one pair

46 42 one pair

14 19 47 35

15 20 one pair

48 36 one pair

16 21 49 37

W1

17 22 one pair

W1

50 38 one pair


4-28


1 66 34 14

2 65 one pair

35 13 one pair

3 68 36 16

4 67 one pair

37 15 one pair

5 62 38 10

6 61 one pair

39 9 one pair

7 64 40 12

8 63 one pair

41 11 one pair

10 58 43 6

11 57 one pair

44 5 one pair

12 60 45 8

13 59 one pair

46 7 one pair

14 54 47 2

15 53 one pair

48 1 one pair

16 56 49 4

W2

17 55 one pair

W2

50 3 one pair


4.1.10 Trunk Cable From H601ATUB to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect H601ATUB to DDF: 75Ω and 120Ω. Both can provide eight E1 interfaces.

I. 75Ω trunk cable from H601ATUB to DDF



4-29

(1) View A (2) DB-68 male connector (3) Main label (4)-(19) Labels W1, W2: Coaxial cables

Figure 4-19 Outline of the 75Ω trunk cable from H601ATUB to DDF

Table 4-25 Pin assignment of the 75Ω trunk cable from H601ATUB to DDF

Conn. X1 Coax. & Serial No. Label Conn. X1 Coax. & Serial

No. Label

34 Tip 50 Tip

33 Ring 1 R0

49 Ring 1 R4

32 Tip 48 Tip

31 Ring 2 T0

47 Ring 2 T4

30 Tip 46 Tip

29 Ring 3 R1

45 Ring 3 R5

28 Tip 44 Tip

27 Ring 4 T1

43 Ring 4 T5

26 Tip 42 Tip

25 Ring 5 R2

41 Ring 5 R6

24 Tip 40 Tip

23 Ring 6 T2

39 Ring 6 T6

22 Tip 38 Tip

21 Ring 7 R3

37 Ring 7 R7

20 Tip 36 Tip

W1

19 Ring 8 T3

W2

35 Ring 8 T7


4-30

II. 120Ω trunk cable from H601ATUB to DDF


(1) View A (2) DB-68 male connector (3) Main label (4)-(19) Labels W1, W2: Communication cables

Figure 4-20 Outline of the 120Ω trunk cable from H601ATUB to DDF

Table 4-26 Pin assignment of the 120Ω trunk cable from H601ATUB to DDF

Conn. X1 Color Label Conn. X1 Color Label

34 red* 50 red**

33 pink

black* R0

49 blue

black** R4

32 red* 48 red**

31 orange

black* T0

47 gray

black** T4

30 red* 46 red***

29 green

black* R1

45 pink

black*** R5

28 red* 44 red***

27 blue

black* T1

43 orange

black*** T5

26 red* 42 red***

25 gray

black* R2

41 green

red*** R6

24 red** 40 red***

23 pink

black**T2

39 blue

black*** T6

22 red** 38 red***

21 orange

black**R3

37 gray

black*** R7

20 red** 36 red***

19 green

black**T3

35 blue

black*** T7


4-31

4.1.11 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H521SDLto DDF

There are two types of E1/SHDSL cable connected H521SDL to DDF: 75Ω and 120Ω. Both can provide four E1 interfaces and four SHDSL interfaces.

I. 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable frome H521SDL to DDF

Figure 4-21 shows the outline of the cable, Table 4-27 and Table 4-28 show the pin assignment.

(1) Heat shrinkable tube (2) Main label (3) Cable connector-DB-68-male W: Coaxial cable W1 Twisted pairs

Figure 4-21 Outline of the 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF

Table 4-27 Pin assignment of the 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF(1)

Conn.X Coax. cable W & Serial No. Label

34 Tip

33 Ring 1 T0

32 Tip

31 Ring 2 R0

30 Tip

29 Ring 3 T1

28 Tip

27 Ring 4 R1

26 Tip

25 Ring 5 T2

24 Tip

23 Ring 6 R2

22 Tip 7 T3


4-32

Conn.X Coax. cable W & Serial No. Label

21 Ring

20 Tip

19 Ring 8 R3

Table 4-28 Pin assignment of the 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF(2)

Conn.X Twisted cable W1 Color Remarks Remarks

42 pink/red*

41 pink/black* one pair H521SDL channel 0

40 orange /red*

39 orange /black* one pair H521SDL channel 1

38 green/red*

37 green/ black * one pair H521SDL channel 2

36 blue/red*

35 blue/ black * one pair H521SDL channel 3

Table 4-29 and Table 4-30 describe the labels on the trunk cable.

Table 4-29 Labels on the 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF(1)


Content T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

Description

Transmit of the

first E1 link

Receive of the

first E1 link

Transmit of the

second E1 link

Receive of the

second E1 link

Transmit of the

third E1 link

Receive of the

third E1 link

Transmit of the fourth E1 link

Receive of the fourth E1 link

Table 4-30 Labels on the 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF(2)

Label Label 9 Label 10 Label 11 Label 12

Content H521SDL channel 0

H521SDL channel 1

H521SDL channel 2 H521SDL channel 3

Description The first SHDSL interface

The second SHDSL interface

The third SHDSL interface

The forth SHDSL interface


4-33

II. 120Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable frome H521SDL to DDF

Figure 4-22 shows the outline of the cable, and Table 4-31 shows the pin assignment of the symmetrical twisted cable W. The pin assignment of the symmetrical twisted cable W1 is the same as the 75Ω trunk cable, as shown in Table 4-28.

(1) Heat shrinkable tube (2) Main label (3) Cable connector-DB-68-male W ,W1 :Twisted pairs

Figure 4-22 Outline of the 120Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF

Table 4-31 Pin assignment of the 120Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF

Conn. X3 Cable W Label

34 white

33 blue one pair T0

32 white

31 orange one pair R0

30 white

29 green one pair T1

28 white

27 brown one pair R1

26 white

25 gray one pair T2

24 red

23 blue one pair R2

22 red

21 orange one pair T3


4-34


20 red

19 green one pair R3

Table 4-29 and Table 4-30 describe the labels of the trunk cable.

4.1.12 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H303HSL to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect the H303HSL to DDF: 75Ω and 120Ω. Both can provide two E1 interfaces and two SHDSL interfaces.

I. 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Figure 4-23 shows the outline of the cable, Table 4-32 and Table 4-33 show the pin assignment.

(1) Heat-shrinkable tube (2) Main label (3) DB-68 male connector (4) View B (5)-(10) Labels 1- 6 W: Coaxial cable W1: Twisted pairs

Figure 4-23 Outline of the 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Table 4-32 Pin assignment of the 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF(1)

Conn. X Coax. W & Serial No. Label

34 Tip

33 Ring 1 Label 1

32 Tip

31 Ring 2 Label 2

30 Tip

29 Ring 3 Label 3


4-35

Conn. X Coax. W & Serial No. Label

28 Tip

27 Ring 4 Label 4

Table 4-33 Pin assignment of the 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (2)

Conn. X Color of the twisted pair W1 Label Remarks

38 pink/red*

37 pink/black* Label 5 One pair

36 orange/red*

35 orange/black* Label 6 One pair

Table 4-34 describes the labels on the cable.

Table 4-34 Labels on the 75ΩE1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Label Label 1 Label 2 Label 3 Label 4 Label 5 Label 6

Contents T0 R0 T1 R1 H303HSL channel 0

H303HSL channel 1

Description Transmitting end of the

first E1

Receiving end of the

first E1

Transmitting end of the second E1

Receiving end of the second E1

First SHDSL

Second SHDSL

II. 120Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Figure 4-24 shows the outline of the trunk cable, and Table 4-35 shows the pin assignment of the symmetrical twisted cable W. The pin assignment of the symmetrical twisted cable W1 is the same as the 75Ω trunk cable, as shown in Table 4-33.


4-36

(1) Heat-shrinkable tube (2) Main label (3) DB-68 male connector (4) View B (5)-(10) Labels 1– 6 W: Twisted pairs W1: Twisted pairs

Figure 4-24 Outline of the 120ΩE1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Table 4-35 Pin assignment of the 120Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Conn. X Coaxial cable W Label

34 White

33 Blue One pair Label 1

32 White

31 Orange One pair Label 2

30 White

29 Green One pair Label 3

28 White

27 Brown One pair Label 4


4.1.13 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1: 75Ω and 120Ω. Both can provide two E1 interfaces and two SHDSL interfaces.


4-37

I. 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Figure 4-25 shows the outline of the trunk cable, Table 4-36 and Table 4-37 show the pin assignment.

(1) View A (2) Side C (without shell) (3) 2-mm-long FB connector (4) Cable tie (5) Heat-shrinkable tube (6) Main label (7) DB-68 male connector (8) View B (9)-(10) Labels 1- 2 W: Coaxial cable W1: Twisted pairs

Figure 4-25 Outline of the 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Table 4-36 Pin assignment of the 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1 (1)

Conn. X Coaxial cable W & Serial No. Conn. X1

34 Tip d3

33 Ring 1

d4

32 Tip a6

31 Ring 2

a5

30 Tip d1

29 Ring 3

d2

28 Tip a4

27 Ring 4

a3


4-38

Table 4-37 Pin assignment of the 75ΩE1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1 (2)

Conn. X Color of twisted pairs W1 Label Remarks

38 pink/red*

37 pink/black* Label 1 One pair

36 orange/red*

35 orange/black* Label 2 One pair

Table 4-38 describes of the labels on the trunk cable.

Table 4-38 Labels on the 75Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Label Label 5 Label 6

Contents H303HSL channel 0 H303HSL channel 1

Description First SHDSL Second SHDSL

II. 120Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1


(1) View A (2) Side C (without shell) (3) 2-mm-long FB connector (4) Cable tie (5) Heat-shrinkable tube (6) Main label (7) DB-68 male connector (8) View B (9)-(10) labels 1–2 W: Twisted pair W1: Twisted pair

Figure 4-26 Outline of the 120Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1


4-39

Table 4-39 Pin assignment of the 120Ω E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Conn. X Conn. X1 Remarks

34 d3

33 d4 One pair

32 a6

31 a5 One pair

30 d1

29 d2 One pair

28 a4

27 a3 One pair


4.1.14 V.35 DCE/FE1 Trunk Cable From H302HSL to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect the H302HSL to DDF: 75Ω and 120Ω. Both can provide two E1 interfaces and two V.35 interfaces.

I. 75Ω V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF

Figure 4-27 shows the outline of the trunk cable, and Table 4-40 and Table 4-41 show its pin assignment.

(1) View A (2) 34-PIN V.35 connector (3) Screw and nut (4) Main label (5) DB-68 male connector (6) View B (7)-(12) Labels 1–6 W: Coaxial cable; W1, W2: Twisted pairs

Figure 4-27 Outline of the 75Ω V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF


4-40

Table 4-40 Pin assignment of the 75Ω V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF (1)

Conn. X1 Color Conn

. X3 Remar

ks Conn. X2 Color Conn

. X3 Rema

rks

P Yellow 25 P Yellow 41

S Yellow/black 26

One pair S Yellow/blac

k 42 One pair

U Red 28 U Red 44

W Red/black 27 One pair W Red/black 43

One pair

R Brown 33 R Brown 49

T Brown/white 34 One pair T Brown/white 50

One pair

Y Blue/green 30 Y Blue/green 46

AA Blue/yellow 29 One pair AA Blue/yellow 45

One pair

V Blue 32 V Blue 48

X Blue/black 31 One pair X Blue/black 47

One pair

W1

B Green 24

W2

B Green 40

Table 4-41 Pin assignment of the 75Ω V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF (2)

Conn. X3 Coaxial cable & Serial No. Label

22 Tip

21 Ring 1 Label 1

20 Tip

19 Ring 2 Label 2

38 Tip

37 Ring 3 Label 3

36 Tip

35 Ring 4 Label 4



4-41

Table 4-42 Labels on the 75Ω V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF

Label Label 1 Label 2 Label 3 Label 4 Label 5 Label 6

Contents R1 T1 R2 T2 1#V.35 DCE Cable

2#V.35 DCE Cable

Description Receiving end of the

first E1

Transmitting end of the

first E1

Receiving end of the

second E1

Transmitting end of the second E1

First V.35 Second V.35

II. 120Ω V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF


(1) View A (2) 34-PIN V.35 connector (3) Screw and nut (4) Main label (5) DB-68 male connector (6) View B (7)-(12) Labels 1– 6 W: Twisted pair; W1, W2: Twisted pairs

Figure 4-28 Outline of the 120Ω V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF

Table 4-43 Pin assignment of the 120Ω V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF


22 White

21 Blue One pair Label 1

20 White

19 Orange One pair Label 2

38 White

37 Green One pair Label 3


4-42


36 White

35 Brown One pair Label 4


4.2 Subscriber Lines

The subscriber line includes:

shielded subscriber line for 32-port subscriber board (CC0HASL) shielded subscriber line for 16-port subscriber board

(CC09ASL/CC01CDI/CB02VFB/H601SDLA) shielded subscriber line for 8-port subscriber board (CB03DSL) ATIA subscriber line CSLA subscriber line ADLA subscriber line

4.2.1 Shielded Subscriber Line for 32-port Subscriber Board

Figure 4-29 shows the outline of this shielded subscriber line.

(1) View A (2) DB-68 male connector (3) Label (4) Cable tie (5) Heat shrinkable tube W: Communication cable

Figure 4-29 Outline of the shielded subscriber line for the 32-port subscriber board

Since the colors and patterns of the cable cores are different, it is easy to distinguish subscriber ports according to their cable cores. Table 4-44 shows its pin assignment.


4-43

Table 4-44 Pin assignment of the shielded subscriber line for the 32-port subscriber board

Conn.X1 Cable Color Conn.X1 Cable Color

34 Red* 16 Red****

33 Pink

Black* 15 Orange

Black****

32 Red* 14 Red****

31 Orange

Black* 13 Green

Black****

30 Red* 12 Red****

29 Green

Black* 11 Blue

Black****

28 Red* 10 Red****

27 Blue

Black* 9 Gray

Black****

26 Red* 8 Red*****

25 Gray

Black* 7 Pink

Black*****

24 Red** 6 Red*****

23 Pink

Black** 5 Orange

Black*****

22 Red** 4 Red*****

21 Orange

Black** 3 Green

Black*****

20 Red** 2 Red*****

19 Green

Black** 1 Blue

Black*****

68 Red** 50 Red*****

67 Blue

Black** 49 Gray

Black*****

66 Red** 48 Red-

65 Gray

Black** 47 Pink

Black-

64 Red*** 46 Red-

63 Pink

Black*** 45 Orange

Black-

62 Red*** 44 Red-

61 Orange

Black*** 43 Green

Black-

60 Red*** 42 Red-

59 Green

Black*** 41 Blue

Black-

58 Red*** 40 Red-

57 Blue

Black*** 39 Gray

Black-

56 Red*** 38 Red--

55 Gray

Black*** 37 Pink

Black--

54 Pink Red**** 36 Blue Red--


4-44


53 Pink Black**** 35 Blue Black--

In the column of “Cable Color” of Table 4-44:

The left sub-column indicates the color of the cable. The right sub-column indicates the color of dotted line or short line on the sheath of

the cable. “*” indicates the number of dotted lines. “-” indicates the number of short lines.


The outline of the shielded subscriber line for the 16-port subscriber board is almost the same as that for the 32-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.

The difference between these two subscriber lines is that the former uses 32-core communication cable, and the latter uses 64-core communication cable. Table 4-45 shows its pin assignment.



34 Red* 50 Red**

33 Pink

Black* 49 Blue

Black**

32 Red* 48 Red**

31 Orange

Black* 47 Gray

Black**

30 Red* 46 Red***

29 Green

Black* 45 Pink

Black***

28 Red* 44 Red***

27 Blue

Black* 43 Orange

Black***

26 Red* 42 Red***

25 Gray

Black* 41 Green

Black***

24 Red** 40 Red***

23 Pink

Black** 39 Blue

Black***

22 Red** 38 Red***

21 Orange

Black** 37 Gray

Black***

20 Red** 36 Red****

19 Green

Black** 35 Blue

Black****


4-45

The CC0ICDI board provides 16 direct-dial-in subscriber interfaces.

The CB02VFB also uses the 16-port subscriber line to provide 16 2-wire VF ports or eight 4-wire VF ports. One 4-wire port consists of two adjacent 2-wire ports.


The outline of the shielded subscriber line for the 8-port subscriber board is almost the same as that for 32-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.

The difference between these two subscriber lines is that the former uses 16-core communication cable. Table 4-46 shows its pin assignment.



34 Red* 26 Red*

33 Pink

Black* 25 Gray

Black*

32 Red* 24 Red**

31 Orange

Black* 23 Orange

Black**

30 Red* 22 Red**

29 Green

Black* 21 Green

Black**

28 Red* 20 Red**

27 Blue

Black* 19 Blue

Black**

4.2.4 ATIA Communication Cable

The outline of the ATIA communication cable is almost the same as that of the shielded subscriber line for the 32-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.

The difference between these two subscriber lines is that the former can provide 32 pairs of subscriber lines, but only 24 pairs will be used. Table 4-47 shows its pin assignment.


4-46

Table 4-47 Pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber line

Conn.X1 Cable Color Conn.

X1 Cable Color Conn.X1 Cable Color

34 Red* 33 Red*** 8 Red*****

32 Pink

Black* 31 Pink

Black*** 7 Pink

Black*****

30 Red* 29 Red*** 6 Red*****

28 Orange

Black* 27 Orange

Black*** 5 Orange Black*****

26 Red* 25 Red*** 4 Red*****

24 Green

Black* 23 Green

Black*** 3 Green Black*****

22 Red* 21 Red*** 2 Red*****

20 Blue

Black* 19 Blue

Black*** 1 Blue

Black*****

68 Red** 50 Red**** 49 Red-

67 Pink Black*

* 48 Pink

Black**** 47 Pink

Black-

66 Red** 46 Red**** 45 Red-

65 Orange Black*

* 44 Orange

Black**** 43 Orange Black-

64 Red** 42 Red**** 41 Red-

63 Green Black*

* 40 Green

Black**** 39 Green Black-

62 Red** 38 Red**** 37 Red-

61 Blue Black*

* 36 Blue

Black**** 35 Blue

Black-

4.2.5 ADLA Subscriber Line

The outline of the subscriber line for H601ADLA is the same as that of the shielded subscriber line for the 32-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.

Table 4-44 shows its pin assignment. The first 16 ports are ADSL subscriber ports; the last 16 ports are POTS subscriber ports.

4.2.6 ADMB/ADMC Subscriber Line

The outline of the subscriber line for H601ADMB/ADMC is the same as that of the shielded subscriber line for the 32-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.


4-47

Table 4-44 shows its pin assignment. The first 16 ports are ADSL subscriber ports; the last 16 ports are POTS subscriber ports.

4.2.7 CSLA Subscriber Line

The outline of the subscriber line for the H601CSLA is the same as that of the shielded subscriber line for 16-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.

Table 4-45 shows its pin assignment.

4.2.8 SDLA Subscriber Line

The outline of the subscriber line for the H601SDLA is the same as that of the shielded subscriber line for 16-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.


4.2.9 VDLA Subscriber Line

The outline of the subscriber line for the H601VDLA is the same as that of the shielded subscriber line for 16-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.


4.3 Maintenance Cables and Network Cables

4.3.1 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable

The serial port cable is front accessed for the debugging and remote maintenance. One end of the cable is an 8-PIN RJ-45 connector, connected to the board. The other end is a DB-9 or DB-25 female connector. To be connected with the

computer, the DB-9 female connector should be used.

Figure 4-30 shows the outline of the serial port cable.


4-48

(1) View A (2) DB-25 connector (3) Label (4) Network interface connector (5) View B (6) Side C (7) DB-9 connector W1, W2: Communication cables

Figure 4-30 Outline of local maintenance serial port cable


Table 4-48 Pin assignment of the local maintenance serial port cable

Connector Relationship

X2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Shell

X1 5 6 3 1 7 2 20 4 Shell

X3 8 6 2 5 1 3 4 7 Shell

4.3.2 Network Cable

There are two types of network cables: straight through cable and cross over cable.

The straight through cable is used to connect the data terminal equipment (DTE) with the network.

The cross over cable is used to directly connect two maintenance terminals.

These two types of network cables have the same structure and use the RJ-45 connector at both ends. Figure 4-31 shows the outline of the straight through cable.

Figure 4-31 Outline of straight through cable


4-49

The straight through cable has different pin assignment from the cross-over cable. Refer to the following description:

The line sequences at two ends of the straight through cable are completely the same. The pin assignment of the eight pins of Connectors X1 is consistent with that of Connectors X1. See Table 4-49.

Table 4-49 Pin assignment of the straight through cable

Connector X1 8-core category 5 twisted pair Connector X2

Pin 1 White (Orange) Pin 1

Pin 2 Orange Pin 2

Pin 3 White (Green) Pin 3

Pin 4 Blue Pin 4

Pin 5 White (Blue) Pin 5

Pin 6 Green Pin 6

Pin 7 White (Brown) Pin 7

Pin 8 Brown Pin 8

However, the line sequences at two ends of the cross-over cable are “crossed” to some extent. Table 4-50 shows its pin assignment.

Table 4-50 Pin assignment of the cross-over cable

Connector X1 8-core category 5 twisted pair Connector X2


Pin 2 Orange Pin 6


Pin 4 Blue Pin 4


Pin 6 Green Pin 2


Pin 8 Brown Pin 8

RJ-45 connectors are used to connect Ethernet interfaces. They can be connected with Category-3 and Category-5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs (UTP-3 and UTP-5) or Shielded Twisted Pair (STP).


4-50

Caution:

For the Category-5 UTP, the maximum transmission distance of single segment without repeater is 100 m. When the repeaters are used, the maximum space between repeaters is 5 m. Due to the delay and signal timing, a maximum of two repeaters can be used. Therefore, the maximum distance between two sites is 205 m.

To get the best electrical transmission characteristics, make sure that 1 and 2, 3 and 6 are just two cable cores of the twisted pair.

4.4 Signal Cables

4.4.1 HW Cable

One end of the HW cable is a DB-100 connector, and the other end has two DB-50 connectors. The cables from these two DB-50 connectors do not necessarily have the same length. Figure 4-32 shows the outline of this cable, and Table 4-51 shows its pin assignment.

(1) DB-100 male connector (2) Main label (3) Label 1 (4) Label 2 (5) DB-50-male connector

Figure 4-32 Outline of the HW cable

Table 4-51 Pin assignment of the HW cable

Conn. X1

Conn. X2

Remarks

Conn. X1

Conn. X2

Remarks

Conn. X1

Conn. X2 Remarks

1 1 17 9 35 18

2 26 One pair

18 34 One pair 36 43

One pair


4-51

Conn. X1

Conn. X2

Remarks

Conn. X1

Conn. X2

Remarks

Conn. X1

Conn. X2 Remarks

3 2 19 10 37 19

4 27 One pair

20 35 One pair 38 44

One pair

5 3 21 11 39 20

6 28 One pair

22 36 One pair 40 45

One pair

7 4 23 12 41 21

8 29 One pair

24 37 One pair 42 46

One pair

9 5 27 14 43 22

10 30 One pair

28 39 One pair 44 47

One pair

11 6 29 15 45 23

12 31 One pair

30 40 One pair 46 48

One pair

13 7 31 16 47 24

14 32 One pair

32 41 One pair 48 49

One pair

15 8 33 17 49 25

16 33 One pair

34 42 One pair 49 25

One pair

Conn. X1

Conn. X2

Remarks

Conn. X1

Conn. X2

Remarks

Conn. X1

Conn. X2 Remarks

51 1 67 9 85 18

52 26 One pair

68 34 One pair 86 43

One pair

53 2 69 10 87 19

54 27 One pair

70 35 One pair 88 44

One pair

55 3 71 11 89 20

56 28 One pair

72 36 One pair 90 45

One pair

57 4 73 12 91 21

58 29 One pair

74 37 One pair 92 46

One pair

59 5 77 14 93 22

60 30 One pair

78 39 One pair 94 47

One pair

61 6 79 15 95 23

62 31 One pair

80 40 One pair 96 48

One pair

63 7 81 16 97 24

64 32 One pair

82 41 One pair 98 49

One pair

65 8 One pair 83 17 One 99 25 One pair


4-52

Conn. X1

Conn. X2

Remarks

Conn. X1

Conn. X2

Remarks

Conn. X1

Conn. X2 Remarks

66 33 84 42 pair 100 50

Table 4-52 shows the contents and descriptions of labels on the HW cable.

Table 4-52 Labels on the HW cable

Label Print Description

Label 1 1#HWC

8HW-1 The cable is connected to a nearer frame.

Label 2 1#HWC

8HW-2 The cable is connected to a farther frame.

4.4.2 Test Alarm Cable

Figure 4-33 shows the outline of test alarm cable, and Table 4-53 shows its pin assignment.

(1) DB-9 male connector (2) Main label W: Communication cable

Figure 4-33 Outline of test alarm cable

Table 4-53 Pin assignment of the test alarm cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Remarks

2 2

6 6 One pair

3 3

7 7 One pair

4 4

8 8 One pair

Hardware Description Manual HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear Access Cable

5-1

Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear Access Cables

5.1 Digital Trunk Cable

5.1.1 IMA E1 Cable From APMA to OptiX155/622H

The OptiX155/622H has two types of E1 interface boards: SS42SP1 and SS42SP2. Accordingly, there are two types of E1 cables connecting APMA to OptiX155/622H, both using the 2mmFB wire connector with 4 × 6 PINs. Each connector in the SS42SP1 board provides two E1 interfaces, while each connector in the SS42SP2 board provides four E1 interfaces.

The 2mmFB connector (J4 and J8) connected with cables at the bottom of the APMA board provides E1 interface. Cable connectors are plugged to pin rows "9–6" and "4–1" of J4/J8, providing eight E1 interfaces totally.

Note:

Pins 1 to 25 of J4/J8 are arranged from the bottom upward.

I. Cable connecting APMA to SS42SP1

There are two types of trunk cables from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1: 75Ω and 120Ω, as shown in Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2.

Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 show the pin assignment.


5-2

(1) View A (2) 2mmFB wire connector -4 × 6 PINs (3) Cable tie (4) Lable 4 (5) Lable 3 (6) Lable 2 (7) Lable 1 (8) Heat shrink tube (9) Main lable (10) Lable 5 (11) Lable 6 (12) 2mmFB wire connector-5 × 4 PINs (13) View B

Figure 5-1 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Table 5-1 Pin assignement of the 8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H (SS42SP1)

Conn. X3 Conn. X5 Remarks Conn. X4 Conn. X6 Remarks

a5 d3 Ring a5 d3 Ring

a6 e3 Tip 9

a6 e3 Tip 13

d4 a3 Ring d4 a3 Ring

d3 b3 Tip 10

d3 b3 Tip 14


a4 e1 Tip 11

a4 e1 Tip 15


d1 b1 Tip 12

d1 b1 Tip 16



a6 e4 Tip 1

a6 e4 Tip 5


d3 b4 Tip 2

d3 b4 Tip 6

a3 d2 Ring 3 a3 d2 Ring 7

a4 e2 Tip 3 a4 e2 Tip 7


d1 b2 Tip 4

d1 b2 Tip 8


5-3

(1) View A (2) 2mmFB wire connector -4 × 6 PINs (3) Cable tie (4) Label 4 (5) Label 3 (6) Label 2 (7) Label1 (8) Heat shrink tube (9) Main label (L) (10) Label 5 (11) Label 6 (12) 2mmFB wire connector-5 × 4 PINs (13) View B

Figure 5-2 Outline of the8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Table 5-2 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1


a5 d3 a5 d3

a6 e3 One pair

a6 e3 One pair

d4 a3 One pair d4 a3 One pair

d3 b3 One pair d3 b3 One pair

a3 d1 a3 d1

a4 e1 One pair

a4 e1 One pair

d2 a1 d2 a1

d1 b1 One pair

d1 b1 One pair


a5 d4 a5 d4

a6 e4 One pair

a6 e4 One pair

d4 a4 One pair d4 a4 One pair

d3 b4 One pair d3 b4 One pair

a3 d2 a3 d2

a4 e2 One pair

a4 e2 One pair

d2 a2 d2 a2

d1 b2 One pair

d1 b2 One pair


5-4

II. Cable connecting APMA to SS42SP2

There are two types of trunk cables from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1: 75Ω and 120Ω, as shown in Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4.


(1) View A (2) Cable tie (3) Label 1 (4) Label 2 (5) Heat shrink tube (6) Main label (L) (7) Label 3 (8) Label 4 (9) View B

Figure 5-3 Outline of the8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2



a6 d3 Ring 9 a2 d3 Ring

b6 e3 Tip 9 a3 e3 Tip 13


c6 b3 Tip 10

d3 b3 Tip 14

a4 d1 Ring b1 d1 Ring

a5 e1 Tip 11

a1 e1 Tip 15

d4 a1 Ring c1 a1 Ring

d5 b1 Tip 12

d1 b1 Tip 16



b6 e4 Tip 1

a3 e4 Tip 5


c6 b4 Tip 2

d3 b4 Tip 6

a4 d2 Ring 3 b1 d2 Ring 7


5-5


a5 e2 Tip a1 e2 Tip


d5 b2 Tip 4

d1 b2 Tip 8


Figure 5-4 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2



a6 d3 a2 d3

b6 e3 One pair

a3 e3 One pair

d6 a3 d2 a3

c6 b3 One pair

d3 b3 One pair

a4 d1 b1 d1

a5 e1 One pair

a1 e1 One pair

d4 a1 c1 a1

d5 b1 One pair

d1 b1 One pair


a6 d4 a2 d4

b6 e4 One pair

a3 e4 One pair

d6 a4 d2 a4

c6 b4 One pair

d3 b4 One pair


5-6


a4 d12 b1 d12

a5 e2 One pair

a1 e2 One pair

d4 a2 c1 a2

d5 b2 One pair

d1 b2 One pair

5.1.2 IMA E1 Cable From APMA to OptiX155C (H601ATU)

There are two types of trunk cables from APMA to OptiX155C (H601ATU): 75Ω and 120Ω, as shown in Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6.



Figure 5-5 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to H601ATU

Table 5-5 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to H601ATU


c2 d3 Ring c6 d3 Ring

a2 e3 Tip 9

a6 e3 Tip 13

c1 a3 Ring c5 a3 Ring

a1 b3 Tip 10

a5 b3 Tip 14


a4 e1 Tip 11

a8 e1 Tip 15

c3 a1 Ring 12 c7 a1 Ring 16

a3 b1 Tip 12 a7 b1 Tip 16


5-7



a2 e4 Tip 1

a6 e4 Tip 5


a1 b4 Tip 2

a5 b4 Tip 6


a4 e2 Tip 3

a8 e2 Tip 7


a3 b2 Tip 4

a7 b2 Tip 8


Figure 5-6 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from APMA to H601ATU

Table 5-6 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from APMA to H601ATU


c2 d3 c6 d3

a2 e3 One pair

a6 e3 One pair

c1 a3 c5 a3

a1 b3 One pair

a5 b3 One pair

c4 d1 c8 d1

a4 e1 One pair

a8 e1 One pair

c3 a1 c7 a1

a3 b1 One pair

a7 b1 One pair


5-8


c2 d4 c6 d4

a2 e4 One pair

a6 e4 One pair

c1 a4 c5 a4

a1 b4 One pair

a5 b4 One pair

c4 d2 c8 d2

a4 e2 One pair

a8 e2 One pair

c3 a2 c7 a2

a3 b2 One pair

a7 b2 One pair

5.1.3 Cable From APMA to OptiX 155/622B

There are two types of trunk cables from APMA to OptiX 155/622B: 75Ω and 120Ω, as shown in Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8.



Figure 5-7 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622B

Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622B


b4 d3 Ring 9 b2 d3 Ring 13

a4 e3 Tip 9 a2 e3 Tip 13

e4 a3 Ring e2 a3 Ring

d4 b3 Tip 10

d2 b3 Tip 14

b3 d1 Ring 11 b1 d1 Ring 15


5-9


a3 e1 Tip a1 e1 Tip


d3 b1 Tip 12

d1 b1 Tip 16


b4 d4 Ring b2 d4 Ring

a4 e4 Tip 1

a2 e4 Tip 5


d4 b4 Tip 2

d2 b4 Tip 6

b3 d2 Ring b1 d2 Ring

a3 e2 Tip 3

a1 e2 Tip 7

e3 a2 Ring 4 e1 a2 Ring

d3 b2 Tip 4 d1 b2 Tip 8


Figure 5-8 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622B

Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622B


b4 d3 b2 d3

a4 e3 One pair

a2 e3 One pair

e4 a3 e2 a3

d4 b3 One pair

d2 b3 One pair


5-10


b3 d1 b1 d1

a3 e1 One pair

a1 e1 One pair

e3 a1 e1 a1

d3 b1 One pair

d1 b1 One pair

Conn. X1 Conn. X3 Remarks Conn. X1 Connector .X4 Remarks

b4 d4 b2 d4

a4 e4 One pair

a2 e4 One pair

e4 a4 e2 a4

d4 b4 One pair

d2 b4 One pair

b3 d2 b1 d2

a3 e2 One pair

a1 e2 One pair

e3 a2 e1 a2

d3 b2 One pair

d1 b2 One pair

5.1.4 Cable From APMA to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables from APMA to DDF: 75Ω and 120Ω, both have five scales: 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m and 50 m, as shown in Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10.


(1) Label 1 (2) Label 16 (3) Main label (4) Label 17 (5) Label 18 (6) Cable tie (7) Heat shrink tube (8) 2mmFB wire connector (9) View B

Figure 5-9 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to DDF


5-11

Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to DDF

Conn. X1 Remarks Conn. X1 Remarks

a1 Ring d1 Ring

b1 Tip 7

e1 Tip 8

a2 Ring d2 Ring

b2 Tip 3

e2 Tip 4

a3 Ring d3 Ring

b3 Tip 5

e3 Tip 6

a4 Ring d4 Ring

b4 Tip 1

e4 Tip 2


a1 Ring d1 Ring

b1 Tip 7

e1 Tip 8

a2 Ring d2 Ring

b2 Tip 3

e2 Tip 4

a3 Ring 5 d3 Ring

b3 Tip 5 e3 Tip 6

a4 Ring d4 Ring

b4 Tip 1

e4 Tip 2

(1) Label 1 (2) Label 16 (3) Main label (4) Heat shrink tube (5) Label 17 (6) Label 18 (7) Cable tie (8) 2 mm FB wire connector (9) View B

Figure 5-10 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from APMA to DDF


5-12

Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from APMA to DDF

Conn. X1 Cable W Remarks Conn. X1 Cable W Remarks

a1 Pink/Red*** d1 Orange/Red***

b1 Pink/Black***One pair

e1 Orange/Black*** One pair

a2 Green/Red* d2 Blue/Red*

b2 Green/Black*One pair

e2 Blue/Black* One pair

a3 Blue/Red** d3 Gray/Red**

b3 Blue/Black** One pair

e3 Gray/Black** One pair

a4 Pink/Red* d4 Orange/Red*

b4 Pink/Black* One pair

e4 Orange/Black* One pair

Conn. X2 Cable W Remarks Conn. X2 Cable W Remarks

a1 Gray/Red*** d1 Blue/Red****

b1 Gray/Black*** One pair

e1 Blue/Black**** One pair

a2 Orange/Red** d2 Green/Red**

b2 Orange/Black**One pair

e2 Green/Black** One pair

a3 Green/Red*** d3 Blue/Red***

b3 Green/Black*** One pair

e3 Blue/Black*** One pair

a4 Gray/Red* d4 Pink/Red**

b4 Gray/Black* One pair

e4 Pink/Black** One pair

5.1.5 Cable From APMA to MD5500 E8IT

Figure 5-11 shows the 4-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable connecting APMA to E8IT. It is used to connect with the upstream equipment for test. For example, to connect the AMPA to the E8IT subboard of the MD5500 directly.


5-13

(1) View A (2) Cable tie (3) Heat shrink tube (4) Main label (L) (5) View B

Figure 5-11 Outline of the 4-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to E8IT


Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the 4-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from APMA to E8IT

Conn. X1 Coax.&Serial No. Conn. X2 Conn. X1 Coax.&Serial No. Conn. X2

a4 Ring 31 a3 Ring 43

b4 Tip 1

30 b3 Tip 5

42

d4 Ring 3 d3 Ring 15

e4 Tip 2

2 e3 Tip 6

14

a2 Ring 37 a1 Ring 49

b2 Tip 3

36 b1 Tip 7

48

d2 Ring 9 d1 Ring 21

e2 Tip 4

8 e1 Tip 8

20

5.1.6 CES E1 Cable From PV8 to APMA

There are two types of CES E1 cables from PV8 to APMA: 75Ω and 120Ω, as shown in Figure 5-12 and Figure 5-13.



5-14

(1) View A (2) Label 1 (3) Label 2 (4) Cable tie (5) Main label 1 (6) Heat shrink tube (7) Main label 2 (8) Label 3 (9) Label 4 (10) View B

Figure 5-12 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from PV8 to APMA

Table 5-12 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from PV8 to APMA


a1 a4 Ring a1 a3 Ring

c1 b4 1

Tip c1 b4 1

Tip


c3 e4 2

Tip c3 e4 2

Tip


c5 b2 3

Tip c5 b2 3

Tip


c7 e2 4

Tip c7 e2 4

Tip


c2 b3 5

Tip c2 b3 5

Tip


c4 e3 6

Tip c4 e3 6

Tip


c6 b1 7

Tip c6 b1 7

Tip


c8 e1 8

Tip c8 e1 8

Tip


5-15

(1) View A (2) Label 1 (3) Label 2 (4) Cable tie (5) Main label 1 (6) Main label 2 (7) Label 3 (8) Label 4 (9) View B

Figure 5-13 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from PV8 to APMA

Table 5-13 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from PV8 to APMA


a1 a4 a1 a3

c1 b4 One pair

c1 b4 One pair

a3 d4 a3 d4

c3 e4 One pair

c3 e4 One pair

a5 a2 a5 a2

c5 b2 One pair

c5 b2 One pair

a7 d2 a7 d2

c7 e2 One pair

c7 e2 One pair

a2 a3 a2 a3

c2 b3 One pair

c2 b3 One pair

a4 d3 a4 d3

c4 e3 One pair

c4 e3 One pair

a6 a1 a6 a1

c6 b1 One pair

c6 b1 One pair

a8 d1 One pair a8 d1 One pair

5.1.7 CES E1 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to APMA

There are two types of CES E1 cables from PV4/RSP0 to APMA: 75Ω and 120Ω, as shown in Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15.



5-16

(1) View A (2) Label 1 (3) Label 2 (4) Label 3 (5) Label 4 (6) Heat shrink tube (7) Main label 1 (8) Cable tie (9) Label 5 (10) Main label 2 (11) Label 6 (12) View B

Figure 5-14 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to APMA

Table 5-14 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to APMA



c1 b4 1

Tip c1 b3 5

Tip


c3 e4 2

Tip c3 e3 6

Tip

a5 a2 3 Ring a5 a1 7 Ring

c5 b2 3 Tip c5 b1 7 Tip


c7 e2 4

Tip c7 e1 8

Tip



c1 b4 1

Tip c1 b3 5

Tip


c3 e4 2

Tip c3 e3 6

Tip


c5 b2 3

Tip c5 b1 7

Tip


c7 e2 4

Tip c7 e1 8

Tip


5-17

(1) View A (2) Label 1 (3) Label 2 (4) Label 3 (5) Label 4 (6) Heat shrink tube (7) Main label 1 (8) Cable tie (9) Label 5 (10) Main label 2 (11) Label 6 (12) View B

Figure 5-15 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to APMA

Table 5-15 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to APMA


a1 a4 a1 a3

c1 b4 One pair

c1 b3 One pair

a3 d4 a3 d3

c3 e4 One pair

c3 e3 One pair

a5 a2 a5 a1

c5 b2 One pair

c5 b1 One pair

a7 d2 One pair a7 d1 One pair

c7 e2 One pair c7 e1 One pair


a1 a4 a1 a3

c1 b4 One pair

c1 b3 One pair

a3 d4 a3 d3

c3 e4 One pair

c3 e3 One pair

a5 a2 a5 a1

c5 b2 One pair

c5 b1 One pair

a7 d2 a7 d1

c7 e2 One pair

c7 e1 One pair


5-18

5.1.8 IPMA Subtending Cable

The IPMA subtending cables consists of the cable connecting the master frame (as shown in Figure 5-16) and the cable connecting the slave frame (as shown in Figure 5-17).

X2

W1

W2X1

A

A

X3

B

B

(2) (4)

(5)

(6)

(1)

(3)

(7)

(1) Power connector (2) Cable tie (3) Heat shrink tube (4) Main label HUBM (1–4)/(6–9) PINs (5) Label 1: 1#FE (6) Label 2: 2#FE (7) Network interface connector W1 and W2: twisted pair

Figure 5-16 IPMA subtending cable connecting with master frame


Table 5-16 Pin assignment of IPMA subtending cable connecting with master frame

Cable X1 X2 Color Cable X1 X3 Color

b4 3 Blue b2 1 Blue

a4 2 White/Blue a2 2 White/Blue

e4 3 Green e2 3 Green W1

d4 6 White/Green

W2

d2 6 White/Green


5-19

X2

W1

W2

X1

A

A

(2)

(4) (5) (6)

X3

B

B

(1)

(3)

(7)

(1) Network interface connector (2) Label 1: 1#FE (3) Label 2: 2#FE (4) Main label HUBS (1–4)/(6–9) PINs (5) Heat shrink tube (6) Cable tie (7) Power connector W1 and W2: twisted pair

Figure 5-17 IPMA subtending cable connecting with slave frame

Table 5-17shows its pin assignment.

Table 5-17 Pin assignment of IPMA subtending cable connecting with slave frame

Cable X1 X3 Color Remarks Cable X2 X3 Color Remar

ks

3 b4 Blue RX0+ 3 b2 Blue RX1+

6 a4 White/Blue RX0- 6 a2 White/Blue RX1-

1 e4 Green TX0+ 1 e2 Green TX1+ W1

2 d4 White/Green TX0-

W2

2 d2 White/Green TX1-

5.1.9 FE Upstream Cable of IPMA

The straight through cable is used as the FE upstream cable of the IPMA.

5.1.10 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622H

The OptiX155/622H has two types of E1 interface boards: SS42SP1 and SS42SP2. Accordingly, there are two types of cables from PV8 to OptiX155/622H, both using the 4 × 6-PIN 2mmFB connector.


5-20

I. Cable connecting PV8 to SS42SP1

(2)

(1) View A (2) Cable tie (3) Label 1 (4) Main label (5) Label 2 (6) View B

Figure 5-18 Outline of the E1 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Table 5-18 shows the pin assignment.

Table 5-18 Pin assignment of the E1 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Conn. X1 Conn. X3 Remarks

a3 a2 Ring

a4 c2 Tip W1

a5 a1 Ring

a6 c1 Tip W2

d1 c4 Ring

d2 a4 Tip W3

d3 c3 Ring

d4 a3 Tip W4


a3 a6 Ring

a4 c6 Tip W5

a5 a5 Ring

a6 c5 Tip W6

d1 c8 Ring

d2 a8 Tip W7

d3 c7 Ring

d4 a7 Tip W8


5-21

II. Cable connecting PV8 to SS42SP2

There are two types of E1 cables from PV8 to SS42SP2: 75Ω and 120Ω, as shown in Figure 5-19 and Figure 5-20.


(1) View A (2) 2mmFB wire connector (3) Cable tie (4) Label (5) Heat shrink tube (6) Wire connector (7) View B (8) C-C(without shell) W: 16-core coaxial cable, W2: communication cable

Figure 5-19 Outline of the 75Ω E1 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

Table 5-19 Pin assignment of the 75Ω E1 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

Conn. X1 Conn. X3 Cable W Conn. X1 Conn. X4 Cable W


b6 c1 Tip a3 c1 Tip


c6 c3 Tip d3 c3 Tip

a4 a5 Ring b1 a5 Ring

a5 c5 Tip a1 c5 Tip


d5 c7 Tip d1 c7 Tip



b6 c2 Tip a3 c2 Tip


c6 c4 Tip d3 c4 Tip

a4 a6 Ring b1 a6 Ring


5-22


a5 c6 Tip a1 c6 Tip


d5 c8 Tip d1 c8 Tip

Table 5-20 Connectors and their labels

Connector Label

X1 1

X2 2

X3 PV8:UP (17–24)

X4 PV8:UP (25–32)

(1) View A (2) 2mmFB wire connector (3) Cable tie (4) Label (5) Wire connector (6) View B W: twisted cable

Figure 5-20 Outline of the 120Ω E1 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

Table 5-21 Pin assignment of the 75Ω E1 trunk cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2


a6 a1 a2 a1

b6 c1 One pair

a3 c1 One pair

d6 a3 d2 a3

c6 c3 One pair

d3 c3 One pair

a4 a5 b1 a5

a5 c5 One pair

a1 c5 One pair

d4 a7 c1 a7

d5 c7 One pair

d1 c7 One pair


5-23


a6 a2 One pair a2 a2 One pair

b6 c2 One pair a3 c2 One pair

d6 a4 d2 a4

c6 c4 One pair

d3 c4 One pair

a4 a6 b1 a6

a5 c6 One pair

a1 c6 One pair

d4 a8 c1 a8

d5 c8 One pair

d1 c8 One pair

Table 5-22 Connectors and their labels

Connector Label

X1 1

X2 2

X3 PV8:UP (17–24)

X4 PV8:UP (25–32)

5.1.11 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622B

Figure 5-21 shows the cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622B.

(1) View A (2) Label 3 (3) Cable tie 2PCS (4) Main label (L) (5) Heat shrink tube (2pcs) L=2 cm (6) Label 1 (7) View B (8) Label 4 (9) Label 2

Figure 5-21 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622B



5-24

Table 5-23 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622B

Conn. X1

Conn. X3

Cable W

Conn. X1

Conn. X4

Cable W

Conn. X2

Conn. X3

Cable W

Conn. X2 Conn. X4 Cabl

e W

a1 a1 a3 a1 a1 a2 a3 a2

b1 c1 One pair b3 c1

One pair b1 c2

One pair b3 c2

One pair

d1 a3 d3 a3 d1 a4 d3 a4

e1 c3 One pair e3 c3

One pair e1 c4

One pair e3 c4

One pair

a2 a5 a4 a5 a2 a6 a4 a6

b2 c5 One pair b4 c5

One pair b2 c6

One pair b4 c6

One pair

d2 a7 d4 a7 d2 a8 d4 a8

e2 c7 One pair e4 c7

One pair e2 c8

One pair e4 c8

One pair

Table 5-24 describes the labels.

Table 5-24 Labels on the 8-E1-interface 120Ω cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622B


1–4E1 5–8E1 PV8: UP (17–24) PV8: UP (25–32)

Note:

The stripped part of the cable is wrapped in a heat shrink tube.

5.1.12 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622

Figure 5-22 shows the cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622.


5-25

(1) View A (2) Label 1 (3) Cable tie (4) Label 2 (5) Heat shrink tube (6) UNC4-40 (7) Main label (8) View B

Figure 5-22 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H


Table 5-25 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120Ω cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622


c1 21 c1 25

a1 22 One pair

a1 26 One pair

c3 3 c3 7

a3 4 One pair

a3 8 One pair

c2 29 c2 33

a2 30 One pair

a2 34 One pair

c4 11 c4 15

a4 12 One pair

a4 16 One pair

c5 23 c5 27

a5 24 One pair

a5 28 One pair

c7 5 c7 9

a7 6 One pair

a7 10 One pair

c6 31 c6 35

a6 32 One pair

a6 36 One pair

c8 13 c8 17

a8 14 One pair

a8 18 One pair



5-26

Table 5-26 Labels on the 8-E1-interface 120Ω cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622

Label 1 Label 2

PV8 UP(17–24) PV8 UP(25–32)

5.1.13 Cables From PV8 to OptiX 155C

The OptiX 155C consists of H301ASU and H302ASU.

I. E1 cable connecting PV8 to H301ASU

Figure 5-23 shows the E1 cable from PV8 to H301ASU.

(1–4) Labels 1 to 4 (5) 3 x 8-PIN wire connector (6) 4 x 6-PIN wire connector W1 and W2: Twisted pairs

Figure 5-23 Outline of the 8-E1-interface cable from PV8 to H301ASU


Table 5-27 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface cable from PV8 to H301ASU

Conn. X1

Conn. X4

Remarks

Conn. X1

Conn. X3

Remarks

Conn. X2

Conn. X4

Remarks

Conn. X2

Conn. X3

Remarks

a1 c3 a5 c3 a1 c4 a5 c4

c1 a3 One pair c5 a3

One pair c1 a4

One pairc5 a4

One pair

a2 c1 a6 c1 a2 c2 a6 c2


One pair c2 a2

One pairc6 a2

One pair

a3 c7 a7 c7 a3 c8 a7 c8


One pair c3 a8

One pairc7 a8

One pair

a4 c5 a8 c5 a4 c6 a8 c6


One pair c4 a6

One pairc8 a6

One pair


5-27


Table 5-28 Labels on the 8-E1-interface cable from PV8 to H301ASU


ASU UP (1–8) ASU DOWN (25–32) PV8 DOWN (25–32) PV8 UP (17–24)

II. E1 cable connecting PV8 to H302ASU

The E1 cable (for E1 interfaces 1-8) from PV8 to H302ASU is the same as the cable connecting PV8 to H301ASU. Figure 5-24 shows the outline of the E1 cable (for E1 interfaces 9–16) from PV8 to H302ASU.

(1) 3x8PIN wire connector (2–5) Labels 1–4 (5) Cable tie (6–7) Labels 5–6 (8) 4 x 8-PIN wire connector W: Twisted pair

Figure 5-24 Outline of the 8-E1-interface cable from PV8 to H302ASU


Table 5-29 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface cable from PV8 to H302ASU


b1 a3 b1 a3

b2 c3 One pair

b2 c3 One pair

b3 a1 b3 a1

b4 c1 One pair

b4 c1 One pair

b5 a7 b5 a7

b6 c7 One pair

b6 c7 One pair

b7 a5 b7 a5

b8 c5 One pair

b8 c5 One pair


5-28


b1 a4 b1 a4

b2 c4 One pair

b2 c4 One pair

b3 a2 b3 a2

b4 c2 One pair

b4 c2 One pair

b5 a8 b5 a8

b6 c8 One pair

b6 c8 One pair

b7 a6 b7 a6

b8 c6 One pair

b8 c6 One pair


Table 5-30 Labels on the 8-E1-interface cable from PV8 to H302ASU

Label Content

Label 1 ASU UP (9-16)

Label 2 ASU UP (25-32)

Label 3 ASU DOWN (1-8)

Label 4 ASU DOWN (17-24)

Label 5 PV8 UP (17-24)

Label 6 PV8 UP (25-32)

5.1.14 Cable From PV8 to B75

Figure 5-25 shows the E1 cable from PV8 to B75.

(1) View A (2) View B

Figure 5-25 Outline of the E1 cable connecting PV8 to B75


5-29


Table 5-31 Pin assignment of the E1 cable from PV8 to B75

Conn. X1 Conn. X2

Remarks

Conn. X1

Conn. X2

Remarks

Conn. X1

Conn. X3

Remarks Conn. X1 Conn. X3 Remarks

3 c1 21 c3 7 c1 25 c3

4 a1 One pair 22 a3

One pair 8 a1

One pair26 a3

One pair

5 c5 23 c7 9 c5 27 c7

6 a5 One pair 24 a7

One pair 10 a5

One pair28 a7

One pair

11 c2 29 c4 15 c2 33 c4

12 a2 One pair 30 a4

One pair 16 a2

One pair34 a4

One pair

13 c6 31 c8 17 c6 35 c8

14 a6 One pair 32 a8

One pair 18 a6

One pair36 a8

One pair

Connect the 37-PIN female connector of the cable to the B75 board, and the AMP connector to the 17th–24th or 25th–32nd rows of pins in the upper HEADER.

5.1.15 Cable From PV8 to DDF

Figure 5-26 shows the cable from PV8 to DDF.

(1) Main label (2) Cable tie (3) Label 1 (4) View A W: coaxial cable

Figure 5-26 Outline of the 75Ω E1 cable from PV8 to DDF



5-30

Table 5-32 Pin assignment of the 75Ω E1 cable from PV8 to DDF


a1 Ring a2 Ring

c1 Tip W.1

c2 Tip W.5

a3 Ring a4 Ring

c3 Tip W.2

c4 Tip W.6

a5 Ring a6 Ring

c5 Tip W.3

c6 Tip W.7

a7 Ring W.4 a8 Ring W.8

c7 Tip W.4 c8 Tip W.8

5.1.16 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H

There are two types of cables from RSP/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H:

Dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1 Dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

Figure 5-27 and Figure 5-28 show the outline of dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H:

One end of the cable is the 4X6PIN 2mmFB connector, connected to the OptiX 155/622H.

The other end is the 4X8PIN AMP connector, connected to the 17th–24th or 25th–32nd rows of pins in the upper HEADER.

I. Dual-E1-interface cable connecting PV4/RSP0 and SS42SP1

Figure 5-27 Outline of the dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1



5-31

Table 5-33 Pin assignment of the dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1


a3 a5

a4 c5 One pair

a5 a1

a6 c1 One pair

d1 c7

d2 a7 One pair

d3 c3

d4 a3 One pair

II. Dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to SS42SP2

(1) View A (2) Cable tie (3) Main label (4) Heat shrink tube (5) C-C (without shell) (6) Heat shrink tube (7) Label 1 (8) Label 2 (9) View B

Figure 5-28 Outline of the dual-E1 cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2


Table 5-34 Pin assignment of the dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

Conn. X Coaxial cable Conn. X1

a6 Ring a1

b6 Tip c1

d6 Ring a3

c6 Tip c3

a4 Ring a5

a5 Tip c5

d4 Ring a7


5-32


d5 Tip c7


a2 Ring a1

a3 Tip c1

d2 Ring a3

d3 Tip c3

b1 Ring a5

a1 Tip c5

c1 Ring a7

d1 Tip c7


Table 5-35 Labels on the dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

Label Print

Label 1 RSP(1):UP(17–24)/(25–32)

Label 2 RSP(2):UP(17–24) /(25–32)

Note:

Bind the cable tie in the direction as illustrated in the figure; Cut off about 200 mm connecting the cable jacket at X end of the connector; Short circuit b2 and b3, b4 and b5, c2 and c3, c4 and c5 in Conn. X with the tip of 32-core subscriber

cable W2.

5.1.17 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622B

Figure 5-29 shows the E1 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622B.


5-33


Figure 5-29 Outline of the E1cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX155/622B


Table 5-36 Pin assignment of the E1 cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX155/622B


a1 a1 a3 a1

b1 c1 One pair

b3 c1 One pair

d1 a3 d3 a3

e1 c3 One pair

e3 c3 One pair

a2 a5 a4 a5

b2 c5 One pair

b4 c5 One pair

d2 a7 d4 a7

e2 c7 One pair

e4 c7 One pair

5.1.18 Cable Connecting PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622

Figure 5-30 shows the E1 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622. The cable has four AMP connectors.


Figure 5-30 Outline of the E1 cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622


5-34


Table 5-37 Pin assignment of the E1 cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622

Conn. X1

Conn. X5

Remarks Conn.

X2 Conn.

X5 Remar

ks Conn.

X3 Conn.

X5 Rema

rksConn.

X4 Conn.

X5 Remar

ks

c1 21 c1 25 c1 29 c1 33

a1 22 One pair a1 26

One pair a1 30

One pair a1 34

One pair

c3 3 c3 7 c3 11 c3 15

a3 4 One pair a3 8

One pair a3 12

One pair a3 16

One pair

c5 23 c5 27 c5 31 c5 35


One pair a5 32

One pair a5 36

One pair

c7 5 c7 9 c7 13 c7 17

a7 6 One pair a7 10

One pair a7 14

One pair a7 18

One pair

The 37-PIN male connector of the cable connects to the OptiX 155/622, and the AMP connector connects to the 17th–24th or 25th–32nd rows of pins of the RSP slot.

5.1.19 Cables From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155C

Figure 5-31 shows the cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155C.

(1) View A (2) Cable tie (3) Label 2 (4) Label 3 (5) View B (6) Label 1

Figure 5-31 Outline of the E1 cable from PV4/RSP0to OptiX 155C


5-35


Table 5-38 Pin assignment of the E1 cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155C


a1 a3 a3 a7

c1 c3 One pair

c3 c7 One pair

a2 a1 a4 a5

c2 c1 One pair

c4 c5 One pair


a5 a3 a7 a7

c5 c3 One pair

c7 c7 One pair

a6 a1 One pair a8 a5 One pair

c6 c1 c8 c5


Table 5-39 Labels on the E1 cable from RSP/PV4 to OptiX 155C

Notes on Label 1 Notes on Label 2 Notes on Label 3

ASU(1–8) DL4925 04026534-V0 XXXXXX RSP1(17–24) RSP2(17–24)

Note:

Cables W1 and W2 are made of cable W.

5.1.20 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to B75

Figure 5-32 shows the E1 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to B75.


5-36


Figure 5-32 Outline of the E1 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to B75


Table 5-40 Pin assignment of the E1 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to B75

Conn. X1

Conn. X5

Remarks

Conn. X2

Conn. X5

Remarks

Conn. X3

Conn. X5

Remarks Conn. X4 Conn. X5 Remark

s

c1 3 c1 7 c1 11 c1 15

a1 4 One pair a1 8

One pair a1 12

One pair a1 16

One pair

c3 21 c3 25 c3 29 c3 33


One pair a3 30

One pair a3 34

One pair

c5 5 c5 9 c5 13 c5 17

a5 6 One pair a5 10

One pair a5 14

One pair a5 18

One pair

c7 23 c7 27 c7 31 c7 35


One pair a7 32

One pair a7 36

One pair

The 37-PIN male connector of the cable connects to the B75 board, and the AMP connector connects to the 17th–24th or 25th–32nd rows of pins of the RSP slot.

5.1.21 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622H

The OptiX 155/622H has two types of E1 interface boards: SS42SP1 and SS42SP2. Accordingly, there are two types of cables from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H, both using the 4 × 6-PIN 2mmFB connector.

Figure 5-33 and Figure 5-34 show the single-E1-interface cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H.


5-37

One end of the cable is the 4 × 6-PIN 2mmFB connector, connected with the OptiX 155/622H.

The other end is the 4X8PIN AMP connector, connected with the 17th–24th or 25th–32nd rows of pins of upper HEADER in the backplane of the subscriber frame.

I. Single-E1-interface cable from RSPA to SS42SP1

A

Figure 5-33 Outline of the single-E1-interface cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1


Table 5-41 Pin assignment of the single-E1-interface cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1


a5 a1

a6 c1 One pair

d3 c3

d4 a3 One pair


a3 a1

a4 c1 One pair

d1 c3

d2 a3 One pair


5-38

II. Single-E1-interface cable from RSPA to SS42SP2

There are two types of single-E1-interface cables from RSPA to SS42SP2: 75Ω and 120Ω, as shown in Figure 5-34 and Figure 5-35.


(1) View A (2) 4 × 6-PIN female connector (3) Cable tie (4) Main label (5) Heat shrink tube (6) 4 × 8-PIN female connector (7) View B (8) D-D (9) C-C (without shell) W: mini coaxial cable, numbers 1–8 are printed on the tip protection layer.

Figure 5-34 Outline of the single-E1-interface 75Ω cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

Table 5-42 Pin assignment of the single-E1-interface 75Ω cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

Conn. X Coax.&Serial No. Conn. X1 Conn. X Coax.&Serial No. Conn. X2

a6 Ring a1 a4 Ring a1

b6 Tip 1

c1 a5 Tip 3

c1

d6 Ring a3 d4 Ring a3

c6 Tip 2

c3 d5 Tip 4

c3

Conn. X Coax.&Serial No. Conn. X3 Conn. X Coax.&Serial No. Conn. X4

a2 Ring a1 b1 Ring a1

a3 Tip 5

c1 a1 Tip 7

c1

d2 Ring a3 c1 Ring a3

d3 Tip 6

c3 d1 Tip 8

c3


5-39

Table 5-43 Connectors and labels

Connector Label

X1 RSP(1)

X2 RSP(2)

X3 RSP(3)

X4 RSP(4)

Note:

Cut off about 200 mm from the cable jacket at X end of the connector; Short circuit b2 and b3, b4 and b5, c2 and c3, c4 and c5 in Conn. X with the tip of 32-core subscriber

cable W2.

(1) View A (2) 4 × 6-PIN female connector (3) Cable tie (4) Main label (5) 3 × 8-PIN female connector (6) View B W: twisted cable

Figure 5-35 Outline of the 120Ω E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

Table 5-44 Pin assignment of the 120Ω E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

Conn. X Conn. X1 Remarks Conn. X Conn. X2 Remarks

a6 a1 a2 a1

b6 c1 one pair

a3 c1 one pair

d6 a3 d2 a3

c6 c3 one pair

d3 c3 one pair

a4 a5 b1 a5

a5 c5 one pair

a1 c5 one pair

d4 a7 c1 a7

d5 c7 one pair

d1 c7 one pair


5-40

Table 5-45 Connectors and labels

Connector Label

X1 RSP(1):UP(17–24)/(25–32)

X2 RSP(2):UP(17–24)/(25–32)

5.1.22 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622B

Figure 5-36 shows the cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622B.

(1) View A (2) Label 4 (3) Cable tie (4) Label 3 (5) Label 2 (6) Label 1 (7) Main label (8) Heat shrink tube (9) View B

Figure 5-36 Outline of the 4-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622B


Table 5-46 Pin assignment of the 4-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622B

Cable X2 X1 Remarks Cable X4 X1 Remarks

a1 a1 a1 a1

c1 b1 one pair

c1 b3 one pair

a3 d1 a3 d3 W1

c3 e1 one pair

W3

c3 e3 one pair


5-41

Cable X3 X1 Remarks Cable X5 X1 Remarks

a1 a2 a1 a41

c1 b2 one pair

c1 b4 one pair

a3 d2 a3 d4 W2

c3 e2 one pair

W4

c3 e4 one pair


Table 5-47 Labels on the 4-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622B

Label Label 1 Label 2 Label 3 Label 4

Content RSPA-1 RSPA-2 RSPA-3 RSPA-4

Note:

When connecting the 4*5 connector, first peel part of the sheath from the cable, then wrap the peeled part with a Heat shrink tube. See Figure 5-45.

5.1.23 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622

There are two types of E1 cables from RSPA to OptiX 155/622: 75Ω and 120Ω.

Figure 5-37 shows the 75Ω E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622. Figure 5-38 shows the 120Ω E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622, which is the

same as the cable connecting RSPA to B75. 1) 75Ω E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622

(1) View A (2) Label 1: RSP (3) Cable tie (4) Main label (5) Label 2: R (6) Label 3: T

Figure 5-37 Outline of the 75Ω E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622


5-42


Table 5-48 Pin assignment of the 75Ω E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622

Conn. X1 Cable Remarks

c1 Tip

a1 W1

Ring Conn. X2

c3 Tip

a3 W2

Ring Conn. X3

2) 120Ω E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622

(1–8) Labels 1–8 (9) Cable tie (10) Main label (11) 37-PIN wire connector (12) Wire connector-4 × 8 PINs W: twisted pair

Figure 5-38 Outline of the 120Ω E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622



5-43

Table 5-49 Pin assignment of the 120Ω E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622

Conn. X1

Conn. X9

Remarks Conn.

X2 Conn.

X9 Remar

ks Conn.

X3 Conn.

X9 Rema

rksConn.

X4 Conn.

X9 Remar

ks

c1 3 c1 5 c1 7 c1 9

a1 4 One pair a1 6

One pair a1 8

One pair a1 10

One pair

c3 21 c3 23 c3 25 c3 27


One pair a3 26

One pair a3 28

One pair

Conn. X5

Conn. X9

Remarks Conn.

X6 Conn.

X9 Remar

ks Conn.

X7 Conn.

X9 Rema

rksConn.

X8 Conn.

X9 Remar

ks

c1 11 c1 13 c1 15 c1 17


One pair a1 16

One pair a1 18

One pair

c3 29 c3 31 c3 33 c3 35


One pair a3 34

One pair a3 36

One pair

The 37-PIN male connector of the cable connects to OptiX155/622, and the AMP connector to the RSP slot.

5.1.24 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155C

There are two types of E1 cables from RSPA to OptiX 155C (H302ASU), according to the cable connection position. Figure 5-39 and Figure 5-40 show the outline of the two types of cables respectively.

(1) 3 x 8-PIN wire connector (1) Label 1 (3) Cable tie (4) Label 2 (5) 4 x 8-PIN wire connector W: Twisted pair

Figure 5-39 Outline (1) of the E1 cable from RSPA to H302ASU

Table 5-50 shows the pin assignment (1).


5-44

Table 5-50 Pin assignment (1) of the E1 cable from RSPA to H302ASU


b1 a3 b5 a3

b2 c3 One pair

b6 c3 One pair

b3 a1 b7 a1

b4 c1 One pair

b8 c1 One pair

Table 5-51 describes the labels on the E1 cable (1).

Table 5-51 Labels (1) on the E1 cable from RSPA to H302ASU

Label Content

Label 1 ASU UP (9–16)/(25–32)

DOWN (1–8)/DOWN (17–24)

Label 2 RSP1 UP (17–24)


(1) 3 x 8-PIN wire connector (2) Cable tie (3–7) Labels 1–5 (8) 4 x 8-PIN wire connector W: Twisted pair

Figure 5-40 Outline (2) of E1 cable from RSPA to H302ASU

Table 5-52 shows the pin assignment of the cable (2).

Table 5-52 Pin assignment (2) of the E1 cable from RSPA to H302ASU


a1 c3 a3 c3

c1 a3 One pair

c3 a3 One pair


5-45


a2 c1 a4 c1

c2 a1 One pair

c4 a1 One pair


a5 c3 a7 c3

c5 a3 One pair

c7 a3 One pair

a6 c1 a8 c1

c6 a1 One pair

c8 a1 One pair

Table 5-53 describes of the labels on the cable (2).

Table 5-53 Labels (2) on the E1 cable from RSPA to H302ASU

Label Content

Label 1 ASU UP (1–8)






5-46

5.1.25 Cable From RSPA to B75

(1–8) Labels 1–8 (9) Cable tie (10) Main label (11) 37-PIN wire connector (12) Wire connector-4 × 8 PINs W: twisted pair

Figure 5-41 Outline of the E1 trunk cable from RSPA to B75


Table 5-54 Pin assignment of the E1 trunk cable from RSPA to B75

Conn. X1

Conn. X9

Remarks Conn.

X2 Conn.

X9 Remar

ks Conn.

X3 Conn.

X9 Rema

rksConn.

X4 Conn.

X9 Remar

ks

c1 3 c1 5 c1 7 c1 9

a1 4 One pair a1 6

One pair a1 8

One pair a1 10

One pair

c3 21 c3 23 c3 25 c3 27


One pair a3 26

One pair a3 28

One pair


5-47

Conn. X5 Conn. X9

Remarks Conn.

X6 Conn.

X9 Remar

ks Conn.

X7 Conn.

X9 Rema

rksConn.

X8 Conn.

X9 Remar

ks

c1 11 c1 13 c1 15 c1 17


One pair a1 16

One pair a1 18

One pair

c3 29 c3 31 c3 33 c3 35


One pair a3 34

One pair a3 36

One pair

The 37-PIN male connector of the cable is connected to the B75 board, and the AMP connector is connected to the RSP slot of subscriber frame.


Table 5-55 Label contents

Label Label1 Label2 Label3 Label4 Label5 Label6 Label7 Label8

Content RSP1 RSP2 RSP3 RSP4 RSP5 RSP6 RSP7 RSP8

5.1.26 16-E1-Interface Cable From ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF

There are two types of 16-E1-interface cables from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF: 75Ω and 120Ω.


5-48

I. 16-E1-interface 75Ω cable from ATUA/AIUA to DDF

Figure 5-42 shows the 16-E1-interface 75Ω cable from ATUA/AIUA to DDF.

(1) A direction (2) 3 × 8-PIN female connector (3) Tie (4) Heat shrink tube (5) Main label (6) Label 1 (7) Label 2 (8) Label 3 (9) Label 4 (10) Label 5 (11) Label 32 (12) Label 33 (13) Label 34 (14) Label 35 (15) Label 36 W: Coaxial cable

Figure 5-42 Outline of the 16-E1-interface 75Ω cable from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF

Table 5-56, Table 5-57 and Table 5-58 show the pin assignment of the cable.

Table 5-56 Pin assignment of the 16-E1-interface 75Ω cable from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF(1)

ConnectorX1

Coax.&Serial No Label ConnectorX

4 Coax.&Serial No Label

a1 Tip a1 Tip

c1 Ring 1 R0

c1 Ring 9 R4

a2 Tip a2 Tip

c2 Ring 2 T0

c2 Ring 10 T4

a3 Tip a3 Tip

c3 Ring 3 R1

c3 Ring 11 R5

a4 Tip a4 Tip

c4 Ring 4 T1

c4 Ring 12 T5

a5 Tip a5 Tip

c5 Ring 5 R2

c5 Ring 13 R6


5-49

ConnectorX1

Coax.&Serial No Label ConnectorX

4 Coax.&Serial No Label

a6 Tip a6 Tip

c6 Ring 6 T2

c6 Ring 14 T6

a7 Tip a7 Tip

c7 Ring 7 R3

c7 Ring 15 R7

a8 Tip a8 Tip

c8 Ring 8 T3

c8 Ring 16 T7


ConnectorX1 Coax.&Serial No Labe

l Connector.X

2 Coax.&Serial

No Label

b1 Ring b1 Ring

b2 Tip 17 R8

b2 Tip 21 R10

b3 Ring b3 Ring

b4 Tip 18 T8

b4 Tip 22 T10

b5 Ring b5 Ring

b6 Tip 19 R9

b6 Tip 23 R11

b7 Ring b7 Ring

b8 Tip 20 T9

b8 Tip 24 T11


ConnectorX3

Coax.&Serial No. Label ConnectorX

4 Coax.&Serial

No. Label

b1 Ring b1 Ring

b2 Tip 25 R12

b2 Tip 29 R14

b3 Ring b3 Ring

b4 Tip 26 T12

b4 Tip 30 T14

b5 Ring b5 Ring

b6 Tip 27 R13

b6 Tip 31 R15

b7 Ring b7 Ring

b8 Tip 28 T13

b8 Tip 32 T15


5-50

Table 5-59 describes Labels 33–36.

Table 5-59 Labels on the 16-E1-interface 75Ω cable from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF

Label Description

Label 33 UP(1–8)

Label 34 UP(9–16)

Label 35 DOWN(17–24)

Label 36 DOWN(25–32)

II. 16-E1-interface 120Ω cable from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF

Figure 5-43 shows the outline of the 16-E1-interface 120Ω cable from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF.

(1) A direction (2) 3 × 8-PIN female connector (3) Tie (4) Heat shrink tube (5) Main label (6) Label 1 (7) Label 2 (8) Label 31 (9) Label 32 (10) Label 33 (11) Label 34 (12) Label 35 (13) Label 36 W1 W2: Symmetrical cables

Figure 5-43 Outline of the 16-E1-interface 120Ω cable from ATUA/AIUA to DDF


5-51

Table 5-60, Table 5-61 and Table 5-62 show the pin assignment.


ConnectorX1 Cable W1 Label ConnectorX4 Cable W1 Label

a1 Pink/Red* a1 Blue/Red**

c1 Pink/Black* R0

c1 Blue/Black** R4

a2 Orange/Red* a2 Gray/Red**

c2 Orange/Black*T0

c2 Gray/Black** T4

a3 Green/Red* a3 Pink/Red***

c3 Green/Black* R1

c3 Pink/Black*** R5

a4 Blue/Red* a4 Orange/Red***

c4 Blue/Black* T1

c4 Orange/Black*** T5

a5 Gray/Red* a5 Green/Red***

c5 Gray/Black* R2

c5 Green/Black*** R6

a6 Pink/Red** a6 Blue/Red***

c6 Pink/Black** T2

c6 Blue/Black*** T6

a7 Orange/Red** a7 Gray/Red***

c7 Orange/Black**R3

c7 Gray/Black*** R7

a8 Green/Red** a8 Blue/Red****

W1

c8 Green/Black** T3

W1

c8 Blue/Black**** T7



b1 Pink/Red* b1 Gray/Red* R10

b2 Pink/Black* R8

b2 Gray/Black*

b3 Orange/Red* b3 Pink/Red** T10

b4 Orange/Black*T8

b4 Pink/Black**

b5 Green/Red* b5 Orange/Red** R11

b6 Green/Black* R9

b6 Orange/Black**

b7 Blue/Red* b7 Green/Red** T11

w2

b8 Blue/Black* T9

w2

b8 Green/Black**


5-52



b1 Blue/Red** b1 Green/Red***

b2 Blue/Black** R12

b2 Green/Black***

R14

b3 Gray/Red** b3 Blue/Red***

b4 Gray/Black** T12

b4 Blue/Black*** T14

b5 Pink/Red*** b5 Gray/Red***

b6 Pink/Black*** R13

b6 Gray/Black*** R15

b7 Orange/Red*** b7 Blue/Red****

W2

b8 Orange/Black***

T13

W2

b8 Blue/Black**** T15


Table 5-63 Labels on the 16-E1-interface 120Ω cable from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF

Label Description

Label 33 UP (1–8)

Label 34 UP (9–16)

Label 35 DOWN (17–24)

Label 36 DOWN (25–32)


5-53

5.1.27 4-E1-interface 75Ω Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF

Figure 5-44 shows the 4-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF.

(1) A direction (2) 3 × 8-PIN female connector (3) Main label (4) Tie (5) Heat shrink tube (6) Label 1 (7) Label 2 (8) Label 3 (9) Label 4 (10) Label 5 (11) Label 6 (12) Label 7 (13) Label 8 W: Coaxial cable

Figure 5-44 Outline of the 75Ω 4-E1-interface trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF


Table 5-64 Pin assignment of the 75Ω 4-E1-interface trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF

Conn. X Coax.&Serial No Label Conn. X Coax.&Serial No Label

a1 Tip a5 Tip

c1 Ring 1 T0

c5 Ring 5 T2

a2 Tip a6 Tip

c2 Ring 2 R0

c6 Ring 6 R2

a3 Tip a7 Tip

c3 Ring 3 T1

c7 Ring 7 T3

a4 Tip a8 Tip

c4 Ring 4 R1

c8 Ring 8 R3


Table 5-65 Labels on the 4-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF


Description T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3


5-54

5.1.28 Cable From H303HSL to OptiX155/622H

The OptiX155/622H has two types of E1 interface boards: SS42SP1 and SS42SP2. Accordingly, there are two types of cables from H303HSL to OptiX155/622H, both using the 4 × 6-PIN 2mmFB connector.

I. Cable from H303HSL to SS42SP1

There are two types of trunk cables from H303HSL to SS42SP1: 75Ω and 120Ω, as shown in Figure 5-45 and Figure 5-46.


(1) View A (2) Wire connector (3) Main label (4) Cable tie (5) 2mmFB wire connector (6) View B W: coaxial cable

Figure 5-45 Outline of the 2-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Table 5-66 Pin assignment of the 2-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Conn. X1 Coaxial cable W and serial No. Conn. X2

a1 Tip d3

c1 Ring 1

d4

a2 Tip a6

c2 Ring 2

a5

a3 Tip d1

c3 Ring 3

d2

a4 Tip a4

c4 Ring 4

a3


5-55

(1) View A (2) Wire connector (3) Main label (4) Cable tie (5) 2mmFB wire connector (6) View B W: communication cable-4-pair (8-core) twisted cable

Figure 5-46 Outline of the 2-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Table 5-67 Pin assignment of the 2-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1


a1 d3

c1 d4 One pair

a2 a6

c2 a5 One pair

a3 d1

c3 d2 One pair

a4 a4

c4 a3 One pair

II. 4-E1-interface cable from H303HSL to SS42SP2

There are two types of trunk cables from H303HSL to SS42SP2: 75Ω and 120Ω, as shown in Figure 5-47 and Figure 5-48.



5-56

(1) View A (2) Wire connector (3) Cable tie (4) Heat shrink tube (5) Main label (6) 2mmFB wire connector (7) View B W: coaxial cable, W1-8: communication cable

Figure 5-47 Outline of the 4-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155622H SS42SP2

Table 5-68 Pin assignment of the 4-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155622H SS42SP2 HSL

Conn. X1 Coaxial cable W and serial No.

Conn. X3 Conn. X2 Coaxial cable W and serial No.

Conn. X3

a1 Tip c6 a1 Tip d3

c1 Ring 1

d6 c1 Ring

5

d2

a2 Tip b6 a2 Tip a3

c2 Ring 2

a6 c2 Ring

6

a2

a3 Tip d5 a3 Tip d1

c3 Ring 3

d4 c3 Ring

7

c1

a4 Tip a5 a4 Tip a1

c4 Ring 4

a4 c4 Ring

8

b1

(1) View A (2) Wire connector (3) Cable tie (4) Heat shrink tube (5) Main label (6) 2mmFB wire connector (7) View B W: communication cable-120Ω twisted cable

Figure 5-48 Outline of the 4-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155622H SS42SP2


5-57

Table 5-69 Pin assignment of the 4-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155622H SS42SP2


a1 c6 a1 d3

c1 d6 One pair

c1 d2 One pair

a2 b6 a2 a3

c2 a6 One pair

c2 a2 One pair

a3 d5 a3 d1

c3 d4 One pair

c3 c1 One pair

a4 a5 a4 a1

c4 a4 One pair

c4 b1 One pair

5.1.29 Trunk Cable From H303HSL to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables from H303HSL to DDF: 75Ω and 120Ω.

I. 75Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Figure 5-49 shows the outline of the 2-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF.

(1) Wire connector (2) Main label (3) Cable tie (4) Heat shrinkable tube (5)-(8) Labels 1-4 W: Communication cable

Figure 5-49 Outline of the 2-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF


Table 5-70 Pin assignment of the 2-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Connector .X1 Coaxial cable W and serial No.

a1 Tip

c1 Ring 1


5-58

Connector .X1 Coaxial cable W and serial No.

a2 Tip

c2 Ring 2

a3 Tip

c3 Ring 3

a4 Tip

c4 Ring 4


Table 5-71 Labels on the 2-E1-interface 75Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Label Content

Label 1 T0

Label 2 R0

Label 3 T1

Label 4 R1

II. 120Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Figure 5-50 shows the outline of 2-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF.

(1) View A (2) Wire connector (3) Main label (4) Cable tie (5) Heat shrink tube (6) Label W: Communication cable-120Ω shielded twisted pair

Figure 5-50 Outline of the 2-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF



5-59

Table 5-72 Pin assignment of the 2-E1-interface 120Ω trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Conn. X1 Cable W Label content

a1 White

c1 Blue T0

a2 White

c2 Orange R0

a3 White

c3 Green T1

a4 White

c4 Brown R1

5.2 Subscriber Line

5.2.1 16-port Subscriber Line

The 16-port subscriber line has 64 cores (32 pairs), which are connected to four AMP connectors. These connectors are plugged in two adjacent subscriber-board slots at the back of the backplane, as follows:

The AMP connectors at the top are plugged into pins 1–8 of the upper HEADER respectively.

The AMP connectors at the bottom are plugged into pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER.


5-60

Figure 5-51 shows the outline of the 16-port subscriber line.

(1) Upper right (2) Lower right (3) Upper left (4) Lower left (5) View A

Figure 5-51 Outline of the 16-port subscriber line


Table 5-73 Pin assignment of the 16-port subscriber line

Conn. X1 Color Conn. X2 Color Conn. X3 Color Conn. X4 Color

a1 Red* a1 Red** a1 Red**** a1 Red*(ful

l)

c1 Pink

Black* c1

Blue Black** c1

Orange Black***

* c1 Grey Black*

(full)

a2 Red* a2 Red** a2 Red**** a2 Red

c2

Orange Black

* c2 Grey

Black** c2

GreenBlack**** c2

Pink Black

a3 Red* a3 Red*** a3 Red**** a3 Red

c3 Green

Black* c3

Pink Black*** c3

Blue Black**** c3

Orange

Black

a4 Red* a4 Red*** a4 Red**** a4 Red

c4 Blue

Black* c4

Orange Blac

k*** c4 Grey

Black**** c4

Green Black

a5 Grey Red* a5 Green Red*** a5 Pink Red*(full

) a5 Blue Red


5-61

Conn. X1 Color Conn. X2 Color Conn. X3 Color Conn. X4 Color

c5 Black

* c5 Blac

k*** c5 Black*

(full) c5

Black

a6 Red** a6 Red*** a6 Red*(full

) a6 Red

c6 Pink

Black** c6

Blue Black*** c6

Orange Black*

(full) c6

Grey Black

a7 Red** a7 Red*** a7 Red*(full

) a7 Red

c7

Orange Black

** c7 Grey

Black*** c7

Green Black*

(full) c7

Pink Black

a8 Red** a8 Red**** a8 Red*(full

) a8 Red

c8 Green

Black** c8

Pink Black**** c8

Blue Black*

(full) c8

Blue Black

5.2.2 32-port Subscriber Line

The 32-port subscriber line has 64 cores, which are connected to four AMP connectors respectively. These connectors are plugged in two adjacent subscriber slots at the back of the backplane, as follows.

Two longer lines are plugged in pins 1–8 and pins 9–16 of the upper HEADER respectively.

The other two lines are plugged in pins 17–24 and pins 25–32 of the lower HEADER respectively.

The pin assignment is different from that of the 16-port subscriber board. Figure 5-52 shows the outline of the 32-port subscriber line.


5-62

(1) View A

Figure 5-52 Outline of the 32-port subscriber line


Table 5-74 Pin assignment of the 32-port subscriber line

Connect-orX1.1 Color Connecto

rX1.2 Color ConnectorX1.3 Color Connec-

torX1.4 Color

a1 Red* b1 Red*** b1 Red***

* b1 Red*(full)

c1 Pink

Black* b2 Green

Black*** b2

Orange Black*

*** b2 Pink Black*

(full)


* b3 Red*(full)

c2 Orange

Black* b4 Blue

Black*** b4

GreenBlack**** b4

Orange Black*(f

ull)


* b5 Red*(full)

c3 Green

Black* b6 Grey

Black*** b6

Blue Black**** b6

Green Black*

(full)

a4 Red* b7 Red**** b7 Red***

* b7 Red*(full)

c4 Blue

Black* b8 Pink

Black**** b8

Grey Black**** b8

Blue Black*

(full)

a5 Red* a1 Red*(full)

c5 Grey

Black* c1 Grey Black*

(full)


5-63

Connect-orX1.1 Color Connecto

rX1.2 Color ConnectorX1.3 Color Connec-

torX1.4 Color

a6 Red** a2 Red

c6 Pink

Black** c2 Pink

Black

a7 Red** a3 Red

c7 Orange

Black** c3 Orange Black

a8 Red** a4 Red

c8 Green

Black** c4 Green Black

b1 Red** a5 Red

b2 Blue

Black** c5 Blue

Black

b3 Red** a6 Red

b4 Grey

Black** c6 Grey

Black

b5 Red*** a7 Red

b6 Pink

Black*** c7 Pink

Black

b7 Red*** a8 Red

b8 Orange

Black*** c8 Blue

Black

5.2.3 ATI Cable

Figure 5-53 shows the outline of the ATI cable.

(1) View B

Figure 5-53 Outline of the ATI cable



5-64

Table 5-75 Pin assignment of the ATI cable

ConnectorX1 Color Remarks Connector

X1 Color Remarks ConnectorX1 Color Remar

ks

a1 Red* b1 Red** c1 Red***

a2 Pink

Black* b2 Pink

Black** c2 Pink Black**

*


a4 Orange Black* b4

Orange Black** c4

Orange Black**

*


a6 Green

Black* b6 Green

Black** c6 Green Black**

*


a8 Blue

Black* b8 Blue

Black** c8 Blue Black**

*

Conn. X2 Color Remarks Conn.

X2 Color Remarks Conn. X2 Color Remarks

a1 Red**** b1 Red***** c1 Red-

a2 Pink

Black**** b2 Pink

Black***** c2 Pink

Black-


a4 Orange

Black**** b4 Orange

Black***** c4 Orange

Black-


a6 Green

Black**** b6 Green

Black***** c6 Green

Black-


a8 Blue

Black**** b8 Blue

Black***** c8 Blue

Black-

5.2.4 SRX Cable

Figure 5-54 shows the SRX cable.


5-65


Figure 5-54 Outline of the SRX cable


Table 5-76 Pin assignment of the SRX cable

Conn. X1 Conn. X3 Color Remarks Conn. X1 Conn. X4 Color Rem

arks

a1 3 Blue c1 3 Blue

a2 7 Blue-white Pair

c2 7 Blue-white Pair

a3 2 Green c3 2 Green

a8 8 Green-white

Pair c8 8 Green-whit

e Pair

a4 20 Brown c4 20 Brown

a6 6 Brown-white

Pair c6 6 Brown-whit

e Pair

a5 17 Orange c5 17 Orange

a7 15 Orange-white

Pair c7 15 Orange-whi

te Pair

Note: Pins 4 and 5 of Conn. X3 are short connected inside the connector.

Note: Pins 4 and 5 of Conn. X4 are short connected inside the connector.


5-66

Conn. X2 ConnectorX5 Color Conn. X1 Conn. X6 Color Conn. X2 Conn. X7 Color

a1 3 Blue c1 3 Blue a8 3 Blue

a2 20 Orange c3 20 Orange a7 20 Orange

a3 2 Green c2 2 Green c6 2 Green

a4 7 Brown c5 7 Brown c7 7 Brown

a5 15 Brown-white c4 15 Brown-white c8 15 Brown-whit

e

Note: Pins 4 and 5 of Conn. X5 are short connected in the connector.

Pins 15 and 17 of Conn. X5 are short connected in the connector.

Pins 6, 8 and 20 of Conn. X5 are short connected inside the connector.







5.2.5 H302HSL Cable

I. H302HSL V.35 DCE/FE1 cable

(1) View A (2) Label 3 (3) Label 2 (4) Label 1 (5) Main label (6) Cable tie (7) View B

Figure 5-55 Outline of the H302HSL V.35 DCE/FE1 cable



5-67

Table 5-77 Pin assignment of the H302HSL V.35 DCE/FE1 cable

Conn. X1 Color Conn. X2 Remarks

P Yellow c5

S Yellow/Black a5 Pair

U Red a4

W Red/Black c4 Pair

R Brown c1

T Brown/White a1 Pair

Y Blue a3

AA Blue/Yellow c3 Pair

V Blue a2

X Blue/Black c2 Pair

B Green a6

C

D Short in Conn. X1 with wires

E

F

H

Short in Conn. X1 with wires

Conn. X2 Remarks Cable

A7 Tip

C7 Ring W1

A8 Tip

C8 Ring W2


Table 5-78 Labels on the H302HSL cable

Label Label 1 Label 2 Label 3

Content HSL V.35DCE/FE1 cable R T


5-68

II. H302HSL 75Ω FE1 cable

(1) Label 2 (2) Cable tie (3) Main label (4) A view (5) Label 1

Figure 5-56 Outline of the H302HSL 75Ω FE1 cable


Table 5-79 Pin assignment of the H302HSL 75Ω FE1 cable

Conn. X Remarks Cable

a7 Tip

c7 Ring W1

a8 Tip

c8 Ring W2


Table 5-80 Label description of the H302HSL 75Ω FE1 cable

Label Label 1 Label 2

Content R T

III. H302HSL 120Ω FE1 cable

(1) Label 3 (2) Main label (3) Cable tie (4) Label 1 (5) A view (6) Label 2

Figure 5-57 Outline of the H302HSL 120Ω FE1 cable


5-69


Table 5-81 Pin assignment of the H302HSL 120Ω FE1 cable

Conn. X1 Remarks Cable

a7

c7 Pair

b4 Grounding cable

W1

b4 Grounding cable

a8

c8 Pair

W2


Table 5-82 Labels on the H302HSL 120Ω FE1 cable

Label Label 1 Label 2 Label 3

Content HSL 120Ω FE1 cable R T

IV. H302HSL V.35DCE cable

(1) A view (2) Plastic cover (3) Main label (4) Label 1 (5) B view

Figure 5-58 Outline of the H302HSL V.35DCE cable



5-70

Table 5-83 Pin assignment of the H302HSL V.35DCE cable


R c1 P c5

T a1 Pair

S a5 Pair

V a2 B a6

X c2 Pair

E

Y a3 F

AA c3 Pair

H

In the Conn.X1, short Pins E and F with cable W2. Short Pins F and H with cable W3.

U a4 C

W c4 Pair

D In the Conn.X1, short Pins C and D with cable W4.

5.2.6 H303HSL Cable

Figure 5-59 shows the outline of the 2-SHDSL-interface cable of the H303HSL board.

(1) Cable tie (2) Heat shrink tube (3) Main label (4)–(15) Labels 1–12 W: Twisted pair

Figure 5-59 Outline of the 2-SHDSL-interface cable of the H303HSL board



5-71

Table 5-84 Pin assignment of the 2-SHDSL-interface cable of the H303HSL board

Conn. X1 Cable color Remarks Label Conn. X3 Cable

color Remark

s Label

a7 Pink/red* a7 Grey/red*

c7 Pink/black* One pair Label

1 c7 Grey/bla

ck*

One pair Label 5

a8 Orange/red* a8 Pink/red*

c8 Orange/black*

One pair Label 2 c8 Pink/blac

k* One pair Label 6

Conn. X2 Cable color Remarks Label Conn. X4 Cable

color Remark

s Label

a7 Green/red* a7 Green/red*

c7 Green/black* One pair Label

3 c7 Green/bl

ack*

One pair Label 7

a8 Blue/red* a8 Blue/red*

c8 Blue/black* One pair Label

4 c8 Blue/black*

One pair Label 8


Table 5-85 Labels on the 2-SHDSL-interface cable of the H303HSL board

Label Content

Label 1 HSL-1 Channel0








Label 9 HSL-1

Label 10 HSL-2

Label 11 HSL-3

Label 12 HSL-4


5-72

5.2.7 DDU Cable

Figure 5-60 shows the DDU V.35 cable.


Figure 5-60 Outline of the DDU V.35 cable


Table 5-86 Pin assignment of the DDU V.35 cable


B a6 U c4

C Twisted pair 12

W c3 Twisted pair 2

D

R a8

E In the Conn. X1, short Pins C

and D. T a7 Twisted pair 5

F V c8

H

In the Conn. X1, short Pins E, F, and H. X c7

Twisted pair 4

P c2 Y c6

S c1 Twisted pair 1

AA c5 Twisted pair 3

Figure 5-61 shows the DDU V.24 cable.


Figure 5-61 Outline of the DDU V.24 cable



5-73

Table 5-87 Pin assignment of the DDU V.24 cable


4 2 c1

5 In the Conn. X1, short

Pins 4 and 5. 3 c3

Twisted pair 5

Twisted pair 9

6 17 a7

8 15 a8

Twisted pair 7

Twisted pair 8

20

In the Conn. X1, short Pins 6, 8 and 20.

7 a6 Twisted pair 1

5.2.8 SDL Subscriber Line

Figure 5-62 shows the outline of 4-SHDSL-interface subscriber line of the H521SDL board.

(1) A direction (2) 3 × 8-PIN female connector (3) Tie (4) Heat shrink tube (5) Main label (6) Label 1 (7) Label 2 (8) Label 3 (9) Label 4 (10) Label 5 (11) Label 6 (12) Label 7 (13) Label 8 (14) Label 9 (15) Label 10 W: Communication cable

Figure 5-62 Outline of the 4-SHDSL-interface subscriber line of the H521SDL board


Table 5-88 Pin assignment of the 4-SHDSL-interface subscriber line of the H521SDL board

Conn. X1 Cable color Remarks

a5 pink/red*

c5 pink/black* one pair

a6 orange/red*

c6 orange/black* one pair

a7 green/red* one pair


5-74


c7 green/black*

a8 blue/red*

c8 blue/black* one pair


a5 pink/red*

c5 pink/black* one pair

a6 orange/red*

c6 orange/black* one pair

a7 green/red*

c7 green/black* one pair

a8 blue/red*

c8 blue/black* one pair


Table 5-89 Label description of H521SDL four SHDSL interface cable

Label Label 1 Label 2 Label 3 Label 4 Label 5 Label 6 Label 7 Label 8 Label 9 Label 10

Description

H521SDL-1

Channel0

H521SDL-1

Channel1

H521SDL-1

Channel2

H521SDL-1

Channel3

H521SDL-2

Channel0

H521SDL-2

Channel1

H521SDL-2

Channel2

H521SDL-2

Channel3

H521SDL-1

Down(25–32)

H521SDL-2

Down(25–32)

5.2.9 ADLA Subscriber Line

The subscriber line used for the H601ADLA is the same as the narrowband 32-port subscriber line. Refer to Figure 5-52 and Table 5-74. The fore 16 ports are ADSL signals, and the latter 16 ports are POTS signals.

5.2.10 ADMB/ADMC Subscriber Line

The subscriber line used for the H601ADLA is the same as the narrowband 32-port subscriber line. Refer to Figure 5-52 and Table 5-74. The fore 16 ports are ADSL signals, and the latter 16 ports are POTS signals.


5-75

5.2.11 CSLA Subscriber Line

The subscriber line used for the H601CSLA is the same as the narrowband 16-port subscriber line. Refer to Figure 5-51 and Table 5-73.

5.2.12 SDLA Subscriber Line

The subscriber line used for the H601SDLA is the same as the narrowband 16-port subscriber line. Refer to Figure 5-51 and Table 5-73.

5.2.13 VDLA Subscriber Line

The subscriber line used for the H601VDLA is the same as the narrowband 32-port subscriber line.

5.3 Maintenance Cable and Network Cable

5.3.1 Serial Port Cable

A serial port cable is front-access-cabled from the front panel of the board. It can be used for debugging and remote maintenance. One end of such cable is an 8-PIN RJ-45 connector, which is used to connect the board, and the other end is a DB-9 or DB-25 female connector. For connection with computer, the DB-9 female connector is used.

Figure 5-63 shows the cable.

(1) View A (2) DB-25 connector (3) Label (4) Network interface connector (5) View B (6) View C (7) DB-9 connector W1, W2: Communication cables

Figure 5-63 Outline of serial port cable


5-76


Table 5-90 Pin assignment of the serial port cable

Connector Relationship

X2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Shell

X1 5 6 3 1 7 2 20 4 Shell

X3 8 6 2 5 1 3 4 7 Shell

5.3.2 Network Cable

There are two types of network cables: straight through cable and cross over cable.

The straight through cable is used to connect the data terminal equipment (DTE) with the network.

The cross over cable is used to directly connect two maintenance terminals.

These two types of network cables have the same structure and use the RJ-45 connector at both ends. Figure 5-64 shows the outline of the straight through cable.

Figure 5-64 Outline of straight through cable

The straight through cable has different pin assignment from the cross-over cable. Refer to the following description.

The line sequences at two ends of the straight through cable are completely the same. The pin assignment of the eight pins of Connectors X1 is consistent with that of Connectors X1. See Table 5-91.

Table 5-91 Pin assignment of the straight through cable

Conn. X1 8-core category 5 twisted pair Conn. X2


Pin 2 Orange Pin 2


Pin 4 Blue Pin 4



5-77


Pin 6 Green Pin 6


Pin 8 Brown Pin 8

However, the line sequences at two ends of the cross-over cable are “crossed” to some extent. Table 5-92 shows its pin assignment.

Table 5-92 Pin assignment of the cross over cable



Pin 2 Orange Pin 6


Pin 4 Blue Pin 4


Pin 6 Green Pin 2


Pin 8 Brown Pin 8

RJ-45 connectors are used to connect Ethernet interfaces. They can be connected with Category-3 and Category-5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs (UTP-3 and UTP-5) or Shielded Twisted Pair (STP).

Caution:

For the Category-5 UTP, the maximum transmission distance of single segment without repeater is 100 m. When the repeaters are used, the maximum space between repeaters is 5 m. Due to the delay and signal timing, a maximum of two repeaters can be used. Therefore, the maximum distance between two sites is 205 m.

To get the best electrical transmission characteristics, make sure that 1 and 2, 3 and 6 are just two cable cores of the twisted pair.


5-78

5.4 HW Cable

The PV8 board provides 32 differential HW interfaces. The HWC board has two types of HW cables: one that can subtend four RSP frames; the other that can subtend eight RSP frames.

I. HW cable subtending four RSP frames

The HW cable provides four HW interfaces for each RSP board. Figure 5-65 shows its outline, and Table 5-93 and Table 5-94 show its pin assignment.

(1) View A (2) Wire connector-4 × 8-PIN Female (3) Label 1 (4) Cable tie (5) Label 2 W: flat cable-twisted pair

Figure 5-65 Outline of the HW cable subtending four RSP frames

Table 5-93 Pin assignment 1 of the HW cable subtending four RSP frames


b1 a1

d1 c1 One pair

b2 a2

d2 c2 One pair

b3 a3

d3 c3 One pair

b4 a4

d4 c4 One pair

b5 a5

d5 c5 One pair

b6 a6

d6 c6 One pair

b7 a7

d7 c7 One pair


5-79


b8 a8

d8 c8 One pair

Table 5-94 Pin assignment 1 of the HW cable subtending four RSP frames


c1 b1

c5 b5 One pair

c2 b2

c6 b6 One pair

c3 b3

c7 b7 One pair

c4 b4

c8 b8 One pair

Table 5-95 describes the label.

Table 5-95 Label on the HW cable subtending four RSP frames

Label 1 Label 2

HWC RSP DOWN(17-24)/(25-32)

II. HW cable subtending eight RSP frames

The HW cable provide two HW interfaces for each RSP board, one PV8 board can subtend up to eight RSP frames. Figure 5-66 shows its outline, Table 5-96 and Table 5-97 show its pin assignment.


5-80

(1) View A (2) Label 1 (3) Label 2 (4) Label 3 (5) Cable tie (6) Wire connector -4 × 8-PIN female

W: flat cable – twisted pair

Figure 5-66 Outline of the HW cable subtending eight RSP frames

Table 5-96 Pin assignment (1) of the HW cable subtending eight RSP frames


b5 a5 b1 a1

d5 c5 One pair

d1 c1 One pair

b6 a6 b2 a2

d6 c6 One pair

d2 c2 One pair

b7 a7 b3 a3

d7 c7 One pair

d3 c3 One pair

b8 a8 b4 a4

d8 c8 One pair

d4 c4 One pair

Table 5-97 Pin assignment (2) of the HW cable subtending eight RSP frames


b5 a5 b1 a1

d5 c5 One pair

d1 c1 One pair

b6 a6 b2 a2

d6 c6 One pair

d2 c2 One pair

b7 a7 b3 a3

d7 c7 One pair

d3 c3 One pair

b8 a8 b4 a4

d8 c8 One pair

d4 c4 One pair


5-81

Table 5-98 describes the label.

Table 5-98 Label on the HW cable subtending eight RSP frames

Label 1 Label 2 Label 3

HWC RIGHT RSP(DOWN)(17–24)/(25–32) LEFT RSP(DOWN)(17–24)/(25–32)

Hardware Description Manual HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Appendix A Abbreviations

A-1

Appendix A Abbreviations

A

AC Alternating Current

ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

B

BIOS Basic Input Output System

BRA Basic Rate Access

C

CES Circuit Emulation Service

CPE Customer Premises Equipment

CPU Center Processing Unit

CQT Circuit Quality Test

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

D

DC Direct Current

DCE Data Connection Equipment

DDF Digital Distribution Frame

DDN Digital Data Network

DTE Data Terminal Equipment

E

F

FE Fast Ethernet

FXO Foreign Exchange Office

FXS Foreign Exchange Subscriber

G

GND Ground

H

HW Highway

I


A-2

IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network

J

K

L

LE Local Exchange

LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signal

M

N

O

OLT Optical Line Terminal

ONU Optical Network Unit

P

PGND Protection Ground

PON Passive Optical Network

POTS Plain Old Telephone Service

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network

PWX Secondary Power Supply Board

Q

R

S

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SHDSL Single-pair High-speed Digital Subscriber Line

STM-1 Synchronous Transfer Mode 1

STP Shielded Twisted Pair

T

TDM Time Devision Multiplex

TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic (TTL) level

U

UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair

V

W

X


A-3

Y

Z

Documents

UA5000 Hardware Description Manual.pdf